General Catalog

TIMERS, COUNTERS, HOUR METERS, TIME SWITCHES

General Catalog
Timers, Counters, Hour Meters
 x
Table of contents 3

Information
General

Timers
General Information Timers Hour Meters
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hour meters selector chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Timers
Digital
Timers chart overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Precautions in using the LC2H series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Timers selector chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Timers selector chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Timer-related terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hour Meters LCD

Analog
Timers
On-delay timer basic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LH2H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
General application guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Precautions in using the LH2H series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Digital Timers

Accessories
Hour Meter, electromechanical

Options &

Timers
LT4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TH13 / TH23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
LT4H-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TH14 / TH24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
LT4H series cautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
TH40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Information
QM4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Counters
General
TH63 / TH64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Analog Timers TH8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Precautions in using the hour meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
S1DXM-A/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Counters
PM4H-A/S/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Options & Accessories Counters
PM4H-SD/SDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
DIN size counters common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
PM4H-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
PM4H-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Options & Accessories Counters / Hour Meters

Hour Meters
PM4H series modes and time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PM4H-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Options & accessories Counters / Hour Meters . . . . . . . 144
Installing DIN size timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Counter Applications

Hour Meters
Options & Accessories Timers Counter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

LCD
Terminal sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Time Switches
DIN size timers common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

electromechanical
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Time switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Hour Meters ,
S1DX timer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Precautions in using the a-tb time switches . . . . . . . . . . 147
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 TB72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
TB5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
General Information Counters TB62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Accessories
Options &

Counters
Counters selector chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 TB72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Counter-related terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
International Standard
Precautions in using the counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Counters / HM
International standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Accessories
Options &

Counters CE markings overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

LC4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
LC4H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Panasonic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Applications

LC4H-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Counter

Precautions in using the LC4H series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Installing the DIN size counter (common) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
LC2H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Precautions in using the LC2H series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switches
Time
International
Standards
 x
4 Timers chart overview
Information
General
Timers

Multiple
ON-delay OFF-delay Twin Flicker One-shot Star delta Integration
operation
Digital quartz timers

LT4H

LT4H LT4H (Signal) LT4H-W LT4H LT4H LT4H

LT4H-W

QM4H
Multi-range analog timer (CR oscillation)

S1DX
PM4H-S
PM4H-M PM4H-A PM4H-A
PM4H-A S1DXM-A/M PM4H-W S1DXM-M S1DXM-M PM4H-SD/SDM
Relay terminal socket

S1DXM-A/M S1DXM-M S1DXM-M

 For repetitive ON/OFF For highly accurate time
Major uses Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting
operation setting
1000h 999.9h 999.9h 9999h 9990h
100h 500h
30h

x
10h
10h
1h 60min

Timers Selector chart

30min
me range 30m
10m 16 time
8 time
ranges
8 time
ranges
8 time
ranges
10min 5
del has various
MERS SELECTOR CHART
5m ranges selectable selectable selectable
ges. See the 2m selectable
ists before 1m

Information
30s

General

Timers
10s
5s
1s
3s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.08s 0.01s 0.2s 0.5s
0.01s
0.05s
Power ON delay (1) Power ON delay (1)
Power ON delay (2) Power ON delay (2)

MERS SELECTOR CHART Power OFF-start cyclic

Signal ON delay
Signal OFF delay
Signal ON delay
Signal OFF delay
ON-start flicker
OFF-start flicker Power ON-delay
Power ON-delay
Power flicker
Power One-shot
Operation mode Pulse One-shot Pulse One-shot
Model/Product Name Model/Product Name Delay one-shot
Pulse ON-delay Pulse ON-delay
Signal Flicker Signal Flicker
Totalizing ON-delay Totalizing ON-delay Output with contact
PM4H-W Analog multi-range PM4H-W Analog
CR oscillation multi-range
counting timer PM4H-W Analog multi-range Quartz oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer
cyclic twin timer cyclic twin timer LT4H Digital
LT4H-L timer
Digital
cyclic timer
twin timer LT4H-L Digital
LT4H-W Digitaltimer
timer LT4H-W
QM4H
LT4H-LTimer
Digital timer QM4H Timer
S1DXM-A/M
LT4H-W Digital
Timertimer S1DXM-A/M
QM4H Timer
Timeraccurate S1DXM-A/M Timer
For repetitive ON/OFF For highly time
Major uses Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting Possible to set and change the
operation PowerON
Power ONdelay
delay(1) (1) Power
PowerON ONdelay
delay(1) (1) Power ON delay (1) setting
Power ONdelay
delay(2) (2) Power
PowerON ON delay
delay(2) (2) time with front digit switches With a large transparent dial.
1000h BrightPower ON
16 time ranges are selectable.
and easy-to-read display Economically
999.9h price. 999.9h Bright Power ON delay (2)
and easy-to-read display
9999h
easily during
Powerthe power 9990h
ON-delay off. This timer can ON-delay
Power
Power be attached
ON-delay Power ON-delay
Features 100h
SignalON
Simple Signal
1s to 500h (Max. range) is
operation
500h ONdelay
delay DisplaySignal
Signal ON
ONdelay
is a bright delay
reflective- Signal
Simple operation
ON-start
ON-start ONflicker
delay
flicker
SignalOFF OFFdelay
delay ON-start
Signal
SignalOFF flicker
OFFdelaydelay ON-start
Furthermore single
Power flicker
unit has a
flicker both on the DIN flicker
Power
Power rails
flickerand Power flicker
30h controlled
Power Signal
PowerinOFF-start
one unit.cyclic
Short body
OFF-start cyclic type LCD. Signal
Wide time
OFF-startOFF
setting
OFF-start delay
range
flicker
flicker Power
Power ON-delay
ON-delay
Power OFF-start cyclic Power OFF-start
PulseOne-shot
One-shot cyclic OFF-start
Pulse flicker
PulseOne-shot
One-shot Power ON-delay time OFF-start
range of
Power 0.01s flicker
One-shot to Power
panel. Power ON-delay
PowerOne-shot
One-shot 10h Power One-shot
Operation
Operationmode
mode 10h Operation mode Pulse Pulse
Delay One-shot
Delayone-shot
one-shot
PulseON-delay
ON-delay Delay
Pulse one-shot
PulseON-delay
ON-delay 9990hrs!!Delay one-shot
1h Pulse Pulse ON-delay 60min
me range (Relay outputSignal
type) Flicker
Signal (Transistor
Flicker output type) (Relay outputSignal
type) Flicker
Signal (Transistor
Flicker output type) (Relay outputSignal
type) (Transistor
Flicker output type) 30min
30m 7A
7A TotalizingON-delay
ON-delay 8 time Totalizing
TotalizingON-delay
ON-delay 8 time 8 time 10minOutput
Outputwith
withcontact
contact
10m 16 time Totalizing Totalizing ON-delay Output with contact Output with contact
oldel has various 5A 5A ranges 5A ranges 5A ranges 5A 5A
5m CR
CRoscillation ranges
oscillationcounting timer timer Quartz
Quartzoscillation
oscillationcounting timer CR
CR2 oscillation
ut
Current
CR oscillation 5A
counting timer
2m
counting timer Quartz
selectable
CR oscillation
oscillationcounting
counting timer
selectable counting timer Quartz oscillation counting
selectable timer CR oscillation counting timer
selectable Form C counting
oscillation countingtimer
timer CR oscillation counting timer
ges. See the 4 Form C
For repetitive ON/OFF For
Forrepetitive
repetitiveON/OFF
ON/OFF For repetitive ON/OFF Fortype
For highly
highlyaccurate
accurate time
time For highly accurate time
ve)
ists before
Major
Majoruses
uses 3A
1m Major uses 100mA
Suitable for super-high Suitable
Suitable for
forsuper-high
accurate,super-high 100mA
accurate,
accurate,digital
digital setting setting Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting time
digitalsetting 100mA For highly accurate
type
operation 30s operation
operation operation setting setting
setting setting
Voltage 1000h10s
1000h 250 V AC 1000h 250 V AC 30 V999.9h
DC
999.9h 250 V AC 30 V9999h
DC
999.9h
999.9h 250 V AC 9999h
9999h
30 V9990h
DC
999.9h 250 V AC 9990h 9999h
9990h 250 V AC 9990h
500h 5s
100h
100h 500h
500h100h 500h
1s
30h
30h 30h 3s 10h
0.1s 0.1s 10h 10h 10h
10h
10h
10h 0.2s 0.5s
Mounting method 0.01s 0.05s 0.05s 0.08s 0.01s
1h
1h 1h 60min 60min
30min 60min
0.05s 60min
me
merange 30min 30min
30min
range 30mTime range
30m 30m
88time
time 88time
time 88time
time 10min 8 time 10min
10min 10min
10m
10m
16 time 16 10m
16 time
time 16 time
ranges
ranges ranges
ranges ranges
ranges ranges
del has
odel hasvarious
various Each
ranges5m
5mmodel has block, cap, panel
Terminal ranges
ranges 5m Terminal block, cap, panel ranges Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel selectable selectable Terminal block, cap block,
Terminal block, cap, panel
selectable
selectable
selectable selectable
selectable selectable
ges.
ges.See
See the
the parts
Mounting selectable
various
2m time
2m ranges.
cover, selectable
selectable
rubber gasket, mounting 2m cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting mounting frame, fitting
ists
listsbefore
before See1m
1m
the product
frame lists 1m frame frame frame frame sockets, protective cover
. Model/Product Name before 30s
30sordering. 30s
10s
10s 100 to 240 V AC, 10s 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 120 V AC,
100 to 240 V AC/DC
Rated operating voltage 5s 48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC,
5s 5s
5s 24 V AC 24 V AC 24 V AC
12 to 48 V AC/DC
200 to 220 V AC,
1s
1s 12 V DC 1s
1s 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC 12 V DC, 24 V DC
(other models) 3s 3s
(other models)
0.1s PM4H-W Analog multi-range
0.1s0.1s 0.1s0.1s
0.1s 0.1s (other models)0.1s 0.1s (other models) (other models) (other models) 3s 3s 3s
0.05s 0.2s 0.5s 0.08s 0.2s
0.2s 0.5s
0.5s 0.01s 0.2s
0.2s 0.5s
0.5s
0.01s 0.01s
cyclic twin timer LT4H Digital 0.05s
0.05s 0.05s
timer0.05s0.05s
0.08s 0.08s
0.08s
0.05s
timer0.01s T.D. mode: Time delay0.01s
0.01s
0.08s Timer 0.01s
0.01s 0.01s (Relay output timer (Transistor out- LT4H-Loutput
(Relay Digital (Transistor out- LT4H-W
(Relay Digital(Transistor
output out- QM4H
0.05s Timer
2C S1DXM-A/M
0.05s
0.05s 0.05s
0.05s
Timed-out INST. mode: Time delay 1C Timed-out 2 Form C
Arrangement type) Timed- put type) Timed- type) Timed- put type) Timed- type) Timed- putchange
type) Timed- Possible to
to set
set and change
2 Form C Possible Possible andtoinstantaneous
to set and set and change
the 1C the Possible
Timed-out and
4 Form C the
change the
out 1 Form C out 1 Form A out 1 Form C out 1 Form A out 1with
time Formtime C digit
(Use
front
With with
a outswitches
MODE 1 Form A
front
large switch
digit
transparent on front)
switchesdial. time
With
time awith
large
with front
front digit
digit switches
transparent dial.
switches With
With aa large
large transparent
transparent dial.
dial.
16 time ranges are selectable. 16 time ranges are selectable. 16
16 time
Bright and
Economically
time ranges are selectable.
easy-to-read
ranges price. display Economically price. Economically
Bright Bright price.
and
and easy-to-read easy-to-read
display display
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3%
Features to±(0.005%
1s to 500h (Max. +are
50 selectable.
ms) is
range)
Bright and easy-to-read
±(0.005% + 50 ms)display Economically
easily
Display
Bright
±(0.005%
easily
during
This
is the
price.
and
+ 80
during
timer
easy-to-read
ms)
power
can the
be power
off.
attached
display
off. easily
This
easily during
timer
duringcan the
be
±1%
the power
attached
power off.
off. This
This timer
timer can
can be
be attached
attached
Features
1s to 500h (Max. range) is 1s to 500h (Max. range) is
Features Simple
Display
1s operation
is a (Max.
in500h bright range) is Displayoperation
Simple is a bright reflective- Simple
Display is aa of
Simple
Simplebright
operation operation
±(0.01%
bright
operation+ 0.05 s) Furthermore single
railsunit
andhas both on the DIN rails and
e controlledTemperature ±2%unit. case
controlled in ofone
power
unit. on start in case of power on start in case
Furthermore
reflective-type
Wide power
Furthermore
both single
ontime unitonhas
thesetting
LCD. DIN starta
single
railsunit
rangeand has a both on the DIN
Furthermore single
±5% unit has aa both on the DIN rails and
in one unit. error controlled in one Short body
reflective-type
controlled in oneLCD.unit. type LCD.
Wide time setting range Wide Widein
time setting
reflective-type case
range
LCD.
time of power
setting
of 0.01srange
on start time panel.
cyModel/Product
±(0.005% + 20 ms) ±(0.005% + 20 ms) time ±(0.005%time + 20toms)
range
range of 0.01s
panel. ±0.005% ±0.03 s
to time range
panel.range of of 0.01s
0.01s toto panel.
Model/ProductVoltage
Nameerror
Name ±0.5% in case of reset or input in case of reset or input in case of reset or input
9990hrs!! 9990hrs!! ±1%
9990hrs!! (G type only) 9990hrs!!
Setting error ±5% (Relaysignal start (Transistor output type)
output type) (Relaysignal start (Transistor output type)
output type) (Relaysignal
(Relay output start (Transistor
type)
(Relay (Transistor
(Relay output
outputtype)
type) output
(Transistoroutput
output type)
type) (Transistor output type)
outputtype)
type) ±10%
7A
(Relay output 7A type) (Transistor output type) 7A 7A
7A
Min. power off time 7A 300 ms 7A 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 100 ms 100 ms
5A Control 5A 7multi-range 5A 7 5A
5A 5A 7 5A
5A
5A 7 5A 5A
5A 5A 7 5A 5A
5A 5A 5A
5A
olin. Mechanical Control
Current 5A PM4H-W
PM4H-W Analog
× 10multi-range
Analog
Current
2Current 5A
5A 2 × 10 — 2 × 10 — 2 × 10 2 × 10
— 107 22 Form
uton) output cyclic
cyclic5twin
twintimer
timer LT4H
LT4H Digital
Digital timer
timer 7 LT4H-L
LT4H-L5 Digital
Digital timer
timer 7 LT4H-W
LT4H-W 2 Form
Digital
QM4H C
Digital timer
QM4H Timer
timer 7
Timer 2 Form C Timer
S1DXM-A/M
S1DXM-A/M Timer Form CC
output
Electrical (resistive) 10 10 5
10 10 10 105 type 105 4 Form
10 C type 2 × 1054 Form C type
type 44 Form
Form CC
3A 3A
3A 100mA 100mA type
ve) (resistive) 100mA 100mA 100mA
100mA Possible
Possibletotoset setand 100mA
andchange
type the
change the type type
Pin type 11-Pin type 11-Pin type QM4H-S type
time
timewith
withNCfront
frontdigit
digitswitches
switches With
Withaalarge
Timed-outlarge transparent
C type dial.
transparent
2 Form dial.
250Voltage
V AC 16
16time
timeranges Vare
ACselectable.
250 Voltage
ranges are
Voltageselectable. Bright
Bright and
and
250 Reset
V ACeasy-to-read
250 V
V ACAC30 Vdisplay
easy-to-read
250 display
DC Economically
250 V AC price.
Economically price.30 V DC Bright
250
Bright
250 and
V AC
Vand
VAC
250Reset AC easy-to-read
easy-to-read
250 V AC30 30
30VV Vdisplay
DC
display
DC
DC 250
250 V
V AC
AC250 V AC 30
30 V
NC
V DC
DC 250
250
250 V
V
V AC
AC
AC 250
250 V
V AC
AC
easily
easilyduring
during the
thepower
powerNO off.
off. This
Thistimer
timercancanbe beattached
attached
Features
Features 1s
1stoto500h
500hN.C. (Max.
(Max.range)
range) isis Simple operation
SimpleStartoperation N.C. Display
Displayisisaabright
brightreflective-
reflective- Simple operation
SimpleStartoperation N.C.
NO
1 4
N.C.
Stop Stop Furthermore
Furthermore single
single
4 5
unit
unit has
has aa both
both on
on the
the DIN
DIN rails
rails and
and
controlled
controlled ininone
oneunit.
unit. Short
Shortbodybody 5 6 7 N.O. type
typeLCD.
LCD. Wide
Widetime Lock setting
time setting5 6range
range
7 N.O.
3 6
N.O.
5 4
N.O. Lock 4 8 4 8 time
time
MODE range
rangeofof0.01s0.01stoto panel.
panel.
5 8
3 6
Mounting method Mounting
Mounting method
method
3 9 3 9
9990hrs!!
9990hrs!! 2 7
2 7 2 10 2 10 1 8 9 12
1 11 NC 1 11
1 8 (Relay
(Relayoutput
outputtype) (Transistor
(Transistoroutput
type) Operating outputtype)
type) (Relay
(Relayoutput
outputtype)
Start type) (Transistor
(Transistoroutput
outputtype)
type) (Relay
(Relayoutput
outputtype) (Transistor
(Transistoroutput
type) Operating outputtype)
type) COM COM 13 14
NO 7A
7A
7A
7A Operating voltage – voltage + Reset 4 5 – + Operating
(–) (+) voltage
voltage Operating
5A
5A 5A
5A block, cap, panel 5A
5A 3 6 Terminal 5A
5A block, cap, panel 5A
5Acap, panel voltage 5A
5A
ol Terminal
rol Terminal Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block, cap
cap block,
nal block,
layouts and 5A Terminal block, cap, panel
cap,diagrams
Wiring
Current
Current panel 5A Terminal
Terminalblock, block,cap, cap,panel panel 7
Terminal
Terminalblock, block,cap, cap,panelpanel Terminal
Terminalblock, block,cap cap, panel
cap,block,
panel Terminal
Terminal
22Form
Form
block,
block, cap
cap,block,
CC gasket, panel block,
Mounting parts Screw
cover, terminal
rubber gasket, type 2 Screw
cover, terminal
rubber gasket, typemounting QM4H-G
cover, rubber type
gasket, mounting cover, rubber mounting mounting
utut cover,
Mounting
rubberparts
gasket, Screw
cover,
Mountingterminal
rubber partstypemounting
gasket, cover,
cover,rubberrubbergasket, gasket,mounting cover, rubber gasket,
1 8 mounting cover,rubber
cover, rubbergasket, gasket,mounting mounting cover,
cover,rubber
mounting rubber
frame, gasket,
fittingmounting
gasket, mounting mounting
Timed-out
cover,type frame,
4 Form
rubber
type fitting
C44type
gasket, mounting
Form
Form CC mounting frame,
frame, fitting
fitting
ve)
ve)mounting frame 3A
3A frame mounting
frame
mounting
Reset frame
Start frame
100mA
100mA frame 100mA
100mA frame
frameStart
frame 100mA
100mA frame
frame
frame
sockets,
STOP NC frame
sockets,
frame protective cover type sockets,
sockets, protective cover
protective
RESETprotective cover cover
Operating
Reset
NO
type
Stop – voltage +
1006 to7 240
8 9 V
10 AC,
100 to 240 V AC N.O.
Lock 100
Stop
to
1006 toto7240 240 V AC 100 to 42405V AC 1 2 3 4 100 to 120 V AC
100 to 240 V AC
Voltage
N.C. N.O.
250
250VVAC
N.C. N.O.
250 100
100 toto7240
2408 V 9VAC ACN.C. 250V100
250 ACto 240 V30
VAC ACVVDC 250 VV100
Lock

AC 240V9V30 AC
ACVDC
10 V
N.O.
100
100
100 to250 toto 240
120 VV AC
AC 100toto240
100 250
120VVAC/DC
VV7V
AC
AC, 100 to 120 V AC
Voltage AC 250
48 toVV125V
AC
AC6 DC, 2430 30V VAC/DC
VDC DC 30 DC 250100 AC
to24 240V8VAC
24 30
AC/DC DC 3240VVAC
250
24 V AC AC/DC 5 100 250
to 240 AC
VAC/DC
10

48 tooperating
125V DC,voltage
2411V AC/DC,
6
200 to 220 V AC
Rated48 to 125V DC,
operating 24 V AC/DC Rated
voltage 48 to 125V 24DC, V AC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC 24VVAC AC N.C. 200toto
12 24
48220VV AC V AC
AC/DC
200
12 6toto48
220
V AC/DCAC,8 200 to 220 V AC
Rated operating 12 Vvoltage
1 2 3 4 5
DC 122 V3 DC 1212 to 48
12 to 24 V AC/DC
V DC 12 2to 24 V DC 7 12VtoDC,48 V24AC/DC 12 V DC, 24 V DC
12 V DC 12 1to 1224 VV DC 4
DC5 12 to 24 V DC 121toto224 243 VV4DC DC 12
12(other
V DC, to 2424V8VDC DC 9 12 (other 11
10 V DC
models) 12 12 V DC, 24 V DC
(other
(othermodels) (other1models) (other models)
5

(other models) (other models) (other models) models)COM (other models)

(other models) Operating
(+) voltage (–)
(other
(other– models)
Operating models) (other models) (othermodels)models) (othermodels)
(other
COM models) 13 (other models) 14 (other models)
Mounting
Mountingmethod
method + voltage
(Relay+ T.D.
output
Operating
voltage – (Transistor output (RelayT.D. output Operating
mode:voltage (Transistor
delay 2C output
Time(Transistor T.D.Operating
mode: Time delay 2C
(Relayoutput
(Relay output Timed-out (Transistoroutput
(Transistor out- (Relayoutput
(Relay (Transistoroutput
output (Transistor out- (Relay output
(Relay output mode: Time(Transistor
delay 2C out-
(Transistor output (Relay output output T.D. mode: Time delay 2C
INST. mode: Time delay 1C Timed-out 2 Form C
Timed-out ArrangementTimed-out Timed-out type) Timed-out
INST. mode: Time type)
delay Timed-out
1CTimed-1 Timed-out
type)INST.
Timed-out
mode: Time 2 type)
Form C1C
Timed-out
delay Timed-out
INST. voltage 2 Form C Timed-out 2 Form C
Arrangement Arrangement type)Timed-out
type) Timed-2 Form putCtype)
type) Timed-1
Timed-out type)Timed-out
type) Timed- type) put type) Timed-
Timed-out type) Timed-
type) Timed-out put
type)type)
Timed-out 1 type) Timed-out
and instantaneous type) 1CTimed-out andmode: Time delay
instantaneous 1C1C Timed-out 4 Form C
2 Form C
Available standards UL/CSA, 2 FormCE, C
LLOYD 2CForm
UL/c-UL, CEC1 Form A UL/c-UL, CE 1 Form and instantaneous
C UL/c-UL, Form
CE 1C A A 1 Form Timed-out
C UL/c-UL, 4 1Form
Form CA
CE Timed-out
andMODE
(UseUL/c-UL, 4 Form
instantaneous
switch
CEon1C C
front) Timed-out 4 Form C
out 1
1 Form C Form out
Form A out 1
1 Form C Form C 1 Form A A
out 1 Form out 1 Form
1 Form(Use C
C MODE switch out
Form 1 Form
A
on front) 1 Form
(UseCMODE switch 1 Form A
on front) (Use MODE switch on front)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% Terminal block, cap, panel ±(0.005% +cap,50ms)ms) ±(0.005% +cap,
80 panel
ms) ±1%
Page±0.3%
Operation time fluctuation TerminalTerminal block,
block,
P. 29
±0.3% cap,
cap,panel
panel Terminal
Terminal
±(0.005% block,
block, P. +34cap,
cap,
50 ms) panel
panel Terminal
±(0.005% block, cap,
P. +3450 ms)
80 panel Terminal
Terminal
±(0.005% block,
block,
P.
±(0.005% + 50 ms) +41cap,
80 panel
panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block,
±(0.005% P. 50 cap,
+0.05 panel
80 ms) Terminal
Terminal block,
block,
±(0.01% P.
±1% cap
0.05block,
cap
+57 block,
s)
case ±1% ±1%
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% ±(0.01% +gasket, s)mounting
Mounting
Mountingparts cover,
cover,rubber gasket,
gasket,mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, ±(0.01%
inin caseofofgasket, power
+power onstart
0.05 s)mounting start inrubber ofgasket,
power on start ±(0.01% + 0.05
fittings)on start
e
parts
Temperature
±2% Time
error Time frame
rubber
Temperature
±2%
Temperature
mounting
error
error
cover,
cover,in rubber
rubber
case of gasket,
gasket,
±2%
±2% on start
power mounting
mounting cover, rubber
in case of gasket,
power on mounting
start cover, inrubber
rubber
case ofgasket,
case poweron mounting
on start cover,
cover, in rubber
case
case of±5%
in±(0.005% of power
power
mounting
on start
on start
mounting
mounting frame,
in caseframe,
of
±5%
fitting
power ±5%
±5%
frame frame
frame frame
frame frame
frame in±(0.005%
case of power
±(0.005% + 20ms) ms)
on start frame
frame + 20 ms) in case
sockets,
sockets, of power
protective
protective coveron start
cover
cy
accuracy Voltage error ±(0.005% ±0.5%+ 20 ms) ±(0.005% + 20 ms) ±(0.005%++20 20 ms) ±(0.005%±0.03
±0.005% + 20 ms) ±0.005% ±0.03 s ±1%
±0.5% error accuracy
Voltage 100
100toto ±0.5%
Voltage
240
240VVAC, error ±0.5% 100
100toto of240 VVor
AC ±0.005%
inin case
100
100toto ±0.03
ofof reset sor input in case ±1% of reset sor input ±0.005% to±1%±0.03 s ±1%
Setting error
AC, 100
100toto
in case of 240
240
reset
±5%
VVor AC
ACinput in case 240
reset ACinput incase
case of240
240
reset
reset VVorAC
ACinput
or input (Gin
100
100case of reset
totostart
type 240
240
only) VVAC/DCor input
AC/DC (G100
typeto
100 120
120
only) VVAC,
AC,
±10%
Setting ±5%24 (Gsignal
type24 start
only) signal (G200
type only)
200toto±10%
±5% error 48
48toto125V DC,
125VSetting
DC, VVAC/DC,
24error AC/DC, signal start 2424±5%VVAC AC signal start24
24VVAC AC signal
signalstart 24
start VVAC AC signal ±10% 220
220VVAC, AC, ±10%
Rated
Ratedoperating
operatingvoltage
voltage Min. power12 offVVtime 300 ms 500 ms 12totostart
12 48
48VVms
500 AC/DC
AC/DC 10024 msVVDC 100 ms
Min. power300 off time
ms Min. power12 300 DC
DC
ms
off time 1212to to
500
30024
24ms VVDC
ms DC 12
12to to24
500 VVDC
24ms DC 1212to to
500
100
50024
24ms VVDC
ms DC 100
500 ms
ms 12
12VVDC,DC,
100
100ms 24
ms7 DC 100 ms
(other
(othermodels) models)
Life (Min. (other
(other models)
models)
Mechanical (other
(other
7 2 × 107 models)
models)7
(other
(other models)
models) 2 × 10 (other
(other
7
models)
models) — 2 × 1077 — (other
(other models)
models)
2 × 7107 1077
in. 2Mechanical
× 107 Life (Min. × 107
2Mechanical 2 × 107 2 × 10 — 2 × 107
7
— 22××10 10
77
2 × 107 — — 2 × 10 2× 1010 7 7
—7 2 10
× 10 10
operation) Electrical (Relay
(Relayoutput output 10(Transistor
5
5(Transistor
out-
out- (Relay output (Transistor
(Relayoutput (Transistor out-
out- (Relay
(Relay10 output
5
output (Transistor
5 (Transistor10777 out-
out- T.D.1055mode:
T.D. mode:Time Time delay
delay102C
2C 1055 5 2 × 1055
on) Electrical
105 operation) Timed-out
105
Timed-out 105 10put 107 105 107 1010
55
10 10 5 5 7 Timed-out2 ×1010
Timed-out 22Form
FormCC
Electrical Timed- 10 put 10Timed- 10 mode: 2 × Time10 delay 101C 2 × 10
INST.
INST. mode: Time delay 1C
Arrangement
Arrangement type)
type)
Pin type Timed-
Timed- put type)
type) Timed-
Timed- type) Timed- put
type)Timed- puttype)
type)Timed-
Timed- type)
type)Timed- puttype)
type) Timed- 11-Pin and type
andinstantaneous
instantaneous1C 1C QM4H-S type
22Form
FormCC 11-Pin type 11-Pin type 11-Pin
QM4H-S type QM4H-S type Timed-out
Timed-out 44Form
FormCC Timed-out 2 Form C type
Pin type Pin type out
Pin
out 11type
Form
Form CC out out11Form FormAA out
out 11Form
Form CC out out11Form
FormAA out
out 11Form
Form CCtypeout out11Form FormAA 11-Pin
(Use
(UseMODE
Timed-out
type
MODE
2 Form C typeNC switch
switchon onfront)
front) QM4H-S
Timed-outNCNC type
2 Form C typeNC NC
Timed-out 2 Form C type
NC NC Reset
NC
Operation
Operationtime timefluctuation
fluctuation ±0.3%
±0.3% ±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Reset ++5050ms) ms) ±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Reset ++50
50ms)ms) ±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Reset ++80 80ms) ms)NO Start
Reset ±1%
NO
±1% NO
Start N.C. N.C.
Start
NO
Start ±(0.01%
1±(0.01%
NO
Start
Stop + 0.05 s) NON.C.
+4 50.05
6 s) NO 4 5 NO 1 4

Temperature
Temperature
N.C.
error
error
N.C.
±2%
N.C.
±2%
N.C. ininN.O.
case
caseN.C. ofofpower
poweron N.C.start
on startN.O.
N.C.
ininStop
case
caseofofpower
poweron onstart
startN.O.
N.C.
ininStop
case
caseofof4power power 5 on start
6 7 on start
N.C. 5 47 N.C. N.O. 1 3 4
±5%
±5%
54 6 1 4
ee Stop
ininStop
case
caseofof4power
5 6 76on
power onstart
startN.O.
N.O. Lock
45 65 7 5 6 7 5 N.O. 8 MODE 5 8
N.O.
4 5
N.O. N.O.
4 5
N.O.
±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Lock
N.O.
34 4++ 205 6ms)
20 ms)
8
N.O.
±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Lock 4+ +20
20ms)ms)
8 MODE ±(0.005%
±(0.005%
Lock 3 4 + +20 20ms) 6
ms)
8 MODE
5
Lock 3 4
8 89 MODE
5
3 6
87 5 8
cy
acy Voltage
Voltage
3 6error
error ±0.5%
3±0.5%6 3 67 9 ±0.005%
±0.005% ±0.03
3
±0.03 ss 2
2±1%
±1%
inincase
caseofof 2 reset
3
reset or
or input
input inincase
caseofof2reset
3
reset10ororinput
9
input inincase
case2ofof2reset
3
reset10 or
7 input
or input
9
9 (G
2 3 2 10
7 9 1 8 7 9 12
2 7 2
±5%
7 2 21 8 710 NC
NC
(Gtype
typeonly)
only) 1 11
12 112
811 10 9
±10%1 12
±10%
913 1214
Setting
1 8 error
Setting error ±5%
1 8 signal
signalstart start1 1 811 signal
signalstart
start 1 11 NC Start
signal COMstart
signal
1
start 1 11 COM
8
NC
NO 13 COM 14
Operating
COM
13 COM Operating
8 COM
14 COM 13 14
Start Operating voltage Start Start
Reset 4 5 – voltage COM
+
(–) Operating (+) NO Operating NO Operating Operating Operating
Min.
Min.power(–) off
power offtime
time (+)
Operating voltage
(–) 300
300ms ms (+)
Operating voltage
500 4 ms
–500voltage
Reset (–) Operating ms5voltage+
(+) Reset 500
–500 ms
ms5 +
4voltage Reset 500 Operating
–500 ms5 6 + NO
ms
3 4voltage Operating
100
100 ms
ms +
– voltage
Operating 100
100ms
Operating
Operating ms
voltage Operating
voltage
6 6 voltage 6 voltage voltage
Terminal layouts and Wiring
××10 77 diagrams
22××10 77 3
— 22××10 1077
3
— 22××10 77 3 7 — voltage
22××10
1077 type
voltage77
10 voltage
in. layouts and Mechanical
Min.
nal Mechanical
Wiring diagrams Terminal layouts and22Wiring 10 diagrams Screw 10terminal type 7
—
7
— 10 2
7
— Screw terminal QM4H-G type 10 Timed-out 4 Form C type
Screw terminal type Screw terminal type Screw55terminal
Screw terminal
2 type type Screw55 terminal 2 type Screw55 terminal
QM4H-G 2 1 8type
type QM4H-G
Screw
Timed-out type type
terminal
Reset 4 Form55C type
QM4H-G
Timed-out type
4 2Form C55typeNC Timed-out 4 Form C type
on)
on) Electrical
Electrical 10
10 55
10
10 1 8 10 1077 10
10 1 8 10 1077 1010STOP Operating 1 8 NC 1077
10 10
10 STOP
2××10 10
STOP
Start NC STOP
RESET NC
NO
Reset Reset Reset
–
voltage NO + Reset
Stop 1 2 3 4
Pin
Pin type
type 11-Pin
11-Pin N.O. type
Start
N.C. Stop 6type
Operating
– 7 voltage
8 9 10 + N.C. N.O.
Start
Stop – Operating
voltage +
11-Pin
Stop type
11-Pin
Start
RESET typeOperating
– 4voltage + QM4H-S
1 Stop 2 6 type
QM4H-S
Start
RESET
Lock
type3
NO
4
N.O.
1
RESET
2 3 4 3 5 6 4
4 5 NO
1 2 3 4
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
Lock
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8
N.O.
9 10
11 N.C. N.O. Lock N.O. Lock 5 N.O.
NC
NC
74 8 5 9
Lock 10
NC
NCN.C.
N.O. Timed-out
Timed-out 22Form
FormCCtype
type 5 6 7 8
6 7 8 9 10
Reset
Reset N.C. 6 7 8 9 10 Reset6 3 7 8 9 610 N.C.
Reset 63 7 8 9 610 3 6
11 11 1 2 3 4 11
5 N.C. 5 NO6
NO 7 8NO
NO N.C. 5 6 2 7 7 8 5 6 7 8
Start
Start N.C. Start
Start N.C.
N.C. 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 1 N.C.
2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 N.C. 12 244 3 554 75 11 447
Stop 2 7 2
N.C. N.C.
N.C. 1 8
Stop
Stop 1 2 3 664 5 N.O. Stop 66 N.O.
N.O.
Operating55 77 N.O. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 55
3 84 775 9 10 133 21113 8 4 66512 9 10
COM 11 8
1
12
COM 913 10 11 1214
N.O.
N.O. N.O.
N.O. Lock
Lock Lock
Lock
44 55 voltage
(+) 44 88 (–) 44 88 MODE
MODE
13 + Operating 14 13 55 88 14 13 14
Operating Operating
33 66 Operating
Operating 3 99
COM COM COM
voltage – COM COM Operating COM Operating
(+) voltage (–) (+) voltage (–) + –3
(+) voltage (–) Operating 33 99 Operating22 77
77
voltage
22 10
10 +
Operating
voltage – + voltage Operating
– 22 10
10 + voltage Operating
Operating
– 99 voltage
Operating
Operating12
12 voltage
Operating
22 11 88
11 88
11 11
11
Start
NC
NC voltage11 11
11
COM
COM
voltage
voltage COM
COM 13
13 voltage
voltage 14
14 voltage
Start
Available(–)(–)standards
Operating
Operatingvoltage
voltage UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD ––
Operating
Operating
voltage ++
voltage Reset
Reset 44 55
NO
NO UL/c-UL, CE Operating
Operating
–– voltage
voltage ++
UL/c-UL,
OperatingCE
Operating UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE
Available standards
UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA,
Available CE, LLOYD
standards
(+)
(+)
UL/CSA,
UL/c-UL,
CE,CELLOYD UL/c-UL, CE66 UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CECE UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,
voltageCE
CE Operating
Operating
UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL, CE
CE UL/c-UL, CE
33 voltage
Page P. 29 P. 34 P. 41 P. 50
voltage
voltage P. 57
nal
nallayouts and
andWiring
layoutsPage P. 29 diagrams
Wiring diagrams PageP. 29 P.
P.34
29 type 34 77 41 50 P.
P.57
Screw
Screw terminal
terminal type
type Screw
Screw terminal
terminal type 2P.
2 41 Screw P.
P.50
34 type
Screw terminal
terminal type QM4H-GP.
QM4H-G P.57
type41
type 50 P. 57
11 88 Timed-out
Timed-out44Form
FormCCtype
type
Reset
Reset Reset
Reset STOP
STOP NC
NC
Start Operating
–– Operating
Start Start
Start RESET
RESET NO
NO
voltage ++
Stop
Stop
Lock
Lock N.O.
N.O. voltage Stop
Stop
Lock 44 55 11 22 33 44
N.C.N.O.
N.C. N.O. Lock N.O.
N.O.
N.C.
N.C.N.O.
N.O. 66 77 88 99 10
10
66 77 88 99 10
10
N.C. 66 77 88 99 10
10 33 66
11
11 N.C. N.C.
N.C. 55 66 77 88
11 22 33 44 55 22 77
11 22 33 44 55
11 22 33 44 55 11 88
99 10
10 11
11 12
12
Operating
Operating COM
COM COM
COM 13
13 14
14
Operating
Operating
(+)
(+) voltage
voltage (–)
(–) ++ voltage ––
voltage Operating
Operating
Operating
Operating
++ voltage
voltage –– Operating
Operating
voltage
voltage voltage
voltage

Available
Availablestandards
standards UL/CSA,
UL/CSA,CE,
CE,LLOYD
LLOYD UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CE
CE UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CE
CE UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CE
CE UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CE
CE UL/c-UL,
UL/c-UL,CE
CE
Page
Page P.
P.29
29 P.
P.34
34 P.
P.34
34 P.
P.41
41 P.
P.50
50 P.
P.57
57
 Pulse One-cycle
CR oscillation counting timer
CR oscillation counting timer
For time control for short For time control for short For time control for short For all uses of power
For time controlMajor uses
for short For time control for short
or long time For time control for short
or long time or long timecircuit
For self holding circuit
For all uses ofFor SD motor start-up
power OFF-delay
Major uses For self holding For SD motor start-up
or long time or long time or long time OFF-delay
1000h

x
1000h 100h 500h
100h 30h 500h
30h
6 Timers selector chart
10h
10h 1h
1h Time range 30m
Time range 30m 10m 10min
16 time
10m Each model has various 5m 16 time ranges 10min
Each model has various 5m time ranges. See the 2m ranges selectable

TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

3 time

TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

100s
Information

2m selectable

TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

me ranges. See the product lists before 1m 3 time ranges
General

100s
Timers

roduct lists before 1m 30s 4 time ranges 4 time selectable

ordering.
rdering. 30s 4 time 10s ranges 4 time selectableranges 10s
10s ranges 5s selectable ranges 10s selectable 0.04min
5s selectable 1s selectable 0.04min 3 time ranges selectable
1s 0.1s 0.1s 3 time ranges selectable0.2s 0.04s
0.1s 0.1s 0.2s
0.01s 0.04s
0.01s

Pulse ON-delay Pulse

Pulse ON-delay
ON-delay
Pulse Flicker Power ON-delay PowerPower ON-delay
ON-delay
Pulse Flicker Pulse Flicker
Power Flicker PowerPower
FlickerFlicker

TIMERS
TIMERS SELECTOR
SELECTOR CHART
CHART
Pulse ON-Flicker Pulse
Pulse ON-Flicker
ON-Flicker
Power ON-flicker PowerPower ON-flicker
ON-flicker
Power ON-delay Power
Power
Differential ON-delay (1)(2) Differential
ON-delay
ON/OFF-delay Differential ON/OFF-delay
ON/OFF-delay
Power (1)(2)
ON-delay(1)(2) Power
Power ON-delay
ON-delay Star-Delta Star-Delta
Star-Delta
Power OFF-delay Power OFF-delay
Power OFF-delay
Operation mode Operation
Operation mode
mode
Model/Product Name Power One-shot PowerPower
One-shot
One-shot
Signal OFF-delay Signal OFF-delay
Signal OFF-delay Model/Product
Model/ProductName
Name
Model/Product Name Power One-cycle PowerPower
One-cycle
One-cycle
Pulse One-shot Pulse One-shot
Pulse One-shot
(with instantaneous contact) (with instantaneous
(with contact)contact)
instantaneous
Pulse One-cycle Pulse One-cycle
Pulse One-cycle
PM4S PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M PM4H-SD/SDM PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
PM4S PM4H-A Multi-range analog timer PM4H-S Multi-range CR oscillation counting
PM4H-M timer CR oscillation counting
CR oscillation timer timer
counting
PM4H-SD/SDM PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R PM4H-W
PM4H-W Analog multi-range
Analog
PM4H-WOFF-delay multi-range
multi-range
analog timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Star-Delta timer timer
Multi-range
For time analog
control
Major uses timer
for short
For time
For time control
Multi-rangecontrolfor
forshort
analog timer ForMulti-range
short time control for
For time control
short timer For Multi-range
analog
for short
timetime
For control foranalog
control short timer For
for short Star-Delta 16 timer
self holding circuit
time ranges ForOFF-delay
For
SDall
are selectable. uses
motor timer
of power
start-up
cyclic
For all uses
Forofall usescyclic
twin
power timer twin timer
of power
Major uses Major uses or long time or long time or long For
time self holding circuit For self
SD holding
motor circuit
start-up For SD
4 motor
time start-up
ranges OFF-delay
are selectable.
or long time or long time or long time 16 time ranges are or long
16
selectable.time time
ranges are selectable. 1s to 500h (Max. range) OFF-delay
is OFF-delay Multiple time ranges are
Pulse ON-delay Pulse ON-delay 16(Max.
time 4 time ranges
rangesisare selectable. are selectable. 2s toranges
100s (Max.
1000h 16 time ranges are selectable.
An affordable new series16 time ranges
1s to are
500h (Max. range)1s Power
is to 500h ON-delay
range) Power ON-delay
controlled in one Multiple time are range) is
1000h 1000h
Features 100h Pulse Flicker Pulse Flicker
selectable. 1s
Power to 500h (Max. range) 2s
500h
Flicker is to 100sPower
(Max.Flicker
range) is unit. controlled in one unit.
selectable.
Features 100h An affordable new series100h 30h
1s to 500h (Max.
timers range)
Pulse ON-Flicker is
1s to 500h controlled.
Pulse
(Max. range) is500h
ON-Flicker controlled in one
controlled
unit.
in one500h
unit. controlled
5 operation
in one unit. modes (with selectable.
5 time ranges selectable for
Power-OFF delay of max.
30h timers Power ON-delay 30h controlled. 8inON/OFF-delay
operation Power
5 operation ON-flicker
modes (with Power ON-flicker Power-OFF delay of max.
10h Power
Differential ON-delay (1)(2) controlled
ON/OFF-delay Differential
Power unit. modes
ON-delay
one available.
(1)(2) Power ON-delay
Power One-shot
instantaneous
5 time rangesStar-Delta
Power selectable
One-shot
contact)
for PowerStar-Delta
the OFF-delay
- switching times. Power Powermin. is controlled.
10 OFF-start
OFF-delay cyclic
Operation mode 10h Operation mode 10h1h 8 operation modes available.
Signal OFF-delay Signal OFF-delay instantaneous contact) available. 10 min. is
Operation controlled.
Operationmodemode
Power One-cycle the - Power switching
One-cycletimes.
1h Time range 1h
30m Pulse One-shot Pulse One-shot available.
Time range 30m Time range 30m
10m 7A Pulse One-cycle (with instantaneous16contact)time
(with instantaneous contact) 10min
Pulse One-cycle
10m
7A model Control
Each has various 10m5m 5A 5A16 time 5A
ranges16 time 5A 5A
10min 10min
Each model has various Each 5mmodel has various Current
5m
2m 5A 5A CR oscillation selectable
ranges
Control time ranges. See
outputthe 5A 5A ranges counting timer 5Acounting
CR oscillation CR timer counting timer 5A
oscillation 100s CR 3 timecounting timer
CR oscillation timer
ranges. See the Current time
meoutput 5A
2m
ranges.
product listsSee the
before 2m
1m selectable selectable ranges 33Atime
For3A
(resistive) 100s 3100s
time
1m
product For time control for short 30s1m For timecontrol
time controlfor forshort
4short Fortime
For timecontrol
controlfor
forshort
short For time control for short For all uses of43A power Forrepetitive
For
For all usesselectable
ofON/OFF
powerranges
roduct lists before
(resistive) Major uses 3A listsorbefore
ordering. Major uses
long time ororlong
longtime
time
time
ororlong
longtimetime
For self holding circuit
or long time
ForSD
For selfmotor
holding circuit
start-up For SD
Major
Major
OFF-delay uses
usesmotor ranges
time start-up
OFF-delay
30s
ordering. 10s
4 time30s ranges
4 time 4 time ranges selectable
4 time 10soperation
operation selectable
rdering. V10s
ol5s
tage 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 2ranges
50 V AC 25ranges
0 V AC
10s ranges selectable
ranges 10s selectable 10s0.04min 250 V AC
Voltage 1000h 5s
1000h
250 V AC selectable 1s
5s 250 V AC selectable 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC selectable 250 V AC 0.04min 1000h
1000h 3 time ranges selectable 0.04min
selectable
100h 100h
0.1s 500h 0.1s 500h 0.2s 100h
100h 0.04s 500h
1s 1s 3 time ranges selectable 3 time ranges selectable
30h 30h
0.01s 0.2s 0.2s 30h 30h
0.1s 0.1s
Mounting method 0.1s 0.1s 0.04s 0.04s
10h 10h 10h
10h
0.01s 0.01s
Mounting method 1h 1h 1h
1h
Time range 30mTime range 30m Time
Timerange
range 30m
30m
10m 10m 16 time 16 time 10min 10m
10m 10min
16cap,timepanel
time
Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block,
Each model has various Each 5mmodel has various 5m Terminal block, cap ranges ranges Each
Eachmodelmodel has
has cover, 5m
5mmounting cover, rubber ranges ranges
Mounting parts Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cover,cap,
rubber
panelgasket, mounting cover,cap,
Terminal block, rubber gasket,
panel mounting cover, cap,
Terminal block, rubber gasket,
panel mounting
Terminal rubber
block, cap, gasket,
panel gasket, mounting
me ranges. See the time2m ranges. See theblock, Name
Terminal
Model/Product cap 2m selectable selectable various
various time
time ranges.
ranges. 3 time 2m
2m 3selectable
selectable
time
Mounting parts 1m 1m cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber framegasket, mounting cover, rubber framegasket, mounting cover, rubber framegasket, 100smounting cover, rubber framegasket, ranges100s
mounting frame ranges
roduct lists before product lists before See
Seethe theproduct
productlists
lists 1m
1m
30s Model/Product Name 4 time30s frame 100 to 120 V AC,frame 100 to 240 V AC,frame 100 to 240 V AC,frame 100 to4before AC, frame
240 V ordering.
time selectable
30s
30s 100 to selectable
120 V AC,
rdering. Model/Product Name ordering. 4 time before ordering. 100 to4240 time V AC,
10s 100 to 120 V ranges10s
AC, 100 to 240200 V AC, to 240 V AC,
ranges 100 48 to 125V
to 240 V AC, DC, 24 V AC/DC, 100 48 to 125V
to 240 V AC,DC, 24 V AC/DC, 48 to 125Vranges
DC, 24 V AC/DC, 100 10sto 120 V AC, ranges 10s
10s 10s 200 to 240 V AC,
Rated operating voltage 24 V AC
5s 200 to 240 V AC,selectable5s PM4S
48 to 125V DC, 24 V12 selectable
V DC PM4H-A
AC/DC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V12 V DC PM4H-S
AC/DC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V12AC/DC, V DCPM4H-M 100 to 240 V AC, selectable
12 V DC PM4H-SD/SDM 200 to 240(other V AC, selectable
0.04minPM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
5s
5s 12 V DC, 240.04min
V DC, 24 V AC
Rated operating voltage 1s 1s 24 Vtimer
AC models)
12 V DC Multi-range12analog V DC timer 24 V DC Multi-range 12 analog
V DC timermodels)
(other Multi-range analog12 V DC timer Multi-range analog
(other models) (other models)Star-Delta 12 timer
V DC,3 time24 ranges
V DC, 24 VOFF-delay
selectable
AC1s
1s timer 3 time ranges
(otherselectable
models)
0.1s PM4S 0.1s PM4S
PM4H-A(other PM4H-A(other models) 0.1s PM4H-M PM4H-S(other models) 0.1s PM4H-M (other models) 0.2s PM4H-SD/SDM 0.2s0.1s PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
24 V DC Timed-out 2 Form C PM4H-S
T.D:models) Selected PM4H-SD/SDM
16 time ranges are selectable. PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
0.04s
(otherside:models)
Timed-out 0.1s1 Form A 0.04s Timed-out 0.1s 2 Form C
0.01s Multi-range analog timer 0.01s Multi-range analog timer 16Multi-range analog timer
Timed-out Multi-range analog timer
Timed-out Multi-range
Star-Delta analog
timer
Timed-out timer1 4Form C Star-Delta
time ranges
OFF-delay timer
are selectable. 0.01s
0.01s OFF-delay timer
T.D: Timed-out 2Arrangement
Form C Selected INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, bytime frontranges are selectable. 16 time ranges are selectable. 1s to 500hside: (Max.Timed-out
range) is 1 Form A
2s Timed-out
to 100sC (Max. range) side:
2 Form
is CMultiple
Timed-out time Aranges are Timed-out 1 Form C
1 Form
An Timed-out
affordable new series 1s to 500h Timed-out
(Max. range) 2isForm C 16 time Timed-out
ranges 1
are 2 Form
Form C C
selectable. 16
controlledtime
in ranges
one Instantaneous
unit. are selectable. 1 Form selectable.
Arrangement INST: Timed-out
Features 1 Form C, by front instantaneous 1 Form C switch 1s to 500h (Max. range)1 isForm C 4 timeside: Timed-out
ranges 1 Formcontrolled
are selectable. A 4 time in one unit.Instantaneous:
Timed-out
ranges 1 Form
are C 1 Form A
selectable. [F8R type]
timers
16 time ranges 2 Form areCselectable. controlled.
16 time ranges 2 FormareCselectable.controlled Instantaneous
1s to 500h is 5 operation
1s to modes
500h (with
(Max. range) is Power-OFF delay of
Multiple max.
time ranges are
instantaneous 1 Form C switch
Operation time fluctuation ±1%
(power off time change at the range of16
0.1stime ranges are ±0.3%
selectable. one(Max.
16 timein ranges
range)
unit.are selectable.
±0.3% Instantaneous:
2s to 100s (Max. range) 1 Form
±0.3% Multipleselectable
is A5 time ranges
time ranges
2s to 100s[F8R (Max.type]
for are
range)
±0.3% is10 min. is16
16 ±0.3%
time ranges are selectable.
selectable.
An affordable ±1% new series An
1s toaffordable
500h (Max. newrange)
series±2%is 1s toto 1h)
8 operation 500hmodes
(Max.available.
range) is controlled in one unit. instantaneous
controlledcontact)
in one unit. the -selectable.
switching times.
controlled.
selectable.
Features time fluctuation
Operation Features 1s to 500h (Max. range) is 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. controlled
Features
Featuresin one unit. 1s
1s to 500h (Max.
(powerTime
timers Temperature
off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h) error
timers ±0.3% controlled.
controlled.(at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C) ±0.3% ±2% ±0.3%
5 operation modes (with±2% available.
±0.3%
5 operation modes (with ±2% Power-OFF
±0.3%
delay of max. ±2% Power-OFF delayrange)±2%
of max. is
Temperature error accuracy ±2% ±1% controlled in one±2%unit. controlled in one unit.
5 time ranges±2% selectable for 5 time ranges±2% selectable for controlled
controlled in one unit.±0.5%
Time (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range ofVoltage
–10 to +50°C)error the±2%
8 operation(atmodes voltage changes between885operation
operatingavailable. to 110%) modes available.
±0.5% instantaneous±2%
instantaneous contact)±0.5%
contact)±0.5% 10 min. is controlled. ±0.5% 10 min. is controlled.
the - switching times. the - switching times.
accuracyModel/Product Nameerror
Voltage Model/Product±1% Name
Setting
(at the operating voltage changes between
7A
85 to 110%)error ±0.5% ±5% ±0.5% ±5% available. ±0.5% ±5%
available. ±0.5% ±5% ±0.5% ±5% ±5%
Control 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A
Setting error Current
±5%
Min. power off time 5A ±5% 100 ms ±5% 100 ms ±5% 100 ms ±5% 100 ms ±5% 500 ms —
output
7A 7A 3A
3A 77A
7A
Min. power off time (resistive)Life (Min. 100 5Ams MechanicalPM4H-A 105A0 ms 10 7
100Ams 2 × 107 100 ms 2 × 10 7
500 ms 2 × 10 7
5—A 2 × 10 107
Control 5A PM4S
Control 5A PM4S PM4H-A 55A
PM4H-S PM4H-S 5A 7
PM4H-M PM4H-M 5A 7
PM4H-SD/SDM Control
5Control
PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
PM4H-SD/SDM 5A
PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R
Life (Min.
Current
Mechanical output operation) Current
Multi-range 10 7
analog Electrical Multi-range
timer 107 timer
2 ×analog 105 Multi-range 107 timer
2 ×analog 105 Multi-range 2 ×analog
10 timer 10 5
Star-Delta 2timer 10
×analog 10output Current
Current
10 7
10 5 5A5A
timer 10
5
output Voltage
Multi-range
250 V AC
analog timer Multi-range analog
250 V AC5
timer Multi-range
250 V AC 5
analog timer Multi-range
250 V AC 5
timeroutput OFF-delay
Star-Delta
250 V AC 3A5
timer
timer OFF-delay
250 V AC 3A
operation)
(resistive) 3A
Electrical (resistive) 105 3A Pin10
5
type Pin10type Pin 10type Pin 10 type (resistive)
(resistive) 10
Pin type 3A
3A Pin type
16 time ranges are selectable. 16 time ranges are selectable.
4 time ranges are selectable. 4 time ranges are selectable.contact
No instantaneous
Pin type 16 time
Pin typeranges are selectable. Pin 16 time ranges
typeranges are selectable. Pin 1s totype
500h (Max. range) is 1s to 500h (Max. range) is
Pin Multiple time ranges are Multiple time ranges are
16 time areinputselectable. 16 time ranges 0 VareACselectable. 2s totype
100s 2(Max. range) is Pin
2s totype
100s2(Max. V Arange) is
Voltage An Mounting
affordable VVolAC
250new tage
methodseries 1s 500h250
Antoaffordable 2(Max. V AC
50 new Arange)
Cseriesis
NC NC
0Reset
1s to 500h25(Max. V Arange)
C
Start input is controlled in 25one unit. 50 V A
No instantaneous
N.C. controlled in one unit.
CN.C.
contact N.C. selectable. 50Voltage C
Voltage selectable.2250
50 N.C.
VV AAC
C N.C.

Features Features NO 1s to 500h (Max. Stop

NO range)
input is 1s
N.C.to 500h (Max. range) is
N.C.
controlled in one unit. controlled in one unit. N.C. N.O.
4 5
Reset input
timers controlled.
timers 4 5 controlled.N.C. N.C.
5 6 7
5 operation
N.O. modes N.O. (with
4 5 5 operation modes
N.O. N.O. (with4 5 Power-OFF
N.O. N.C. delay of4 max.
5 Power-OFFN.O. delay of max.
NC NC Start input
controlled in one unit. N.O.N.C.
8 controlled in one unit.3
N.C. N.C.
6 5 time ranges selectable 3 for 6 5 time ranges selectable
3 6 forN.O. 3 6
NO NO 8 operation modes
Stop input
N.C. MODEavailable.
3
N.C. 6
8 operation
N.O. modes available.4
N.O. instantaneous
N.O. contact) N.O. instantaneous contact) 10 min.
N.O. is controlled.
4 5 10 min. is controlled.
4 5 5 6 7 N.O. 7 4 5 3 9 4 5 7 the - 4 switching
5 times.
2 7 the - switching 2 6 times.
7 7
Mounting
N.O. 2
10 available. 6 2 1 8 available. 3method 2
MODEmethod
Mounting method 3 6 4 8 3 6 2 3 3 6 1 8 Mounting
Mounting method 1 8
3 COM
9
1 8
Terminal
COM block, cap, panel 1 11
Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel 1 8
7 2 Terminal block, cap 2 10 POWERcover, rubber gasket, (–)
2 7 Operating voltage 2 7Operating voltage 2 7 Operating voltage 2 Operating 7 voltage
Mounting parts1 8 1 11 (–) (+) 1 8 mounting cover, (+) rubber gasket, 1 mounting
8(–) cover,
(+) rubber gasket, 1 8 mounting (–) cover,(+)rubber gasket, mounting
1 8 cover, rubber gasket, mounting Operating voltage
7A COM 7A
COM
Operating voltage frame Operating voltage frame Operating voltage frame Operating voltage frame frame
(–) (+)

Terminal layouts POWER and wiring diagrams

5A 5A5AT.D. 55AA 55AA 55AA 5A
(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) Operating voltage
(–) (+) INST.
Control Current Control
5A Terminal block, Current Terminal
5A Terminal block,
100block,to 120cap cap,
V AC,3 panel Terminal Screw
block,
100 to 240 V AC, cap,terminal
panel type Terminal Screw
block,
100 to 240 V AC, terminal
cap, panel type Terminal Screw
block,
100 to 240 V AC, cap,terminal
panel type Terminal
(–)
Pin
block, typecap,
(+)
panel Terminal
Terminal
100Terminal Screw
block,
to 120 Vblock, terminal
AC, cap, panel
cap, paneltype
Terminal layouts and
output Mounting parts wiring diagrams output Mounting cap 4 4
3
100 to 240 Withgasket,
V AC, instantaneous contact
T.D. parts INST. cover, 200 rubber to 240 gasket, VtypeAC,mounting 48 cover, rubber DC,gasket, mounting 48 Screw cover,
to 125Vrubber DC, 24gasket, typemounting
V AC/DC, cover,
48 toPin125V rubber
DC, 24 V gasket,
AC/DC, mounting Screw cover,
Mounting
Mounting rubber 3A
parts mounting 200 cover,
to 240rubber
cover, V AC, gasket,
3A mounting
AC parts type cover, rubber gasket,
Screw terminal to 125V
Screw terminal 24 Vtype AC/DC, terminal type
(resistive) 3A Rated
(resistive) operating voltage 3 3A 24 Vterminal
4
3
4 frame 12 V DC frame 12 V N.C. DCN.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C.frame N.O.
12 V DC With
frame12 instantaneous
V DC contact N.C.frame frame
12 V DC,mounting
24 V DC,frame
mounting 24N.C.VN.O.AC6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
1 1 11 N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 (other
N.O. models)
24
100 to 120 V DC V AC, (other models) (other models) (other models)
100 to 240 V AC, 11 4 5 (other models)
100
100 to 120 V AC, 240 100 to 240 V1 AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 11 100 to 120 V3 AC,N.C. N.O. 1002toto50120 VVAC,
N.C. N.O.

Voltage 250 VoAC

N.C. N.O. 6 7
2250
8
520Form
9
VVAAC
10
C Selected
2 3 4 5
1002to 2550240
0VVAAVC AC, 100 to 08240 CCAC, 6
VV9 AAV 240 AC 11
1 ltage1 T.D: Timed-out
11 2 Form C N.C. N.O. 6 22 755008 VV9 AA10CC N.C. N.O. Stop N.C. N.O. 6 22 55008 VV9AA10C1C 2 N.C.3 N.O. 1C 2 3 4 5
N.C. N.O. 6 22755 0Form 10 VA 1 C
200 to 240 V AC, T.D:
48 to Timed-out
200
125V toDC, 2404 24
1 2 3 INST:
V5CTimed-out
AC,
V AC/DC, 1 Form C, 48 to 125V DC, 24
Timed-out 11
V AC/DC,input 48 to Timed-out 125V7DC, 2411V AC/DC, 4 5
48 to 125V4DC,
Timed-out 3124 Form 5 24 V AC/DC, side: Timed-out
C
200 to1 240 V112AAC, 7 Timed-out 48 to2200
48 Form
125V C240
toDC, V 2AC,
24
3 4 5
V AC/DC
AC/DC
Rated operating voltage Rated T.D: operating voltage INST: Timed-out121 Form V AC
6 Rated
Rated operating
operating 24 V AC
voltage
voltage
Arrangement12 V DC
Timed-out 2 Form C V DCC,instantaneous
Stop by front 1 Form C 12
21 Form2 3V 4
CDC5
Reset
input
2 Form1 12 2 3V DC
C(+)4 Operating Instantaneous 12 V DC C
side:12Timed-out
V DC, 1 2421 3Form
V 4DC, 5 A1 24 V AC Timed-out
8 12 V1DC, Form 12C(+)VVOperating
24 DC,
DC 24(–)V AC Reset input

2 1 Form
5 Operating
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C,
instantaneous 1 * Selected
Form C
input
by front switch Start (other models)
(+)7 voltage (–) (other models)
Resetswitch Instantaneous: 1 Form A [F8R type]
voltage (–) Operating voltage voltage
24 V DC
instantaneous 1 Form C (other24 V DC
models) input
(other models)
Operating input (other models) (other 1 8 models) (other models)
Reset input (other models)
(other models)
Operating voltage Operating Operating
Mounting method Mounting
T.D: Timed-out method
Operation
* Selected by fronttime
2 Form switchfluctuation (power off time change±1%
C Selected T.D: Timed-out 2atForm the range
Start
Cinputof 0.1s
Selected
to 1h) (+) voltage
(+)
±0.3%(–)
(–)
(+) ±0.3%
voltage (–) ±0.3%
side: Operating voltage
Timed-out 1 Form A ±0.3%
(+) voltage (–)
side:
Timed-out Timed-out 2 Form 1 Form
C A ±0.3%
Timed-out 2 Form C
Operating
(+) voltage (–) Timed-out
±2% Timed-out Timed-out Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out
Arrangement TimeINST:Arrangement
Timed-out Ava1 iForm
lableC,staerror
Temperature rds INST:
nbydafront (at 20°C Timed-out
ambient temp. at1 the Form C, by frontCE
rangeUL/c-UL, ±2%UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD ±2% UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD side: ±2% Timed-out UL/CS1AForm , CE, LALOYD Arrangement side:
±2%Timed-out
Timed-out
Arrangement UL1/CForm
SA 1 ,Form
CCE, LALOYD ±2% Timed-out UL1/CForm SA, CCE, LLOYD
2 Form Cof –10 to +50°C) 2 Form C Instantaneous 2 Form 1CForm C Instantaneous 1 Form C 2 Form C
Available standards accuracyinstantaneous 1 FormPCE
Voltage
UL/c-UL, aCerror
ge switch instantaneous
UL/Cvoltage
(at the operating
1CForm
±1%
SA,changes LCLOY
E,between P.switch
85 to 13
D 110%) UL/C±0.5% SA, CE, LLOP Y.D17 CSA, CE, LLOPY.D17
UL/±0.5% Instantaneous:
L/CSA, CE, 1LLForm
U±0.5% OPY.D17A Instantaneous:
UL/CS[F8R
±0.5% A, Ctype] E, L1LForm
OPY. D 23A ±0.5% [F8R type] P. 25
Operation time fluctuation (power Operation ±1%
time fluctuation Terminal block, ±1%
±0.3% cap, panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block,
±0.3% cap,
cap, panel
panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block, cap,
cap, panel
panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block, cap,
cap, panel
panel Terminal
Terminal block,
block, cap,
cap, panel
panel Terminal block, cap, panel
Pageparts Terminal time block, cap
Setting error Terminal block,±5% cap ±5% ±5%±0.3% ±5% ±0.3% Operation
Operation
±5% ±0.3% 2time
time fluctuation
5 fluctuation ±5% ±0.3%
±0.3%
MountingP.
at13
cover, rubberP±2% .at1the
7 rangemounting rubberPgasket, .gasket,
17 mounting rubberPgasket,
.gasket,
17 mounting rubberPgasket,
.gasket,
23 mounting rubberPgasket,.gasket,
off change the range of 0.1s to 1h) (power off time change of 0.1s to 1h)
Mounting parts
±2% gasket, cover,
cover,rubber mounting cover, cover,rubber mounting cover, cover,rubber mounting cover, cover,rubber mounting
mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting
Time Temperature errorTime (at 20°C . poTemperature
Minambient wtemp.
er oatffthetim e oferror
range –10 to +50°C) (atframe
20°C ambient temp. 100 ±2%
at ms
the range of –10 to +50°C) frame frame 100 ±2% ms frame 100 m±2%
frame s frame100 ms ±2%
frame Time frame
Time frame 500 m s ±2%
Temperature
Temperature error
error frame — ±2%
±2%
accuracy Voltage error accuracy
Life (Min. 100voltage
(at the operating to
±1%
Voltage
Mechanical
120
changesVbetweenerror
AC,85 to 110%) (at the operating 100
100 toto
voltage
±1%
10
±0.5%
240
7
120VV
changes AC,
between
AC,85 to 110%) 100
100 2 ×to±0.5%
to10
240
7
240VVAC, AC, 2 × to
10010
100 to
7
±0.5%
240
240VVAC, AC, 2 × 107±0.5%
100 to 240 V AC,accuracy
100
accuracy 2 ×100 107 Voltage
±0.5%
toVoltage
120 Verror error
AC, 107
100 to ±0.5%
±0.5%120 V AC, 3
105 to±5% 240 V AC, 100 to±5% 240 V AC,
Setting error operation) 3
5 5
200 to Electrical
Setting
240 Verror
±5% AC, 48 to 125V 200 toDC, 10
±5%24024VVAC, AC/DC, 48
48toto125V 125V 10DC,
±5%
DC,24 24VVAC/DC, AC/DC, 48 48toto125V 125V105DC, ±5%
DC,24 24VVAC/DC,
AC/DC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC, 10 5
200 to 240 Verror
Setting
Setting AC,
error 105 200 to±5% ±5%240 V AC,
Rated operating voltage Rated operating voltage 24 V AC 24 V AC
Min. power off time Min. power12 offVtims
100 m DC e Pin type 12 112
10000VVmsmDCDCs Pin type 12
11200VVm DCDC
s Pin type 12
11200VVm DC
DCs Pin type (other5112 VmDC
00models) s Pin type 12 Vpower
Min.
Min.
DC, 24
power (other 0—
5off
off
V DC,
0time
m
time s 24 VPin
models)
ACtype 12 V DC, 24—
300Vms DC, 24 V AC
24 V 7DC (other 24 models)
V7 DC 7 (other
(othermodels) models)
7 (other
(othermodels)models)
7 (other models) 77 No instantaneous (other contact
models)
7 7 (other models)7 7
Life (Min. Mechanical Life (Min. 10
Mechanical 2× 1010 Reset input 2 × 10 2 × 10 2 × 10 Life(Min.
Life (Min. 10
2Mechanical
× 10
Mechanical 10
× 107
2N.C.
operation) T.D: Timed-out 2 Form C Selected T.D: Timed-out NC2 Form C NC Selected Start input side: Timed-out 1 Form A Timed-out
side: Timed-out 2 Form 1 C
Form A N.C.
Timed-out 2 Form C
Electrical operation) 5 5 N.C. 5 N.C. N.C. N.C.
5 5
10
Electrical NO 10
Timed-out 5
NO 10
Stop input Timed-out
Timed-out N.C. Timed-out 101 Form
Timed-out C Timed-out 5
operation)
10 1N.O.Formoperation)
C 10 5
Electrical
Electrical N.O.
5
4 Timed-out
10 55
1051N.O.
Arrangement INST:Arrangement
Timed-out 1 Form C, by front INST: Timed-out 1 Form 4 5 C, by front N.O.
N.C.
5 6 7 N.O.
N.O.
4 5
N.O. N.O.
side:4 Timed-out
5 1 Form A Timed-out
4 5side: Timed-out 1 Form C A
1 Form Form C
Pin type 2 Form C6 22Form
4FormC C PinInstantaneous
type3 2 Form 6 1CForm C Instantaneous
3 6 1 Form C 3 6 3 type6
Pininstantaneous
type 12 Form C7 switch Pin type 3 PinInstantaneous:
type Pin type Pin
3 8
instantaneous 1 Form C switch MODE
9 1 Form A [F8R
Instantaneous: type] 1 Form A Pin
Pin type [F8R type]
2 10 2 7 No instantaneous
2 7 contact No 7
2 instantaneous contact 2 7
±1% ±1% 8
1 ±0.3% 1 8±0.3% 1 8 8
Operation time fluctuation (power offOperation time fluctuation
time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h) COM±0.3% 1 8
COM
(power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h)
Reset input Reset input ±0.3% 1 11
±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3%
±0.3% 1 ±0.3%
Operating voltage Operating voltage
Operating voltage N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
NC NC Start input NCPOWER NC Operating voltage
Start input
±2% ±2% (+) N.C. (+) N.C. N.C. N.C. (–) N.C. (+) N.C. (–) N.C. (+) N.C. Operating voltage
Time Temperature error Time (at 20°C ambientTemperature
NOat the range of –10 error
NO Stop input (–)
NO ±2% at the range ofNO
(–)
Stop input ±2%
±2% N.C. ±2%
±2% ±2%
±2% ±2%
±2% N.O. (–)
N.C.
(+)±2%
N.C. N.C.
N.C.
N.O.
4 54 5 444 555
temp. to +50°C) (at 20°C ambient temp.
N.C. –10 to +50°C) N.O. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.N.O.
Terminal layouts and ±1% wiring 4 5
diagrams N.O. 54 6 57 N.O. N.O. 4 5 56 7 N.O. 4 5 4 54 5 N.O. N.O.
N.O.
accuracy Voltage error accuracy(at the operating ±1% 3 3±0.5% 6 3 33±0.5%666
type 6
T.D. INST. 6 8 6 6
MODE Voltage
voltage 3
changes error
6
between 85 to 110%) (at the operating
MODE ±0.5%
voltage 34
changes
8
6
between 85 to 110%) Screw terminal 3±0.5%
±0.5%
type
4
Screw terminal3±0.5% ±0.5% Screw terminal 3 type 3±0.5%
±0.5% Pin type 6
±0.5% Screw terminal type
3 9 3 3 9
2 7 4
3 2 4 7 2 2 7 10 2 7 2 2 7 7 With instantaneous 2 2 contact
7 7 2 22±5% 777
Setting error Setting
±5%1 8error ±5%
±5% 2
11 11
8
10
±5%
±5%
1 81 11 ±5%
±5%
1 8 1 8±5% ±5%
1 8 1 ±5%81±5% 8 111 888
COM COM COM COM N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
Operating Operating
Operating voltage Operating voltagevoltage Operating voltage
Min. power off time Min. power100 tms
o(–)ff POWER
ime (+) 1 (–) 1100 0(–)0 POWER
Operating mms s 1 (+)(+)
voltage
(–) 11
(–) 000011mmvoltage
Operating ss (+)(+)
voltage
N.C. N.O. 6 7 (–)8 1 91001000mmvoltage
sN.C.s N.O.(+)(+) Operating
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8(–) 9 5 10000mN.C.
10 msN.O.
s (+) (–)
50— 0m
Operating s (+) N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 (–10)(–)(–)Operating
voltage
Operating
Operating—voltage
N.C. N.O. voltage
voltage(+)
(+)
1 2 3 4 5 11 11 4 5 11
(+)
7 77C 77 77 77 6 7 7
(Min. layouts andMechanical
Terminal
Life wiring diagrams
Terminal
Life (Min.layoutsT.D.and wiring 10 diagrams
Mechanical T.D: 2 ×1010 INST.
Timed-out 2 Form 22××10 10 22××10 10 1 2 3 4 2
25 ××1010 3
Terminallayouts
layoutsand and 10
2Wiring
× 10 diagrams
diagrams 107
INST. T.D.
Screw terminal55type Screw terminal5Reset
Stop 1 2 3 4 5
Terminal Wiring 1 2 3 4 5

5type Screw terminal55type Pin

Screw typeterminal55type Screw
Pin2 type terminal 5 5type Screw
Screw terminal 5 type
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, input
7 type
operation) Electrical operation) 10 4 5
Electrical 3 10 10 14Form C 3 10
10input 10 10 10
10 1 8 10
10 Screw terminal 10
4
3 3
4
instantaneous
* Selected by front switch
Operating
Start
With instantaneous
Operating contact With instantaneous contact Operating
Reset input

(+) voltage (–) (+) voltage (–) Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
Pin type Pin
PinN.C.type Pin type Pin
Pintype Pin
Pintype Pin
Pintype
input
type
N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. Pin
(+) type
Operating
N.C.
voltage
N.O. 6
(–)
7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. type type type Pin type
1 1 1 11 1 N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 11
10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.O. 66 77 88 99 10
10 N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.O.
No instantaneous
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 contact
N.C. N.O. NoN.C.instantaneous
N.O. 6 7 8 9 10
contact
N.C. N.O. N.C.
N.C.N.O.
N.C. N.O. 66 77 88
N.O. 6 7 8 99
9 10
10
10 N.C.N.O.
N.C.
N.C. N.O.
N.O.

Reset input1 2 3 4 5 1 2
Reset input 3 4 5
11 11
11
4 5 11 4 5 11 11
11
AvaT.D:
ilabTimed-out
le staNCnd2 aForm
rds C NC T.D: UL/c-UL,
Start Timed-out
input NC
CEStop
2 Form C
NC
UL/Start
CSinput
A1 ,N.C.
C E, LLOYDN.C.
2 3 4 5 Stop
UL/CSA,11CN.C.
E22 , L33 LO Y5D N.C.
44 5 N.C.
LLOY6 D N.C.
UL/CSA, C1E3 ,N.C.
2 3 4 5
UL/CSA, C E1, 3L2LO3YD46 5 N.C. UL/CSA, CEN.C.
N.C. , L1L11 O222Y3D33 44
11

4 555
N.C.
N.C.
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, NO input input 7 7
P. 142715 84 5
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, NO
P. 23 24 1 45 8 5Reset input
Stop input Stop input N.O. N.O.
agNO
Pinstantaneous
e 4 1 Form 5 C
NO
P. 135 416Reset
N.C.
instantaneous
N.O. 5
Form
7 C
N.C.
N.O.
N.O. PN.O.
. 1N.C.
74 55 6Reset
7
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.P. 17
N.O.
44 55
N.O.
N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.
P. 25
N.O.
4 5Reset input
6 6 6
input
3 3 (–)
input Operating
* Selected 3
MODE by front switch
6 * Selected 43
MODEby front switch
Start86
(+)
Operating
3 (–) 4
voltage
6Start 8 (+)
(+)
Operating
33 (–)
voltage (–)
66 Operating 6
3voltage3 voltage
(+) Operating (–)
6 (+) voltage
Operating voltage (+)
(+) 3 (–)(–)
Operating
Operating
Operating
voltage
voltage
voltage
input
3 9 input (+) (–)
Operating 3
2 7
(+) voltage (–)
2
2 10
7 Operating
(+) voltage (–)
2 2
7 109 22 77 2 27 7 2 2 7 7 2 7
1 81 11 88 1 8 1 8 1 1 8 8
1 8
1 8 1 118 11
COM COM COM COM
3
Operating voltage Operating voltage Operating
Operatingvoltage
voltage Operating voltage voltage
Operating Operating voltage
(–)(–) Operating voltage
Available standards AvailableUL/c-UL,daPOWER
stan(–) rdsCE (+) UL/C(–)UL/c-UL,
SA, C POWER (+)
(–)E, CE
LLOY(+)D UL/C SA, CE, LLO(+) Y(+)
D UL/C
(–)
SA, CE, LLO(+)
(–)
Y(+)D UL/C(–)SA, CE, LLOY(+)D UL/(–C) standards
Available
Available S A, CEvoltage
Operating
standards, LLO(Y+)D UL/(C–) SOperating
UL/CSA,
UL/CSA, A, CCE,
CE,E,voltage
LLLOYD
LOY(+D
LLOYD )

Terminal layoutsPand
age wiring diagrams
Terminal layouts
Paand
T.D. ge P.wiring
13 diagrams
INST. T.D. P. 13
P. 17 INST. P. 17 P. 17 P. 2137 PageP. 253 PP.. 229
5
Screw terminal type Screw
Screwterminal
terminaltype
type Screw
Screwterminal
terminaltype
type Pin typeterminal type
Screw Screw Page
terminal type
Pin type P. 29type
Screw terminal
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
With instantaneous contact With instantaneous contact
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

3 3
1 1 N.C. N.O. N.C.N.O.
N.C. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 N.C. N.O.
1 11 1 N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 11
10 N.C.
N.C.N.O.
N.O. 66 77 88 99 10
10 N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 115 11
11
4 5 11 4 5 11 11
T.D: Timed-out 2 Form C T.D: Timed-out 2 Form C
Stop
3 6 32 65
1 2 3 4 5 Stop 11 22 33 44 55 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, INST: Timed-out 1 Form input
C, input
2 7 2 7
instantaneous 1 Form C instantaneous 1Reset
Form C
input
Reset
input
1 8 1 8 Reset input Reset input
Operating Operating
Operating Operating Operating Operating
* Selected by front switch Start
* Selected by front switch (+) voltage (–)
Start
(+) voltage
(+) voltage (–)
(–) (+) Operating
voltage voltage
(–) (+) voltage
Operating(–)voltage (+) voltage (–)
input input
Operating Operating
(+) voltage (–) (+) voltage (–)

Available standards AvailableUL/c-UL,

standardCE
s UL/CUL/c-UL,
SA, CE, LCELOYD UULL/C
/CSSAA, ,CCEE, ,LLLLOOYYDD UULL/C
/CSSAA, ,CCEE, ,LLLLOOYYDD UULL/C
/CSSAA, ,CCEE, ,LLLLOOYYDD UULL/C
/CSSAA, ,CCEE, ,LLLLOOYYDD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD
Page PageP. 13 PP.. 113
7 PP. .1177 PP. .1177 PP. .2137 PP. .2253 P. 25

3 3
KW2M
 x
8 Timer-related terminology
Information
General
Timers
• What is a timer?
The timer is a relay having such an
output (with or without contact) which
electrically closes (turns ON) or opens
(turns OFF) the circuit after a preset time
elapses when electrical or mechanical
input is given.
• On-delay Operation (Time delay
operation)
The on-delay operation is an operation
to give output when preset time expires
after a predetermined input is given to
the power supply circuit or input circuit.
On-delay operation includes power sup-
ply on-delay operation and signal on-
delay operation.
Example of power supply on-delay operation
ON
Power supply
(In time delay ON
operation)
Output signal
(Time delay contact)
Operating time
• Off-delay Operation (Time delay
resetting)
The off-delay operation is an operation
to turn OFF output when preset time
expires after a predetermined input
is given to the power supply circuit or
input circuit, and at the same time out-
put signal is given and predetermined
input is turned OFF. Off-delay operation
includes power supply off-delay
operation and signal off-delay operation.
Example of power supply off-delay operation
ON
Power supply
OFF
(In time delay
ON
Output signal
(Time delay contact)
Operating time
• Flicker Operation
The flicker operation is an operation to
repeat output ON/OFF action accord-
ing to preset ON time and OFF time
while a predetermined input is given to
the power supply circuit or input circuit.
Flicker operation includes OFF-start
flicker operation and ON-start flicker
operation.
Example of OFF-start flicker operation t < t1
ON
Power supply
or signal
ON
OFF
Output signal
(Time delay contact)
t1 t2
• Star ( )/Delta (△) Operation
This operation controls the time in the
star connection used for star-delta start-
ing which is conducted for starting a
cage induction motor and the time for
switching the star connection over to
delta connection.
ON
Power supply
ON
OFF
Star side contact
ON
Delta side contact
t1 t2
t1 : Star operation time
t2 : - Star/Delta switching time
t3 : Delta operation time
• Preset Time
OFF
The preset time is the control time set by
setting time-variable timer.
OFF • Operating Time
The operating time means the time which
elapses between the addition of prede-
termined input to the power supply circuit
and input circuit and the completion of
operation for preset time.
• Hold Time
It means the time which elapses between
the completion of operation for preset
time and the start of resetting.
• Pause Time
It means the time elapses between the
start of operation for preset time and
the addition of input required again for
the power supply circuit or input circuit.
Timer does not perform normal function
unless this pause time is set longer than
the timer reset time.
operation)
• Resetting
OFF
It means that the operation returns to
the state before starting while the timer
is in operation for preset time or after it
completes the operation for preset time.
Resetting during the operation for preset
time is referred to as halfway resetting.
• Reset Time
It means the time elapses between shut-
off of input to the power supply circuit or
input of reset signal and the completion
of resetting.
Timer resetting function shares the reset
of contact, reset of mechanical parts
such as pointer etc., reset of parts in
OFF internal circuit such as capacitor etc.,
ON
and the value at which all of these parts
OFF
complete their resetting operation is
regarded as reset time. If timer is used
for a pause time shorter than specified
t1 t2 t reset time, the operation time expires
earlier than preset, unexpected instan-
t1 : Output OFF time taneous operation takes place or the
t2 : Output ON time
operation is failed, thus making it impos-
sible to expect the normal operation.
Therefore, be sure to set the timer pause
time longer than the specified reset time.
Power application time
(Input signal
application time) Pause
time
Power supply
(Input signal)
OFF Time delay contact
Internal mechanism
Internal circuit
Operating
OFF time
Reset time
Hold time
t3
• Minimum Power Application Time
It means the minimum time during which
power must be supplied in order to oper-
ate timer normally, in the case of power
supply off-delay timer.
• Fluctuation of Operating Time
It means the irregularity in operating time
caused when timer is set at specified
time and the operation is repeated under
the same conditions. It is also referred
to as repetitive error.
• Voltage Error
It means the difference between the
operating time at the rated voltage and
that within the allowable voltage range.
• Temperature Error
It means the difference between the
operating time at the temperature of
20±2°C and that within the allowable
temperature range.
• Set Error
It means the difference between the set
time and the time which actually elapses.
It is also referred to as setting error.
The set error of an analog timer is the
rate to the full-scale value. If the set error
is ±5%, it becomes equivalent to an error
of maximum ±5 hours on the assump-
tion that 100 hours is set in the range of
100 hours. The error produced when 10
hours is set is also equivalent to an error
of maximum ±5 hours. As far as the set
error is concerned, digital timer is by far
exact. Select a digital timer for the case
when accuracy is required.
When using an analog type multi-range
timer for setting of long time, the setting
procedure stated as follows minimizes
the error. For example, if you want to set
8 hours in the range of 10 hours, first set
the pointer to such a graduation where
the actual operating time should become
as close to 8 seconds as possible in the
range of 10 seconds. Then, reset the
range to 10 hours, leaving the pointer set
at the graduation as it is.
 x
Timer-related terminology 9

Information
General

Timers
• Pause Time Error
It means the difference between the operating time to a fixed pause time and the operating time to a pause time that varies.
The pause time characteristics are the main characteristics of CR timer (timer exploiting charge and discharge of capacitor C and
resistance R).
If the oscillation count timer (timer which comprises an oscillation circuit composed of CR and quartz and is operated by a counting
circuit inside IC or micro-computer which counts the reference signal) is used, the pause time error becomes almost negligible owing
to its principles of operation. Accordingly, the description about these characteristics may be omitted for the oscillation count timer.
• Equation for Each Error and Measurement Conditions
The operation time shall be measured, in principle, for retention time of 0.5 second and halt time of 1 second.
The measurement shall be repeated five times except for the initial test. The equation for each error and the measurement condi-
tions are shown in the table below:

Item Equation
Set value Ts (Note 1) Supply voltage Ambient temperature
(1) F
 luctuation in 1 Tmax. – Tmin.
± —x———————x100 (%) Rated voltage
operation time 2 TMs
20±2°C
TMx1 – TM Fluctuation range of (Note 2)
(2) Voltage error ——————x100 (%) Full-scale value allowable voltage of
TMs
power supply (Note 3)
(3) Temperature TMx2 – TM –10 to 50°C
——————x100 (%)
error TMs (Note 4)

TM – Ts 1/3 or more of
(4) Set error ——————x100 (%) Rated voltage
TMs full-scale value
20±2°C
TMx3 – TM (Note 2)
(5) P
 ause time
——————x100 (%) Full-scale value
error TMs
Note 1: For digital timers, the set value Ts shall be optional.
Note 2: If no question arises from evaluation results, 13-35°C is acceptable.
Note 3: The measurement may be performed in other specified voltage ranges.
Note 4: The measurement may be performed in other specified temperature ranges.
TM: Average of measured values for operation time
Ts: Set value
TMs: Full-scale value. For digital timers, any arbitrary scale-value may be used.
Tmax: Maximum of measured values for operation time
Tmin: Minimum of measured values for operation time
TMx1: Average of operation time at such voltage as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable voltage range
TMx2: Average of operation time at such temperature as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable temperature range
TMx3: Average of operation time at such pause time (in the range from the specified reset time to 1 hour) as maximizes deviation from TM

• Functional Vibration Resistance • Electrical life • Contact resistance

Means such a vibration as occurs in the
range where the contact closed with
that vibration during the use of the timer
remains closed for the specified time (3 or
1 msec.) minimum.
• Destructive Vibration Resistance
Means such a vibration as occurs in the
range where no part is damage with that
vibration during the transportation or use of
the timer and the operation characteristics
are maintained.
• Functional Shock Resistance
Means such a shock as occurs in the range
where the contact closed with that shock
during the use of the timer remains closed
for the specified time (1 ms) minimum.
• Destructive Shock Resistance
Means such a shock as occurs in the range
where no part is damaged with that shock
during the transportation or use of the timer
and the operation characteristics are main-
tained.
• Mechanical life
Means the durability that is achieved when
the control output is performed in the no-
load state.
Means the durability that is achieved
when the specified voltage and current
loads are individually applied to the control
output while being turned ON and OFF.
Generally, the life of the timer is repre-
sented by the number of times the control
output is performed. When a load is con-
nected to the control output, the term of
„electrical life“ is used. When no load is
connected to the control output, the term
of „mechanical life“ is used. The electrical
life is shorter than the mechanical life, and
becomes longer as the load decreases.
The life of the timer is made longer by
connecting a relay or a similar part rather
than directly switching a large load with the
control output.
• Rated power consumption
Means the power that is consumed when
the rated operation voltage is applied to the
power circuit.
(Rated power consumption = rated volt-
agexcurrent consumption)
• Rated control capacity
Means the reference value that is used to
determine the performance of the switching
part of the load. This value is represented
by the combination of voltage and current.
Means the combined resistance that con-
sists of the contact resistance between
contacts, and the conductor resistance of
pins and contact springs.
• Insulation resistance
Means the resistance between a contact
or a conductive pin like the pin to which
the operation voltage is applied, and a
dead pin or a non-conductive metallic part
like the time case, the base, or a retaining
screw; or the resistance between contacts.
• Withstand voltage
Means the limit value that does not cause
breakdown when high voltage is applied
for one minute to the same location as
measured for insulation resistance. The
detectable leak current is normally 10 mA.
In special cases, however, it may be 1mA
or 3 mA.
• Withstand surge voltage
Means the limit value that shows the dura-
bility against momentary abnormal voltage
resulting from lightning or switching a con-
ductive load. The surge waveform is rep-
resented by the standard impulsive voltage
waveform at ±(1.2x50) µs or ±(1x40) µs.
 x
10 On-delay timer basic circuit
Information
General
Timers

(Symbols) 4. Fixed Time Operation (Continuous 7. Fixed Time Operation after Delay
Self-resetting switch Relay NO contact input) Time is Set (Continuous input)
Holding switch Relay NC contact When switch A is closed, load L is turned When switch A is pressed, load L is
R Relay Timer delay NO contact
ON and after t-time elapses, the load is turned ON after t1-time elapses and load
T Timer Timer delay NC contact
turned OFF. When switch A is opened, L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses.
L Load Timer instantaneous NO contact
timer T is reset and load L is turned OFF.
Timer in work Timer instantaneous NC contact
A T1

1. Delay Operation (Instantaneous input) A

T T2
When control switch A is pressed, timer
T starts immediately and after t-time T L T1 T2 L
elapses, load L is turned ON. When B
is pressed, timer T is reset and load L is ON
turned OFF. OFF
A
t ON ON
OFF
T
ON A
A R T A T T t1 ON
L OFF
T1
ON
5. Delay Reset Operation t2

L B L When contact A is reversed, load L is T2

ON
B
immediately turned ON. When contact
L OFF
R T T A is returned to normal state, load L is
turned OFF after t-time elapses. 8. Repetitive Operation
(In the case of timer
ON w/instantaneous contact) This circuit is used when the power sup- When switch A is pressed, load L is
A
OFF ply is kept ON at all times or used for off- turned ON after t1-time elapses and load
ON delay-like application.
OFF
L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses,
B
t ON However, it can not be used as off-delay and thereafter the t1 and t2 operations
T
OFF timer at the time of power failure. are repeated. This repetitive operation
ON
L OFF stops when switch A is turned OFF.
R R A
2. Delay Operation (Continuous input) A
When switch A is pressed, after t-time R1 R2 T1 R2
T
elapsed, the timer contact closes and L
load L is turned ON. When switch A is T R T2
opened, the timer is reset and the load is
turned OFF. ON T1 L R1 T2 R2

OFF
A
t
A T
T ON
ON
L OFF OFF
T L A
t1 t1
6. Fixed Time Operation after Delay
ON T1
Time is Set (Instantaneous input) t2 t2
OFF
A When control switch A is pressed, load L
t ON T2
ON ON
T
OFF is turned ON after t1-time elapses, and
ON L OFF OFF
OFF
load L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses.
L
This circuit is used for the case of instan-
3. Fixed Time Operation taneous input (one pulse).
(Instantaneous input)
When control switch A is pressed, load A R
L is immediately turned ON, and after
T1
t-time elapses, load L is turned OFF.
T2 L

A R A T R T1 T2

T T ON
L L
A T1
OFF
A
R T T t1 ON

T2 T1 OFF
T1
(In the case of timer t2
ON
w/instantaneous contact)
OFF T2
A ON T1 T2 ON
t L
OFF L OFF
T
ON (In the case of timer
L OFF w/instantaneous contact)
 x
General application guidelines 11

Information
General

Timers
Cautions for circuits
1. Protective circuit for timer contact
In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting
from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point.
CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Diode circuit Varistor circuit
Timer contact Timer contact Timer contact Timer contact

Inductive load
Inductive load

Inductive load
Inductive load
Circuit r
r c Diode ZNR varistor
c

AC (see note.) Available Not available Available

Application
DC Available Available Available Available
If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel
Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply voltage is causes the energy stored in the coil
24 or 48 V and the voltage across the load is 100 to 200 V. to flow to the coil in the form of cur- Using the rated voltage charac-
rent and dissipates it as joule heat teristics of the varistor, this circuit
If the load is a timer, leakage current at the resistance component of the prevents excessively high voltages
Features/Notes flows through the CR circuit causing inductive load. from being applied across the
faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release contacts. This circuit also slightly
—
Note: If used with AC voltage, be sure time compared to the CR circuit. delays the release time.
the impedance of the load is sufficiently (2 to 5 times the release time listed in
smaller than that of the c and r. the catalog)
As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse break-
c: 0.5 to 1 mF per 1 A contact current down voltage at least 10 times the
r: 0.5 to 1 W per 1 V contact voltage circuit voltage and a forward cur-
Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in timer charac- rent at least as large as the load
Device Selection teristics. current. —
Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the
acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. circuit voltages reverse breakdown
Use a capacitor with a breakdown voltage of 200 to 300 V. Use AC type capacitors voltage of about 2 to 3 times the
(non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply voltage.
2. Type of Load and Inrush Current (Fig. A) Good example (1) When using contact output
The type of load and its inrush current AC power supply

characteristics, together with the switch-

Insulation transformer
R T R
(+)
Input device

ing frequency are important factors which (–)

(e.g., sensor)

cause contact welding. Particularly for (–)

R T
loads with inrush currents, measure the Timer

steady state current and inrush current

and use a relay or magnet switch which (Fig. B) Bad example
(2) When using non-contact output
provides an ample margin of safety. AC power supply

R RT R
The table below shows the relationship Insulation transformer

(+)
Input device
between typical loads and their inrush (–)
(e.g., sensor)

RT
currents.
(–) R T
Type of load Inrush current Timer

Resistive load Steady state current

Solenoid load 10 to 20 times the steady state current AC power supply
5. Leakage current
Motor load 5 to 10 times the steady state current
Single coil transformer 1) For connecting and disconnecting
(+)

Incandescent lamp load 10 to 15 times the steady state current (–)

Input device
(e.g., sensor) operating voltage to the timer, a circuit
Mercury lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current should be used, which will prevent the
Sodium vapor lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current (–)
Alternative
flow of leakage current. For example, a
circuit for contact protection as shown
Timer current flow
Capacitive load 20 to 40 times the steady state current
Transformer load 5 to 15 times the steady state current in Fig A. will permit leakage current flow
When you want large load and long life Do not use a single coil transformer (e.g., through R and C, causing erroneous
of the timer, do not control the load direct Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal circuit operation of the timer. Instead, the cir-
with a timer. When the timer is designed of the timer will be short-circuited as cuit shown in Fig. B should be used.
to use a relay or a magnet switch, you shown in Fig. B resulting in breakdown. (Fig. A)
can acquire the longer life of the timer. 4. Long Continuous Current Flow Leak current
3. Connection of input Long continuous current flow through
The PM4H and LT4H series use power the timer (approx. one month or longer) Operating voltage R C T
supply without a transformer (power and cause generation of heat internally, Timer

input terminals are not insulated). In which degrade the electronic parts. Use
connecting various kinds of input sig- the timer in combination with a relay
(Fig. B)
nals, therefore, use a power transformer and avoid long continuous current flow
in which the primary side is separated through the timer.
R
from the ungrounded secondary side as
Operating voltage T
shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for Timer
C
a sensor and other input devices so that
short-circuiting can be prevented.
 x
12 General application guidelines
Information
General
Timers
2) If the timer is directly switched with a
non-contact element, leak current may
flow into the timer and cause it to mal-
function.
6. Power off time
If the operation voltage for the timer is
turned ON after the limit time operation
is completed or before the limit time
is reached, the Power off time longer
than the timer restoration time must be
secured.
7. Suicide circuit
If the timer is restored immediately after
the specified time is reached, the circuit
must be configured so that the restora-
tion time of the timer can be secured
sufficiently.
If the power circuit for the timer is turned
OFF with the timer contact, a suicide
Cautions for use
(common for all models)
1. Pin connections
Correctly connect the pins while seeing
the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In
particular, the DC type, which has polari-
ties, does not operate with the polarities
connected reverse. Any incorrect con-
nection can cause abnormal heating or
ignition.
2. Connection to operation power supply
1) Supply voltage must be applied at a
time through a switch, a relay, and other
parts. If the voltage is applied gradu-
ally, the specified time may be reached
regardless of its value or the power sup-
ply may not be reset.
2) The operation voltage for the DC type
must be at the specified ripple percent-
age or less. The average voltage must
fall within the allowable operation voltage
range.
Rectification type Ripple percentage
Single-phase, full-wave Approx. 48%
Three-phase, full-wave Approx. 4%
Three-phase, half-wave Approx. 17%
Note: Refer to the ripple percentage of each timer.
3) Make sure that no induced voltage
and residual voltage are applied between
the power pins on the timer after the
power switch is turned OFF.
(If the power line is wired in parallel with
the high-voltage and motor lines, induced
voltage may be produced between the
power pins.)
3. Control output
1) The load for the control output must
be used within the load capacity speci-
fied in the rated control capacity. If it is
used exceeding the rated value, the life
is greatly shortened.
circuit may be configured (Fig. A). In
order to settle the problem with this
potential suicide circuit, the circuit must
be designed so that the timer is turned
OFF after the self-retention circuit is
completely released (Fig. B).
R R
A A
T T
R T
(Fig. A)
8. Electrical life
The electrical life varies depending on
the load type, the switching phase, and
the ambient atmosphere. In particular,
2) The following connection might result
in short circuit between the heteropolar
contacts in the timer.
Bad example
L2
L1
4. Installing the timer
1) To install the timer, use the dedicated
pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid con-
necting the pins on the timer by directly
soldering them.
2) In order to maintain the character-
istics, do not remove the timer cover
(case).
5. Superimposed surge of power supply
For the superimposed surge of power
supply, the standard waveform
(±1.2x50µs or ±1x40µs) is taken as the
standard value for surge-proof voltage.
(The positive and negative voltages are
applied each three or five times between
the power pins.)
For the standard values for the PM4H,
LT4H and S1DX type timers, see the
respective items in „Cautions for use.“
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2x50) µs]
100
90
Crest value (%)
Crest value
50
30
0
0 1.2
Time ( s)
the following cases require careful atten-
tion:
(1) If an AC load is switched in synchro-
nized phases:
Locking or welding is liable to occur due
to contact transposition. Check this with
the actual system.
(2)If a load is switched very frequently:
If a load which generates arcs when
a contact is switched is turned ON
and OFF very frequently, nitrogen and
R T oxygen in air are combined due to arc
energy and then HNO3 is produced. This
(Fig. B)
may corrode metallic materials.
The effective countermeasures include:
1. Using an arc-extinguishing circuit;
2. Decreasing the switching frequency;
3. Decreasing the humidity in the ambi-
ent atmosphere.
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1x40) µs]
100
Good example
90
Crest value (%)
Crest value
50
30
0
L1 L2 0 1 40
Time ( s)
• PMH [±(1x40) µs]
Voltage type Surge voltage
AC type (Except for 24V AC) 4,000V
12V DC, 24V DC, 24V AC 500V
48V DC 1,000V
100 to 110V DC 2,000V
If external surge occurs exceeding the
specified value, the internal circuit may
break down. In this case, use a surge
absorption element. The typical surge
absorption elements include a varis-
tor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
absorption element is used, use an oscil-
loscope to see whether or not the foreign
surge exceeding the specified value
appears.
6. Changing the set time
Do not change the set time when the
limit time operation is in progress.
However, this is possible only with the
motor-driven type timer if the set time
is shorter than the remaining time. For
changing the set time on the digital timer
(LT4H series), see the relevant item in
„Cautions for use.“
50

7. Operating environment
1) Use the timer within the ambient tem-
perature range from –10°C to +50°C
(+55°C for the LT4H series) and at
ambient humidity of 85% RH maximum.
2) Avoid using the timer in a location
where inflammable or corrosive gas is
generated, the timer is exposed to much
dust and other foreign matter water or oil
is splashed on the timer or vibrations or
shocks are given to the timer.
3) The timer cover (case), the knobs, and
the dials are made of polycarbonated
resin. Therefore, prevent the timer from
being exposed to organic solvents such
as methyl alcohol, benzine, and thinner,
strong acid substances such as caustic
soda, and ammonia and avoid using the
x
General application guidelines 13
Information
General
Timers
timer in atmosphere containing any of specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or
those substances. ignition may occur.
4) If the timer is used where noises are 2) If any malfunction of the timer is likely
emitted frequently, separate the input to affect human life and properties, give
signal elements (such as a sensor), the allowance to the rated values and perfor-
wiring for the input signal line, and the mance values. In addition, take appro-
timer as far as possible from the noise priate safety measures such as a duplex
source and the high power line contain- circuit from the viewpoint of pro-
ing noises. duct liabilities.
8. Checking the actual load
In order to increase the reliability in the
actual use, check the quality of the timer
in the actual usage.
9. Others
1) If the timer is used exceeding the
ratings (operation voltage and control
capacity), the contact life, or any other
 x
14 LT4H

Pin type LT4H

Timers
Digital

DIN 48 Size
Screw terminal type Digital Timer

Features ›› CTheonforms to IP66’s Weather Resistant Standards

›› Bright and Easy-to-Read Display
A brand new bright 2-color back light LCD display. The
water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable
operation even in poor environments.
easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and
setting procedures a cinch.
›› Screw terminal (M3.5) and Pin Types are Both Standard
Options
›› Short Body of only 64.5 mm (screw terminal type) or
70.1 mm (pin type)
The two terminal types are standard options to support
either front panel installation or embedded installation.
With a short body, it is easy to install in even narrow control
panels.
›› Changeable Panel Cover
Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design consi-
›› Simple Operation derations.
Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than
before.
›› Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE, UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222

Product types
Time range Operating mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LT4H8-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4H-AC240V
Screw terminal LT4H-AC240VS
8 pins LT4H8-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LT4H-AC24V
(1 c)
Screw terminal LT4H-AC24VS
Power ON delay (1) 8 pins LT4H8-DC24V
Power ON delay (2)
Signal ON delay 12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4H-DC24V
Signal OFF delay Screw terminal LT4H-DC24VS
Pulse One-shot
Pulse ON-delay 8 pins LT4HT8-AC240V
Signal Flicker 100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HT-AC240V
Totalizing ON-delay
(8 modes) Screw terminal LT4HT-AC240VS
8 pins LT4HT8-AC24V
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HT-AC24V
Screw terminal LT4HT-AC24VS
8 pins LT4HT8-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HT-DC24V
Screw terminal LT4HT-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

Part names
Time delay indicator (Countdown time display) DIP switches
TIMER
Elapsed time display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

Controlled output indicator

Set time display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK h m s

Lock indicator Time units display

UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK
Down keys
Lock switch LT4H DOWN

(Same for screw terminal type and 8-pin type)

 x
LT4H 15

Specifications
Type Relay output type Transistor output type
Item AC type AC/DC type DC type AC type AC/DC type DC type
100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC,
Rated operating voltage 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —

Timers
Digital
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC
Time range 9.999 s, 99.99 s, 999.9 s, 9999 s, 99 min 59 s, 999.9 min, 99 h 59 min, 999.9 h (selected by DIP switch)
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)
Time counting direction
(2 directions selectable by DIP switch)
Rating A (Power ON delay 1), A2 (Power ON delay 2), B (Signal ON delay), C (Signal OFF delay), D (Pulse one-shot),
Operation mode
E (Pulse ON delay), F (Signal Flicker), G (Totalizing ON delay) (selectable by DIP switch)
Start/Reset/Stop input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (2 directions by selected by DIP switch) (The 8-pin type does not have a stop input.)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms (The 8-pin type does not have a lock input.)
Open collector input Input impedance: Max. 1 k ; Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
Input signal
Open impedance: 100k or less, Max. energized voltage: 40V DC
Indication 7-segment LCD (LT4H, LT4H-L common), Elapsed value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
Power failure memory
EEP ROM (Min. 105 overwriting)
method

[ ]
Operating time fluctuation
Time Temperature error Operating voltage: 85 to 110%
± (0.005 % + 50 ms) in case of power on start
accuracy Temperature: –10 to +55°C
Voltage error ± (0.005 % + 20 ms) in case of input signal start
(max.) Min. input signal width: 1ms
Setting error
Contact arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) 100 m (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flash —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2x107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) 1.0x105 ope. (At rated control voltage) Min. 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (11-pin)
Breakdown voltage 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type)
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
(Initial value) 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
1,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between contacts
Between live and dead metal parts Min. 100 M : Between live and dead metal parts
Insulation resistance Between input and output (At 500V DC)
Electrical Min. 100 M : Between input and output (At 500V DC)
(Initial value)
Between contacts
Operating voltage reset
Max. 0.5s
time
Max. 65° C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min single amplitude of 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min single amplitude of 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s (4 times on 3 axes)
2

resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s (5 times on 3 axes)

2

Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C

Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)
 x
16 LT4H

Dimensions (units: mm)

Tolerance: ±1.0
• LT4H digital timer
Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
Timers
Digital

48
5.5 64.5 5.5 55.6 14.5

TIMER

OP.
RST
LOCK h m s 44.5 44.5
RESET UP

LOCK

LT4H DOWN

7.5 7.5

• Dimensions for embedded installation (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Panel Panel Mounting frame 8-pin type
Rubber gasket Mounting frame Rubber gasket
for flush mount ATC18002 (supplied) for flush mount (8p cap AD8-RC
ATC18002 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) sold separately)
AT8-DA4 (supplied)
11-pin type
TIMER (11p cap AT8-DP11
TIMER sold separately)

OP. OP.

48 RST
50 66 44.5 48 RST
LOCK h m s
50 66
LOCK h m s

RESET UP RESET UP

LOCK LOCK

LT4H DOWN LT4H DOWN

1 1
48 63.5 48 90

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
DIN rail terminal block below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rub-
(8-pin type AT8-DF8K ber gasket (ATC18002). 45+0.6
0
sold separately)
(11-pin type AT8-DF11K 80 min.
sold separately)
45+0.6
0
A
+0.6
45 +0.6
A = (48 ¥ n – 2.5) 0
Device installation rail 0

AT8-DLA1
(sold separately) Note) 1: The installation panel thickness should be between
80 min.
1 and 5 mm.
95.5 Note) 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
(90.0)
between the unit and installation panel is lost.
( ) dimension is for 8-pin type.

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• 8-pin type • 11-pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
N.C. Reset Reset
Start
Start Start N.C. Start
N.O.
Reset 4 5 Reset 4 5 Stop
5 6 7 N.O. Stop
5 6 7
3 6 3 6 Lock 4 8 Lock
4 8
3 9 3 9
2 7 2 7 2 10 2 10
1 8 1 8 1 11 1 11
Operating Operating Operating Operating
– voltage + – voltage + –
– voltage + voltage +

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Start Start
Stop Stop
Lock N.O. Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
N.C.

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to
Operating Operating 5) Transistor output on page 26.
+ voltage – + voltage –
 x
Lt4H 17

Setting the operation mode, time range and time

Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode and time range
Set the operation mode and time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LT4H timer.
DIP switches

Timers
Digital
Table 1: Setting the operation mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Operation mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON A: Power on delay 1
2 Operation mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF A2: Power on delay 2
3 ON OFF OFF B: Signal on delay
Minimum input reset, start, and OFF ON OFF C: Signal off delay
*4 20 ms 1 ms
stop signal width ON ON OFF D: Pulse One shot
5 Time delay direction Addition Subtraction OFF OFF ON E: Pulse On delay
6 ON OFF ON F: Signal Flicker
7 Time range Refer to table 2 OFF ON ON G: Totalizing On delay
8
* The 8-pin type does not have the stop input, so that the dip
Table 2: Setting the time range
switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs. DIP switch No.
Time range
The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum 20 ms). 6 7 8
ON ON ON 0.001 s to 9.999 s
DIP switches OFF OFF 0.01 s to 99.99 s
ON OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF ON OFF 1 s to 9999 s

ON

ON ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s

OFF OFF ON 0.1 min to 999.9 min
ON OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
OFF ON ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
(Same for screw terminal type) Notes: 1) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer.
2) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
3) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.

Setting procedure 2) Setting the time

Set the set time with the keys (UP and DOWN keys) on the front of the LT4H timer.
Front display section
1 Elapsed time display 3 8  UP keys
2 Set time display TIMER
1 Changes the corresponding digit of the set
3 Time delay indicator 4 2
time in the addition direction (upwards)
4 Controlled output indicator OP.
9  DOWN keys
5 Reset indicator 5 RST
LOCK h m s
Changes the corresponding digit of the set
6 Lock indicator 6
UP
7 time in the subtraction direction (downwards)
7 Time units display 10
RESET
8 10  RESET switch
11
LOCK
9 Resets the elapsed time and the output
LT4H DOWN
11 LOCK switch
Locks the operation of all keys on the unit

• Changing the set time

1. It is possible to change the set time time, the time delay will continue until the the power supply is turned on. However,
with the up and down keys even during elapsed time reaches the new set time. the output will be off while reset is being
time delay with the timer. However, be 2) If the time delay is set to the subtrac- input.
aware of the following points. tion direction, time delay will continue 2) In the other modes, the output turns
1) If the set time is changed to less than until “0” regardless of the new set time. on when the start is input. When the
the elapsed time with the time delay set 2. If the set time is changed to “0,” the operation mode is C (signal off delay),
to the addition direction, time delay will unit will operate differently depending on D (Pulse one shot), or F (Signal flicker),
continue until the elapsed time reaches the operation mode. only when the start input is on does the
full scale, returns to zero, and then 1) If the operation mode is set to A output turn on. Also, when the reset is
reaches the new set time. If the set time (power on delay 1) or A2 (power on being input, the output is off.
is changed to a time above the elapsed delay 2), the output will turn on when

• Power failure memory

The EEPROM is used for power failure memory. It has a life of Min. 105 over-writings.
The EEPROM is overwriting with the following timing.
Output mode Overwrite timing
Power ON delay (2) A2 When power is OFF
Addition G Change of preset value or start, reset input
When power is OFF after being ON
Other modes When power is OFF after changing preset value

* Be aware that the contents of EEPROM for all modes will be overwritten when power is turned OFF during input to external lock terminals 4 to 3 and 7 to 6 .
Such an action does not exist by doing lock operation from the front.
 x
18 LT4H
Operation mode T: Set time t1, t2, t3, ta<T

Operation type Explanation Time chart

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3
section of the DIP switches
ON ON ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
Timers
Digital

• Clears elapsed time value and starts time

ON
delay at power ON. Power supply OFF

Power on delay (1) • After timer completion, stops at the display of T t1 t2 t1+t2=T
ON
the set value (addition), or stops at “0” Output OFF

(subtraction). ON
A • Ignores start input.
Reset OFF

ON
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Stop OFF

Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF OFF OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
•E lapsed time value does not clear at power
ON
ON. (power outage countermeasure function) Power supply OFF

•T he output remains ON even after the power T t1 t2 t1+t2=T

ON
is cut and restarted. Output OFF
Power on delay (2)
•A fter timer completion, stops at the display of ON

A2 the set value (addition), or stops at “0”

Reset OFF

ON
(subtraction). Stop OFF

• Ignores start input.

•S tops delay time operation at stop ON.
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
ON OFF OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Power supply
ON
OFF
•T  ime delay starts at start ON and elapsed T t1 t2 t1+t2=T
ON
time value or output resets at start OFF. Output OFF

• Instantaneous time delay start at reset OFF ON

Signal on delay Reset OFF
and power ON while start is ON.
B •S  tops delay time operation at stop ON.
Stop
ON
OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
ON
• In order to have the time delay start at power Start OFF

ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start

input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF ON OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the ON
side of the timer as shown. Power supply OFF
T>ta+tb T>t
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Output
ON
OFF
•O utput control ON at start ON and time delay T ta tb t
ON
Signal off delay start at start OFF. Reset OFF

C •E lapsed time value clears when start goes ON Stop

ON
OFF
again during time delay. ON
Start
•S tops delay time operation at stop ON. OFF

Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

Notes: 1) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal 1 for the 8-pin type, terminal 3 for
the 11-pin type, and terminal for the screw terminal type).
2) The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.
 x
Lt4H 19

Operation type Explanation Time chart

•S  et the operation mode 1 2 3
section of the DIP switches
ON ON OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.

Timers
Digital
ON
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Power supply OFF

• Time delay starts and output control ON at T>ta T=t1+t2

ON
Output
start ON. OFF
T ta T t1 t2 t
Pulse One-shot • Turns output control OFF and clears elapsed Reset
ON
OFF
time value at time-up. ON
D • Ignores start input during time delay.
Stop OFF

ON
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Start OFF

Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• In order to have the time delay start at power
ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF OFF ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. ON
Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON. T=t1+t2
ON
• Ignores start input during time delay. Output OFF

• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. ON

T t1 t2 T T
Pulse On delay Reset OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
E • In order to have the time delay start at power Stop
ON
OFF

ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start Start

ON
OFF
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
ON OFF ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. ON
Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON. T=t1+t2 T>ta T=t1+t2
ON
• Ignores start input during time delay. Output OFF

• Output control reverses, elapsed time value T T t1 t2 ta T t1 t2

ON
Signal Flicker Reset OFF
clears, and timer delay starts at timer comple-
F tion. Stop
ON
OFF

• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Start

ON
OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
• In order to have the time delay start at power
ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF ON ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the ON
side of the timer as shown. Power supply OFF

T=t1+t2+t3 T>ta
• Elapsed time value does not clear at power Output
ON
OFF
ON. (power outage countermeasure function) ON
T t1 t2 t3 ta
Totalizing On delay Reset
• The output remains ON even after the power OFF

G is off and restarted. Stop

ON
OFF
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. ON
Start OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

Notes: 1) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal 1 for the 8-pin type, terminal 3 for
the 11-pin type, and ter- 6 minal 6 for the screw terminal type).
2) The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.
 x
20 LT4H-W

8-pin type

LT4H-W
Timers
Digital

11-pin type DIN 48 Size

Digital Timer

Screw terminal type

›› WTheideoperation
time range
time range covers from 0.01 sec. to 9999
›› Simple Operation
Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than
hours. before.
The individual setting can be performed on each of 1 and 2
timers.
›› Conforms to IP66’s Weather Resistant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable
99.99s 99min59s 99h59min operation even in poor environments.
999.9s 999.9min
9999s 9999h
999.9h
›› Screw terminal (M3.5) and Pin Types are Both Standard

›› S70.1
Options
hort Body of only 64.5 mm (screw terminal type) or The two terminal types are standard options to support
mm (pin type) either front panel installation or embedded installation.
With a short body, it is easy to install in even narrow control
panels.
›› Changeable Panel Cover

›› Bright
Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design consi-
and Easy-to-Read Display derations.
A brand new bright 2-color back light LCD display. The
easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and
›› Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE, UL File No.: E122222,
C-UL File No.: E122222
setting procedures a cinch.

Product types
Time range Operating mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LT4HW8-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HW-AC240V
Screw terminal LT4HW-AC240VS
8 pins LT4HW8-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HW-AC24V
(1 c)
Screw terminal LT4HW-AC24VS
Pulse input: 8 pins LT4HW8-DC24V
99.99s
• Delayed one shot
999.9s 12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HW-DC24V
• OFF-start flicker
9999s
• ON-start flicker Screw terminal LT4HW-DC24VS
99min59s
Available
999.9min 8 pins LT4HWT8-AC240V
Integrating input:
99h59min
• Delayed one shot 100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HWT-AC240V
999.9h
• OFF-start flicker
9999h Screw terminal LT4HWT-AC240VS
• ON-start flicker
8 pins LT4HWT8-AC24V
Transistor
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HWT-AC24V
(1 a)
Screw terminal LT4HWT-AC24VS
8 pins LT4HWT8-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HWT-DC24V
Screw terminal LT4HWT-DC24VS
 x
Lt4H-W 21

(Subtraction elapsed DIP switches

T1/T2 Operation display
TIMER time display)

Display for change-over Elapsed time display

T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
between T1/T2 settings T2
T1 Set time display
Controlled output indicator OP. T2
LOCK h m s

Timers
Digital
Lock indicator UP
Time units display
RESET
Reset switch Up keys
SET/LOCK
Set/Lock switch Down keys
LT4H-W DOWN

(Same for 8-pin and screw terminal type)

Fourth digit First digit
Specifications
Type Relays output type Transistor output type
Item AC type DC type AC type DC type
Rated operating voltage 12 to 24 V DC 100 to 240V AC, 24V AC 12 to 24 V DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250 V AC
Time range 99.99s, 999.9s, 9999s, 99min59s, 999.9min, 99h59min, 999.9h, 9999h (selected by DIP switch)
Time counting direction

Rating Pulse input: Delayed one shot, OFF-start flicker or ON-start flicker
Operation mode
Integrating input: Delayed one shot, OFF-start flicker or ON-start flicker
Start/Reset/Stop input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (2 directions by selected by DIP switch) (The 8 pin type does not have a stop input.)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms (The 8-pin type does not have a lock input.)
Open collector input Input impedance: Max. 1 k ; Residual voltage: Max. 2V
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 k or less, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Indication
Power failure memory
EEP ROM (Min. 105 overwriting)
method

[ ]
Operating time fluctuation
Time Operating voltage: 85% to 110%
Temperature error ± (0.005% + 50 ms) in case of power on start
accuracy Temperature: –10°C to +55°C
Voltage error ± (0.005% + 20 ms) in case of input signal start Min. input signal width: 1ms
(max.)
Setting error
Contact arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) 100 mW (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flash —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2x107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) Min. 105 ope. (At rated control voltage) Min. 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (11-pin type only)
Breakdown voltage 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type only)
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
(Initial value) 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
1,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between contacts
Between live and dead metal parts Min. 100 M : Between live and dead metal parts
Insulation resistance
Electrical Min. 100 M : Between input and output (At 500V DC) Between input and output (At 500V DC)
(Initial value)
Between contacts
Operating voltage reset
time
Max 65° C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/ min single amplitude of 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/ min single amplitude of 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s (4 times on 3 axes)
2

resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s (5 times on 3 axes)

2

Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C

Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4
 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 1 0 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 1
 0 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)
 x
22 LT4H-W
Dimensions (units: mm)
Tolerance: ±1.0
Screw terminal type Pin type
• LT4H-W digital timer
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
48 5.5 64.5 5.5 55.6 14.5

TIMER
Timers
Digital

T1
T2

T1
OP. T2 44.5 44.5
LOCK h m s

RESET UP

SET/LOCK

LT4H-W DOWN

7.5 7.5
(Same for 8-pin type)

• Dimensions for flush mount (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Panel Mounting frame Panel Mounting frame
Rubber gasket for flush mount Rubber gasket for flush mount 8-pin type
ATC18002 (supplied) (8p cap AD8-RC
ATC18002 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) sold separately)
11-pin type
TIMER TIMER (11p cap AT8-DP11
T1 T1
sold separately)
T2 T2

T1 T1

48 OP. T2
50 44.5 48 OP. T2
50
LOCK 66 LOCK 66
h m s h m s

RESET UP RESET UP

SET/LOCK SET/LOCK

LT4H-W DOWN LT4H-W DOWN

48 1 63.5 48 1 90

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rub-
DIN rail terminal block 45
+0.6

(8-pin type AT8-DF8K ber gasket (ATC18002). 0

sold separately) 80min.

(11-pin type AT8-DF11K
+0.6
sold separately) 45 0

A
Device installation rail
When n timers are continuously installed, the dimension
AT8-DLA1 45
+0.6
0
(A) is calculated according to the following formula (n:
(sold separately) the number of the timers to be installed):
+0.6
A=(48 ¥ n – 2.5) 0
95.5 80min.
(90.0)
Note) 1: The installation panel thickness should be between
( ) dimension is for 8-pin type.
1 and 5 mm.
Note) 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• 8-Pin type • 11-Pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Start
N.C. Start Reset Reset
Start N.C. Start
Reset 4 5
N.O. Reset 4 5 Stop Stop
6 5 6 7 N.O. 5 6 7
3 6 3 Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8
2 7 2 7 3 9 3 9
1 8 1 8 2
1 11
10 2 10
1 11
Operating Operating
(–) voltage (+) Operating Operating
(–) voltage (+) – voltage + – voltage +

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Start Start
Stop Stop
Lock N.O. Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
N.C.

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Note) F
 or connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5)
Operating Operating
Transistor output on page 26.
+ voltage – + voltage –
 x
Lt4H-W 23

Setting the operation mode and time range

Setting procedure 1) Setting the time range (Timer T1/Timer T2)
Set the time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LT4H-W timer.

DIP switch Table 1: Setting the time range (Timer T1)

Item

Timers
Digital
OFF ON DIP switch No.
1 Time range
1 2 3
Time range
2 Refer to table 1 ON ON ON 0.01 s to 99.99 s
(Timer T1)
3 OFF OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
Minimum input reset, start, and ON OFF OFF 1 s to 9999 s
*4 20 ms 1 ms
stop signal width OFF ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s
5 Time delay direction Addition Subtraction ON ON OFF 0.1 min to 999.9 min
6 OFF OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
Time range
7 Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
(Timer T2)
8 OFF ON ON 1 h to 9999 h
* The 8-pin type does not have the stop input, so that the DIP
switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs.
Table 2: Setting the time range (Timer T2)
The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum 20 ms). DIP switch No.
Time range
6 7 8
DIP switches ON ON ON 0.01 s to 99.99 s
OFF OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

ON OFF OFF 1 s to 9999 s

OFF ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s
ON ON OFF 0.1 min to 999.9 min
OFF OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
ON OFF ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
OFF ON ON 1 h to 9999 h
(same for screw terminal type and 8-pin type.) Notes: 1
 ) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer.
2) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the operation mode 3) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.
Set the operation mode with the keys on the front of the LT4H-W timer.

1 Elapsed time display
3 TIMER
8  UP keys
2 Set time display Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the addition direction
1
3 T1/T2 operation indicator T1 (upwards)
4 T1/T2 setting value 4 T2 2 9  DOWN keys
selectable indicator 5
T1
OP. T2
Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the subtraction
5 Controlled output LOCK h m s direction (downwards)
indicator 6 7 10 RESET switch
UP
RESET
6 Lock indicator 10 8 Resets the elapsed time and the output
7 Time units display 11
SET/LOCK
11 SET/LOCK switch
9
LT4H-W DOWN Changes over the display between T1/T2 settings, sets the operation
mode, checks the operation mode and locks the operation of each key
Fourth digit First digit
(such as up, down or reset key).

1) Setting or changing the operation mode Ex: Setting operation mode display
(1) When the UP or DOWN key at the first digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK (PULSE-A example)
switch pressed, the mode is changed over to the setting mode.
(2) Now release the SET/LOCK switch.
(3) The operation mode in the setting mode is changed over sequentially in the left or right direction by pressing the UP or DOWN key at the first digit, respectively.

Pulse input Pulse input Pulse input Integrating input Integrating input Integrating input
OFF-start OFF-start ON-start OFF-start OFF-start ON-start
One operation Repeating operation Repeating operation One operation Repeating operation Repeating operation

(4) The operational mode displayed at present is set by pressing the RESET switch, and the display returns to the normal condition.
2) Setting (changing) the time
(1) Pressing the SET/LOCK key switches the set value display between T1 and T2. Display the timer (T1 or T2) which is to be set (or changed).
(2) After displaying the timer (T1 or T2) which is to be set, press the UP or DOWN key to change the time.
• Checking the operation mode
When the UP or DOWN key at the second digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, the operational mode can be checked.
The display returns to the normal condition after indicating the operational mode for about two seconds. (While the display indicates the operational mode for about two
seconds, the other indicators continue to operate normally.)
• Setting the lock
When the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, all keys on the unit are locked.
The timer does not accept any of UP, DOWN and RESET keys.
To release the lock setting, press the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit again with the set/lock switch pressed.
* Operational mode, adding and subtracting and minimum input signal range cannot be set at T1 and T2, respectively.
• Changing over the T1/T2 setting display
The T1/T2 setting display is changed over by pressing the SET/LOCK switch. (This operation gives no effect on the other operations. The set time and elapsed time
(residual time) at T1 are linked with those at T2.)
• Changing the set time
1) It is possible to change the set time with the UP and DOWN keys even during time delay with the timer. However, be aware of the following points.
(1) If the set time is changed to less than the elapsed time with the time delay set to the addition direction, time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches full
scale, returns to zero, and then reaches the new set time. If the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed time, the time delay will continue until the elapsed
time reaches the new set time.
(2) If the time delay is set to the subtraction direction, time delay will continue until “0” regardless of the new set time.
2) When the set times at T1 and T2 are set to 0, the output becomes ON only while the start input is carried out.
However, while the reset input is carried out, the output becomes OFF.
 x
24 LT4H-W
Operation mode
PULSE : Pulse input INTEGRATION : Integrating input

OFF-start/1 operation t1<T1, t2<T2 OFF-start/1 operation t1<T1, t2<T2

PULSE A  INTEGRATION A
Timers
Digital

ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

PULSE Power
supply
Power
supply

Output Output
T1 T2 ta tb tc td t1 T1 t2 ta tb tc td te tf tg th t1 T1 t2
A
Stop Stop

Delayed Reset Reset

one shot Start Start

• Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval •W hen power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.
• Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed. • Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed.

 OFF-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2 OFF-start/repeating operation t1<T1,

PULSE B  INTEGRATION B 
t2<T2

ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 Power ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

Power
supply supply

Output Output
 T1 T2 T1 T2 ta tb tc td t1 T1 t2 ta tb tc td te tf tg th T1 T2 t1 T1 t2
OFF-start Stop Stop

flicker Reset Reset

Start Start

B • Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval • When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.

 ON-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2  ON-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2

Power ta t t t ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

Power
supply supply

 Output Output
ta t t t t t ta tb tc td te tf tg th T1 T2 t1 T1 t2
C
Stop Stop

Reset Reset
ON-start flicker
Start Start

• Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval •W hen power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.

• The pulse input mode starts the operation by starting the
start input.
• When using the unit by starting it with the power on, short-
circuit the start terminal (8-pin: 1 to 4, 11-pin: 3 to 6 and
screw terminal: 6 to 9).
• The integrating input mode is operated by the integrated
time of the start input. In other word, the timer operates only
when the start input is performed.
• When the elapsed value is cleared by the reset input, the
output is reset.
• When using the unit by starting it with the power on, short-
circuit the start terminal (8-pin: 1 to 4, 11-pin: 3 to 6 and screw
terminal: 6 to 9).

• Each signal input such as start, reset, stop and lock inputs is applied by short-circuiting its input terminal and common terminal
(8-pin type: terminal 1, 11-pin type: terminal 3 and screw terminal: terminal ) 6 respectively.
• The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.
 x
LT4H series cautions for use 25

1. Terminal wiring If independent power circuitry must be Reset input

1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the used, keep the input contacts or transis- Start input
Stop input
terminal layout and wiring diagrams and tors separate from each other, as shown Lock
be sure to perform the wiring properly in Fig. B. input

without errors.

Timers
Digital
(Fig. B)
2) When using the instrument with an Input contact 8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
flush mounting, the screw-down termi- point or transistor
11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
nal type is recommended. For the pin Input Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
terminal
type, use either the rear terminal block 3
(AT78041) or the 8P cap (AD8-RC) for 2 10 Power * The short-circuit impedance should be
the 8-pin type, and the rear terminal supply less than 1 k .
Input contact
block (AT78051) or the 11P cap (AT8- point or transistor
DP11) for the 11-pin type. Avoid solder- [When the impedance is 0 , the cur-
Input
ing directly to the round pins on the unit. 3
terminal rent coming from the start input and stop
When using the instrument with a front 2 10 input terminals is approximately 12 mA,
panel installation, use the DIN rail termi- and from the reset input and lock input
nal block (AT8-DF8K) for the 8-pin type When power circuitry is not independ- terminals is approximately 1.5 mA.]
and the DIN rail terminal block (AT8- ent, one input signal can be fed to two
DF11K) for the 11-pin type. or more counters at once, as shown in Also, the open-circuit impedance should
3) After turning the unit off, make sure Fig. C. be more than 100 k .
that any resulting induced voltage or
(Fig. C)
residual voltage is not applied to power Input contact
* As shown in the diagram below, from
supply terminals 2 through 7 (8-pin type) point or transistor a non-contact point circuit (proximity
2 through 10 (11-pin type) or 1 and 2 Input
switches, photoelectric switches, etc.)
(screw terminal type). (If the 3
terminal with a power supply voltage of between
power supply wire is wired parallel to the 2 10 Power 12 and 40 V, the signal can be input
high voltage wire or power wire, an supply without using an open collector transis-
induced voltage may be generated tor. In the case of the diagram below,
between the power supply terminals.) when the non-contact point transistor Q
Input
4) Have the power supply voltage pass 3
terminal switches from off to on (when the signal
through a switch or relay so that it is 2 10 voltage goes from high to low), the sig-
applied at one time. If the power supply nal is input.
is applied gradually, the counting may
3. Input and output 12 to 40V DC
malfunction regardless of the settings,
1) Signal input type
the power supply reset may not function,
(1) Contact point input Reset input
or other such unpredictable occurrence
Use highly reliable metal plated con- Q
may result.
tacts. Since the contact point’s bounce
2. Input connections
time leads directly to error in the timer 8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
The power circuit has no transformer
operations, use contacts with as short a 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
(power and input terminals are not insu-
bounce time as possible. Also, select a Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
lated). When an input signal is fed to two
minimum input signal width of 20 ms. (The above example is for reset input)
or more timers at once, do not arrange
the power circuit in an independent way. Reset input 2) The input mode and output mode
If the timer is powered on and off inde- Start input change depending on the DIP switch
Stop input
pendently as shown in Fig. A, the timer‘s Lock
settings. Therefore, before making any
internal circuitry may get damaged.Be input connections, be sure to confirm the
careful never to allow such circuitry. operation mode and operation conditions
(Figs. A, B and C show the circuitry for 8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
currently set.
the 11-pin type.) 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
3) The LT4H series use power supply
Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
without a transformer (power and input
(Fig. A)
Input contact terminals are not insulated). In connect-
point or transistor
(2) Non-contact point input ing various kinds of input signals, there-
Input Connect with an open collector. Use fore, use a power transformer in which
terminal
3
transistors whose characteristics satisfy the primary side is separated from the
2 10 Power
the criteria given below. ungrounded secondary side as shown in
supply Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor
VCEO = 20 V min.
IC = 20 mA min. and other input devices so that short-
Input ICBO = 6µA max. circuiting can be prevented.
terminal
3 Also, use transistors with a residual volt-
2 10
age of less than 2 V when the transistor
is on.
 x
26 LT4H series cautions for use
Once the wiring to be used is completely LT4H timer Operating voltage Surge voltage (peak value)
installed and prior to installing this timer, As PNP output
AC type 6,000V
confirm that there is complete insula- { O I DC type
tion between the wires connected to the 1,000V
24V AC type
Load
power terminals (2 each) and the wires
connected to each input terminal. If the • Surge wave form
Timers
Digital

power and input lines are not insulated, Load’s power supply [± (1.2x50) µs uni-polar full wave voltage]
a short-circuit may occur inside the timer Note: W
 ith the 8-pin type, there is no diode
100
and result in internal damage. between points 8 and 9.. 90

Surge voltage (%)

In addition, when moving your equipment
to a new installation location, confirm that Peak
50
there is no difference in environmental output or PNP (equal value) output.
30
conditions as compared to the previous (The above example is 11-pin type)
location.
0
0 1.2 50
(Fig. A) Good example
LT4H timer Time ( s)
AC power supply

Insulation transformer

6. Conditions of usage
(+)
Input device
(e.g., sensor)
(–)

1) Avoid locations subject to flammable

Inductive load
(–)
Diode rating: or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil,
vibrations, or excessive shocks.
Timer
IF (forward current): 1 A
VR (reverse voltage): 600 V Load’s
power supply
2) Since the cover of the timer is made of
(Fig. B) Bad example
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with
AC power supply

Insulation transformer

(2) Use the diode connected to the out- Power supply terminals
(+)
Input device Input
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
put transistor’s collector for absorbing the DC type
AC type terminals
reverse voltage from induced loads. 24V AC type
(–)

6) When wiring, use shielded wires or Noise

Timer
1,500V 1,000V 600V
metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire voltage
AC power supply
lengths as short as possible. or use in environments containing methyl
Single coil transformer

(+)
Input device
7) For the load of the controlled output, alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
make sure that it is lower than the rated organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic
(–)
control capacity. sodas, and other alkaline substances.
Timer
Alternative
current flow
4. Operation of LT4H digital timer 3) If power supply surges exceed the val-
1) Turning on and off the power supply ues given below, the internal circuits may
while operating in A2* (Power on delay become damaged. Be sure to use surge
2) or G (Totalizing On delay) will result in absorbing element to prevent this from
4) The input signal is applied by the a timer error to be generated due to the happening.
shorting of each input terminal with the characteristics of the internal circuitry. 4) Regarding external noise, the values
common terminal (terminal 1 for 8-pin Therefore, use the start input or stop below are considered the noise-resistant
types, terminal 3 for 11-pin types and ter- input. voltages. If voltages rise above these
minal 6 for screw terminal types). Never * Not related to the start input. values, malfunctions or damage to the
c o n - nect other terminals or voltages 2) When controlling the timer by turning internal circuitry may result, so take the
higher than 40V DC, because it may on the power supply, use only A (Power necessary precautions.
destroy the internal circuitry. on delay 1) or A2 (Power on delay 2). Noise wave form (noise simulator)
5) Transistor output Use of other modes in this situation will Rise time: 1 ns
(1) Since the transistor output is insulat- result in timer errors. When using the
ed from the internal circuitry by a pho- other modes, control the timer with the
tocoupler, it can be used as an NPN start input or stop input.
5. Operation mode and time range
setting
LT4H timer
As NPN output
The operation mode and time range can
be set with the DIP switches on the side
{ O I
of the timer. Make the DIP switch set-
Load tings before installing the timer on the
panel.
Load’s power supply The operation mode of LT4H-W series
can be set with the keys and switches on
the front of the timer.
 x
LT4H series cautions for use 27
pass through C and R, enter the unit, 2) This timer employs a power supply
and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B without a transformer, so the power and
Leakage current
shows the correct setup. input signal terminals are not insulated.
Operating power supply R C T
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
input circuit, install double insulation on
R T R R the sensor side.

(Fig. A)
R Relay T Timer
6) Long periods of continuous operation
R
in the time-up completed condition (one
Operating power supply month or more) will result in the weaken-
T ing of the internal electrical components
C
from the generated heat and, therefore,
should be avoided. If you do plan to use
(Fig. B) the unit for such continuous operation,
use in conjunction with a relay as shown
Pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns in the circuit in the diagram below.
Polarity: ± 7. Acquisition of CE marking
Cycle: 100 cycles/second Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
5) When connecting the operating power with EN61812-1.
supply, make sure that no leakage cur- 1) Overvoltage category III,
rent enters the timer. For example, when pollution level 2
performing contact protection, if set up
like that of fig. A, leaking current will
Timers
Digital
(2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
Receive output insulated relays, etc.
from contact
at relay R 3) The load connected to the output con-
tact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic insula-
tion and can be double-insulated to meet
EN/IEC requirements by using basic
insulation on the load.
4) Please use a power supply that is
protected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
5) You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not touch
the terminals or other parts of the timer
when it is powered. When installing or
un-installing, make sure that no voltage
is being applied to any of the terminals.
6) Do not use this timer as a safety cir-
cuit. For example when using a timer in
a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.

7. Self-diagnosis function
If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear.
Display Contents Output condition Restoration procedure Preset values after restoration
The values at start-up before the CPU
Malfunctioning CPU.
Enter reset input, RESET malfunction occurred.
OFF
Malfunctioning memory. See key, or restart unit.
0
note.
Note: Includes the possibility that the EEPROM’s life has expired.
 x
28 QM4H

QM4H

DIN 48 SIZE
DIGITAL TIMER
QM4H QM4H
Timers
Timers
Digital

Possible to set and change the time with front digit

DINswitches
48 Sizeeasily
during the power off.
Digital Timer
Furthermore single unit has a time range of 0.01s to 9990hrs!!
Features
G Type

• Possible to set and change the time and the time range even
when the power is off.
Features • Selectable 8 different time ranges with front digit switches.

›› • Low price.
Possible to set and change the time and the time range
• [QM4H-S Type]
[QM4H-S Type] ››
It can select the mode with MODE switch.
even when the power is off. It can select the mode with MODE switch.
››9990hrs. S Type G Type
T.D.toMODE: Time delay
Furthermore single unit has a time range of 0.01s
INST. MODE: Time delay
T.D.
2CMODE:
INST.
(2 Form
1CMODE:
Time
(1 Form
C) delay 2C (2 Form C)
Time
C) delay 1C (1 Form C)
(with MODE switch) Instantaneous
1C (1 Instantaneous
Form C) 1C (1 Form C)
[QM4H-G Type] [QM4H-G Type]
Reset and stop signal input
Reset enable
and stop to external
signal inputcontrol.
enable to external control.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/
• Compliant with UL/c-UL and CE.
Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE. ››
Product types
Time delay
Product name Time range Operating mode Contact arrangement Operating voltage Part number
direction
T.D. mode: Time delay 2C 12 to 48 V AC/DC QM4HS-U2C-48V
S Type QM4H INST. mode: Time delay 1C
Power ON delay
digital timer and Instantaneous 1C
0.01s/0.1s/1s/0.1min/ (Use MODE switch on front) 100 to 240 V AC/DC QM4HS-U2C-240V
Addition 1min/0.1h/1h/10h
(8 time ranges) Power ON delay 12 to 48 V AC/DC QM4HG-U1C-48V
G Type QM4H
(with reset and Time delay 1C
digital timer
stop terminals) 100 to 240 V AC/DC QM4HG-U1C-240V

Note: Time delay directional subtraction types are also available by order

Part names
TIMER Elapsed time display
Time delay indicator
MODE switch
(OP.LED)
(QM4H-S type only) MODE
T.D. INST.
Set time display
- - - -
8 8 8 S
+ + + +
Time setting switch
(3 digits)
QM4H-S Time range switch

Time range settings

Time range
switch
.01
S
0.1
S S 0.1
M M 0.1
H H 10
H

Operating 0.01s 0.1s 1s 0.1min. 1min. 0.1h 1h 10h

to to to to to to to to
time range 9.99s 99.9s 999s 99.9min 999min 99.9h 999h 9990h

.01 0.1 .01 0.1 0.1 0.1 10

S S S S S M M H H H

Note that there are two settings with the same range.

50
 x
QM4H 29

QM4H
Changing the time setting
• It is possible to use the up and down keys to change the time setting even during timer delay.
However, attention should be paid to the following.

Timers
Digital
1) When the time setting is shorter than the elapsed time, and timer delay is set in the plus direction, the time setting will return to “0”
after the timer delay reaches full-scale, timer delay will be performed up to the changed time setting, and time up will be reached.
2) When timer delay is set in the minus direction, timer delay will be performed up to “0” regardless of the time, even if the time setting
is shorter than the elapsed time, and time up will be reached.

Specifications
Type
QM4H-S QM4H-G
Item
Rated operating voltage 12 to 48 V AC/DC and 100 to 240 V AC/DC
During time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.5W During time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.0W
12 to 48 V delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 3.0 VA delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 2.0 VA
AC/DC After time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 2.5W After time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.5W
Rated power delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 5.0 VA delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 3.5 VA
consumption During time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.5W During time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.0W
100 to 240 V delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 3.0 VA delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 2.5 VA
Rating AC/DC After time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 2.0W After time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.8W
delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 4.0 VA delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 3.2 VA
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common (at AC)
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250V AC (resistive load)
Time range 0.01s to 9990h, Selection of 8 range: 0.01s/0.1s/1s/0.1min/1min/0.1h/1h/10h
Operation mode Power ON delay Power ON delay (with reset and stop terminals)
Min. input signal width — 20ms (Reset and Stop inputs)*4
Operating time fluctuation ±(0.01%+0.05s) in case of power on start
Temperature error ±(0.005%+0.03s) in case of input reset start*2
Time
Operating voltage: 85 to 110% V
accuracy*1 Setting error Temperature: –10 to +55°C (20°C )
Voltage error Stopped time: 0.1 sec to 1 hour
T.D. mode: Time delay 2C
Contact arrangement INST. mode: Time delay 1C and Time delay 1C
Contact Instantaneous 1C (Use MODE switch on front)
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) Min. 107
Life*3 5
Electrical (contact) Min. 10 (at rated control vltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output,
Breakdown voltage
between contact sets, between contacts
(Initial value)
Min. 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC megger)
Electrical Between live and dead metal parts: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Insulation resistance Between input and output: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between contact sets: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Between contacts: 1, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Reset time Max. 0.1s
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min. single amplitude of 0.25 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min. single amplitude of 0.375 mm (1h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock F unctional 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 980 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10°C to 55°C
Operating
Ambient humidity Min. 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
conditions
Air pressure 860 to 1060 hPa
Mass (Weight) Approx. 130 g Approx. 120 g
Others Available standards UL, c-UL, CE
Operating display LED (red), During time delay: blinking, After time delay: OFF
Notes: 1. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating voltage (in case of DC type, ripple rate of 5% or less), ambient temp. 20°C,
and stop time 1 second.
2. Reset start applies to QM4H-G type.
3. Excluding switches
4. Note that if the QM4H-G type is set to zero “0” and a STOP signal is input, output will begin when the power is turned on.
5. The protective structure on the AQM4801 is IP50, and IP64 for the AQM4803.
 x
30 Qm4H

QM4H
Applicable standard
Timers

EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

Digital

Safety standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)

Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)

Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions (units: mm )
Tolerance: ±1.0
• S Type • G Type Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams
6 • QM4H-S Type
48 72.5 12.9
NC NC
TIMER TIMER NO NO
4 5
3 6
MODE
T.D. INST. 44.5
MODE
2 7
- - - - - - - - 1 8
8 8 8 S 8 8 8 S
+ + + + + + + + COM COM
QM4H-S QM4H-G Operating
voltage
9.5 (85.4)
MODE TD mode: Time delay 2C
T.D. INST. INST mode:
Time delay 1C and
Panel cut-out dimensions Panel Mounting Diagram Instantaneous 1C
*Use MODE switch on front
Mounting frame (AQM4812: supplied)
(AT8-DA4 can also be used for
45+0.6
0 mounting frame. Sold separately)
Notes:
Mounting screw
(supplied with mounting frame) 1. Operating voltage signs in parentheses ( ) indicate
the polarity of the DC type.
45 +0.6
0

2. is a time delay contact.

45 +0.6
0
is an instantaneous contact.

A
• QM4H-G Type
Dimensions A when n products STOP NC
are installed continuously: Panel (Thickness: 1 to 5 mm .039 to ) RESET NO
A = (48∗n–2.5 +0.6
0 ) 4 5
3 6

2 7
1 8
COM COM
Operating
voltage
 x
QM4H 31

QM4H
Operation mode
• QM4H-S Type • QM4H-G Type

Timers
Digital
1) T.D. mode
ON ON

Power supply OFF Power supply

T ON ON
ON
Reset 1-3
Time delay contact OFF
ON
(N.O. contact)
Stop 1-4
1-3 or 6-8
ta T t1 t2
OP.LED ON ON
Time delay contact
(N.O. contact) 6-8
2) INST. mode
OP.LED
ON
OFF T: Setting time t1+t2 = T ta<T
Power supply T
ON Lit Blinking Blinking slowly
Time delay contact OFF
(N.O. contact) 6-8 * Set the reset inputs 1 to 3 and stop inputs 1 to 4 to 20 ms or higher.
ON * When shorting a signal, please set the inter-terminal resistance to 1 kΩ or less,
Instantaneous contact OFF
and the inter-terminal residual voltage to 2 V or less.
(N.O. contact) 1-3
When releasing, please set the inter-terminal resistance to 100 kΩ or greater.
OP.LED

Precautions in using the QM4H

1. Avoid locations subject to
flammable or corrosive gases,
excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or
excessive shocks.
2. Since the main-unit is made of
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact
with or use in environments
containing methyl alcohol, benzene,
thinners, and other organic solvents;
and ammonia, caustic sodas, and
other alkaline substances.
3. Power supply superimposed surge
protector
Although a surge protector will withstand
standard-waveform voltage with the
values in the next table, anything above
this will destroy the internal circuit. You
should therefore use a surge absorber.
12 to 48 V AC/DC 100 to 240 V AC/DC
1,000 V 6,000 V
• Surge waveform
[±(1.2×50) µs uni-polar full wave voltage]
4. In order to maintain the
characteristics, do not remove the
timer case.
5. When installing the panel, use the
supplied AQM4812 main-unit
mounting frame. Note that the
ATA4811 is also available for sale
separately.
6. If you change the operating voltage,
be sure not to allow leak current into
the timer.
7. Avoid leaving the unit powered
continuously. Leaving the unit
powered up with output set to ON
continuously for a long period of time
(about 1 month or more) will wear out
the electronic components. If you will
be keeping it powered continuously,
combine with a relay to create the
circuit shown below:
R T
R
R T

Compliance with the CE marking

• When using in applications to which
EN61010-1/IEC61010-1 applies, abide
by the following conditions.
1) Ambient conditions
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
• Indoor use
• Acceptable temperature and humidity
range: –10 to +55°C, 30 to 85%RH (with
no condensation at 20°C)
• Under 2000 m elevation
2) Use the unit in a location that matches 3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
the following conditions. EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
• There is minimal dust and no corrosive input section.
gas. 4) Applied voltage should be protected
• There is no combustible or explosive with an overcurrent protection device
gas. (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
• There is no mechanical vibration or that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
impacts.
• There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
• Located away from large-volume
electromagnetic switches and power
lines with large electrical currents.

53
 32 S1DXM-A/M

S1DXM-A/M
S1DXM-A/M
Multi-Range
S1DXM-A/M
MULTI-RANGEAnalog Timer
Analog
Timers

ANALOG TIMER
Timers
UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features FEATURES
›› MTheultiple functions built in
• Multiple functions built in
››
The operation mode and time range can
• Economically priced
Cadmium-free contacts used
1) Prices set to lower costs.
To eliminate2)environmentally harmful chemical
operation mode and time range can be switched by
be switched by using the MODE and Further cost reduction when used withsubstances,
using the MODE and RANGE switchesRANGE on the switches relays
on the front panel.
front panel. with cadmium-free contacts
HJ Relay terminal socket. are used.
››Short Body of only 57.9mm
• Part number consolidation
›› CE marking • CE marking supported
supported
››
1) The lineup consists of 64 easy-to- UL and C-UL approved.
Part number consolidation choose models.
UL and C-UL approved, UL File No.: E122222 C-UL
2) An operation
1) The lineup consists of 64 easy-to-choose models. mode fixed type File No.: E122222, UL File No.: E122222, C-UL File No.:
(S1DXM-A)
2) An operation mode fixed type (S1DXM-A) and and 4-operation modeE122222
4-operation
switching type (S1DXM-M) are available.
mode switching type (S1DXM-M) are available.
• Cadmium-free contacts used
To eliminate environmentally harmful
RoHS Directive compatibility information
chemical substances, relays with
http://www.nais-e.com/ cadmium-free contacts are used.

Product types
Product Types
1. S1DXM-A multi-range timer
No MODE switch, Operation mode (fixed): Power ON-delay
Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 4 Form C
Operating voltage Time range
Part number Part number
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C10M-DC12V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C30M-DC12V
12V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C60M-DC12V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-DC12V S1DXM-A4C10H-DC12V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C10M-DC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C30M-DC24V
24V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C60M-DC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-DC24V S1DXM-A4C10H-DC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC24V
24V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC24V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC120V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC120V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC120V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC120V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC220V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC220V
200 to 220V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC220V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC220V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC220V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC240V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC240V
220 to 240V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC240V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC240V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC240V

57
 S1DXM-A/M 33

S1DXM-A/M
2. S1DXM-M multi-range timer
With MODE switch, Operation mode (switchable): Power ON-delay, Power Flicker ON start, Power Flicker OFF start, Power One-shot
Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 4 Form C
Operating voltage Time range
Part number Part number
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C10M-DC12V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C30M-DC12V
12V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C60M-DC12V

Analog
Timers
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-DC12V S1DXM-M4C10H-DC12V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C10M-DC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C30M-DC24V
24V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C60M-DC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-DC24V S1DXM-M4C10H-DC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC24V
24V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC24V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC120V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC120V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC120V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC120V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC220V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC220V
200 to 220V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC220V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC220V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC220V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC240V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC240V
220 to 240V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC240V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC240V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC240V

Part names
S1DXM-A S1DXM-M • [RANGE] Time range switch
Operation (4 different time ranges can be switched.)
Time range Time range
mode switch 10M type: 1 s/10 s/1 min/10 min
switch switch
Power LED 30M type: 3 s/30 s/3 min/30 min
(green) 60M type: 6 s/60 s/6 min/60 min
Operation LED
(orange) 10H type: 1 min/10 min/1 hr/10 hr
Setting
hand
Setting dial • [MODE] Operation mode switch
(4 different operation modes can be switched.)
Control time
scale Power ON-delay
Power Flicker OFF start
Power Flicker ON start
Power One-shot

Operation mode and time range setting

Operation mode Operation mode switch Time range switch
ON
1 s m
Power ON-delay (m) (h)
2
X1 X10
ON
1 The time setting can be switched among
Power Flicker OFF start 4 ranges each for 4 types for an interval
2 between 0.05 seconds and 10 hours.

Notes: 1. The product is factory shipped with all settings on the OFF side (left).
ON 2. Do not operate the switches with a sharp-edged object such as a knife
1 blade.
3. The power must be turned off when setting the time range or operation
Power Flicker ON start
mode. Operating the switches with the power on is a cause of breakdown
2 and malfunction.
4. Use a force of under 5 N to operate the DIP switches when setting the time
ON range and operation mode.
1
Power One-shot
2
 34 S1DXM-A/M

S1DXM-A/M
S1DXM-A/M
Operation
Operation Mode
mode
Operation Mode
1. S1DXM-A multi-range timer
1. S1DXM-A
Power multi-range
ON-delay operation timer
•Power
• When ON-delay
When power
power is operation
is turned
turned on, the
on, the output
output contact
contact operates
operates after
after the
the set
set time.
time. The
The output
output contact
contact remains
remains on
on until
until the
the power
power is
is turned
turned off.
off.
• When power is turned on, the output contact operates after the set time. The output contact remains on until the power is turned off.
Time chart
Time chart
Time chart ON
ON
Power supply
Power supply
OFF
ON
OFF
Power supply TT
ON
Analog

ON
OFF
Timers

Timed-out contact
Timed-out contact (NO)
(NO) T
OFF
ON
OFF
Timed-out contact (NO) T: Setting
T: Setting time
time
UP (operation)
UP LED OFF
(operation) LED
(orange)
T: Setting time
(orange)
UP
ON
ON(operation) LED
(power) LED
(power) LED
(green)
(green) (orange)
ON (power) LED
(green)

2. S1DXM-M multi-range timer

2. S1DXM-M
Power multi-range
ON-delay operationtimer Power Flicker OFF start operation
Power
[MODE]ON-delay
[MODE] switch 1:
switch operation
1: OFF,
OFF, switch 2:
switch 2: OFF
OFF Power
[MODE]Flicker
[MODE] OFF
switch 1:
switch 1: start
OFF,
OFF, operation
switch
switch 2: ON
2: ON
•[MODE]
• When switch
When power
power is 1: OFF,on,
is turned
turned switch
on, the 2: OFF
the output
output contact operates
contact operates after
after the
the set
set time.
time. •[MODE]
• When
When theswitch
the power1:is
power isOFF, switch
turned
turned 2: output
on, the
on, the ON contacts
output contacts repeatedly
repeatedly operate
operate at
at
• When
The
The power
output
output is turned
contact
contact on, the
remains
remains on output
on until contact
until the
the poweroperates
power is turnedafter
is turned off. the set time.
off. • When
the
the the power
set time.
set time. is turned
The output
The output on, the
contact
contact output
begins
begins contacts
from
from offrepeatedly
the off
the state.
state. operate at
The output contact remains on until the power is turned off. the set time. The output contact begins from the off state.
Time chart
Time chart Time chart
Time chart
Time chart ON
ON Time chart ON
ON
Power supply
Power supply Power supply
Power supply
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
Power supply TT Power supply TT TT TT TT TT TT tt
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON
OFF
Timed-out contact
Timed-out contact (NO)
(NO) T Timed-out contact (NO)
Timed-out contact (NO) T T T T T T t
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
Timed-out contact (NO) T: Setting
T: Setting time
time Timed-out contact (NO) T: Setting
T: Setting time
time tt << TT
UP (operation)
UP LED OFF
(operation) LED UP (operation)
UP LED OFF
(operation) LED
(orange)
T: Setting time
(orange) (orange) T: Setting time
(orange) t<T
UP
ON(operation)
ON (power) LED
(power) LED
LED UP
ON
ON(operation) LED
(power) LED
(power) LED
(green) (orange) (orange) (green)
(green)
ON (power) LED (green) ON (power) LED
(green) (green)

Power Flicker ON start operation Power One-shot operation

Power Flicker
[MODE]
[MODE] switch ON
switch 1:
1: start
ON,
ON, operation
switch
switch 2: OFF
2: OFF Power One-shot
[MODE]
[MODE] switch 1:
switch operation
1: ON,
ON, switch 2:
switch 2: ON
ON
•[MODE]
• When switch
When power
power is 1: ON, on,
is turned
turned switch
on, the 2: OFFcontact
the output
output contact operates
operates repeatedly
repeatedly at
at the
the [MODE] switch
When power
When power 1: ON,on,
is turned
is turned switch
on, 2: ONcontact
the output
the output contact performs
performs the
the on
on operation
operation
• When
set
set time.power
time. The is turned
The output
output on, the
contact
contact outputat
outputs
outputs atcontact
the operates
the same
same repeatedly
time power
time power at
on.the
turns on.
turns When
at
at powertime
the same
the same is turned
time poweron,
power theon,
turns
turns output
on, onlycontact
only the performs
for the
for time. the on operation
set time.
set
set time. The output contact outputs at the same time power turns on. at the same time power turns on, only for the set time.
Time chart
Time chart Time chart
Time chart
Time chart ON
ON Time chart ON
ON
Power supply
Power supply Power supply
Power supply
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
Power supply TT TT TT TT TT TT tt Power supply TT
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON
OFF
Timed-out contact
Timed-out contact (NO)
(NO) T T T T T T t Timed-out contact
Timed-out contact (NO)
(NO) T
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
Timed-out contact (NO) T: Setting
T: Setting time
time tt << TT Timed-out contact (NO) T: Setting
T: Setting time
time
UP (operation)
UP LED OFF
(operation) LED UP (operation)
UP LED OFF
(operation) LED
(orange)
(orange) T: Setting time t<T (orange) T: Setting time
(orange)
UP
ON
ON(operation)
(power) LED
(power) LED
LED UP
ON(operation)
ON (power) LED
(power) LED
LED
(orange) (green)
(green) (orange) (green)
(green)
ON (power) LED ON (power) LED
(green) (green)

Time Range
Time range Setting
setting
Time Range
Type
Type
Setting
Time scale
Time scale Time unit
Time unit Min. scale
Min. scale Max. scale
Max. scale Setting range
Setting range
Type 10M type
10M type Time scale ss Time unit mm Min.
0.05scale
0.05 Max.11scale 0.05 to
0.05 to 1s
1s 0.5 to
0.5 Setting
to 10s
10s range
0.05 to
0.05 to 1m
1m 0.5 to
0.5 to 10m
10m
310M
300MM ttype
tyyppee sss m
m
m 0.05
0.22
0 . 31
3 0.05
00..22 ttotoo 331s
ss 0.5
2 t to
o
2 to 30s 310s
0 s 0.05
00..22 ttotoo 331m
mm 0.5
22 ttooto3310m
00mm
S1DXM-A
S1DXM-A X1
X1 X10
X10
S1DXM-A 63
600
0MM
M tttyyypp
pee
e X1 X10 sss m
m
m 00
0...52
5 63
6 00
0...52
5 tttoo
o 63
6sss 52
5 tttoo
o 63
600
0sss 00
0...52
5 tttoo
o 63
6mm
m 52
5 tttoo
o 63
600
0mm
m
161000H
MH tttyyypp
pee
e m
m s m
hh 000..0.0555 16
1 00.0.00.5
55 ttto
oo 1
61m
sm 00..555tttooo611000sm
m 000...00555to
ttoo611m
hh 005..55tottoo611
000
mhh
1
10M 0 H
10M type t y
type p e m
ss m
mh 0.05
0.05
0.05 1
11 0 .
0.05 0 5
0.05 to 1s t o
to 1
1sm 0 .5 tto
0.5
0.5 o1
to 0m
10s
10s 0
0.05.
0.05 to0 5 to1m
to 1h
1m 0
0.5 . 5 t
to
0.5 to 10m o 1
10m0 h

310M
300MM ttype
tyyppee sss m
m
m 0.05
00..22 31
3 0.05
00..22 ttotoo 331s
ss 0.5
22 ttooto3310s
00ss 0.05
00..22 ttoto
o 331mmm 0.5
22 ttooto3310m
00mm
S1DXM-M
S1DXM-M X1
X1 X10
X10
S1DXM-M 63
600
0MM
M tttyyypp
pee
e X1 X10 sss m
m
m 00
0...52
5 63
6 00
0...52
5 tttoo
o 63
6sss 52
5 tttoo
o 63
600
0sss 00
0...52
5 tttoo
o 63m
6mm 52
5 tttoo
o 63
600
0mm
m
10H typpee
6
1 0
0 M
H tt yy p e m
m s m
000..0.0555
hh 00.0.00.5
55 ttto 16
oo 1
61m
1sm 00..555tttooo611000sm
m 0.05 to 1m
00. .055 t o
to 61hh 0.5 to 10mhh
0 5
.5 t o
t o6 0
1 0
Note: The
The time
time setting 10H tyis
setting range
range pethe combination of the time scale m (X1 or X10) h on the dial 0.05 and the time1unit
the time unit (s, m,0.or
(s, m, 05h).
or to 1m 0.5 to 10m 0.05 to 1h 0.5 to 10h
Note: is the combination of the time scale (X1 or X10) on the dial and h).
Example:
Note: Example:
The When dial
When
time setting dial
rangereads
reads 1, time
1,
is the time scale
scale is
combination is of
X1the
X1 and
and time
time
time units(X1
units
scale is seconds,
is seconds, then
theititdial
then
or X10) on is 11and
is second.
second.
the time unit (s, m, or h).
Example: When dial reads 1, time scale is X1 and time units is seconds, then it is 1 second.

Ordering
Ordering Information
information
Ordering Information
Ex. S1DXM-
Ex. S1DXM- A
A 2C
2C 30M
30M DC24V
DC24V
Ex. S1DXM- A 2C 30M DC24V

Control output
Control output
Operation mode
Operation mode Time range
Time range Operating voltage*
Operating voltage*
arrangement
Control output
arrangement
Operation mode Time range Operating voltage*
A arrangement
A 2C: Timed-out 22 Form
2C: Timed-out Form C
C 10M: 0.05
10M: 0.05 ss toto 10
10 min
min DC12V: 12
DC12V: 12 V
V DCDC
MM
A 4C: Timed-out 44
2C: Timed-out
4C: Form C
2 Form C 30M: 0.2
0.05ss sto
10M: 0.2
30M: toto30
30 min
10min
min DC24V: 24
DC12V: 24
DC24V: V DC
12 V DC
M 4C: Timed-out 4 Form C 60M: 0.5
30M:
60M: 0.5 ss to
0.2 60 min
to 60
30 min AC24V: 24
DC24V:
AC24V: 24 V
V ACAC
DC
10H: 0.05
60M:
10H: 0.05smin
0.5 min
to 60tomin
to 10 hr
10 hr AC120V: 100
AC24V:
AC120V: 100Vto
24 toAC
120 V
120 V AC
AC
10H: 0.05 min to 10 hr AC220V: 200
AC120V:
AC220V: 200 to
100 220 V
to 220
120 V AC
AC
AC240V: 220
AC220V:
AC240V: 220 to
200 240 V
to 240
220 V AC
AC
AC240V: 220 to 240 V AC
** For
For other
other operating
operating voltage
voltage types,
types, please
please consult
consult us.
us.
* For other operating voltage types, please consult us.
59
59
 S1DXM-A/M 35

S1DXM-A/M
Specifications
Item Specifications
Rated operating voltage 24VAC 100 to 120VAC 200 to 220VAC 220 to 240VAC 12VDC 24VDC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common —
Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 2 W Max. 2 W
Rated power (at 24 VAC) (at 100 VAC) (at 200 VAC) (at 220 VAC) (at 12 VDC) (at 24 VDC)
consumption During time delay Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 5mA Approx. 3mA

Analog
Timers
After time delay Approx. 80mA Approx. 20mA Approx. 13mA Approx. 13mA Approx. 70mA Approx. 40mA
Rating Timed -out 2 Form C: 7A 250V AC (resistive load)
Rated control capacity
Timed -out 4 Form C: 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
S1DXM-A
Power on delay operation fixed
(Power display: ON/green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange)
Operation mode
S1DXM-M
4 switchable operations: Power ON-delay/Power Flicker OFF start/Power Flicker ON start/Power One-shot
(Power display: ON/green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange)
Operating time fluctuation &
Max. ±1 %, (power off time change at the range of 0.1 s to 1 h), 1 s range : Max. ±1 % and 10 ms*2
Power off time change error
Time accuracy*1 Voltage error Max. ± 1 % (at the operating voltage changes between –20 to +10%), 1 s range: Max. ± 1 % and 10 ms*2
Temperature error Max. ± 5% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C)
Setting error Max. ± 10%, 1 s range: Max. ± 10% and 20 ms
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C, Timed-out 4 Form C
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A, 6V DC)
Contact
Timed-out 2 Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating
Contact material
Timed-out 4 Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating
Mechanical (constant) Min. 107
Life
Electrical (constant) 2×105 (at rated control capacity)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Reset time Max. 0.1s
Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output, between contact sets, between contacts
Insulation resistance (Initial value)
Min. 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC megger)
Electrical
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
Between contact sets: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Max. temperature rise 70°C
Ambient temperature –10 to 50°C
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Air pressure 860 to 1060 hPa
conditions Ripple rate DC type only, transmission wave rectification (ripple rate: approx. 48%)*3
Mass (Weight) Approx. 45 g
Protective construction IEC standard: IP40 (IP50 when using ADX18008 protective cover)
Notes: *1. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating voltage (in case of DC type, ripple rate of 5% or less), ambient temp. 20°C , and power off time 1 second.
*2. Power one-shot 1 s range: +2% and 10 ms
*3. When using with a transmission wave rectification, vibration resistance and shock resistance properties worsen compared to when using a stabilized power supply.
 36 S1DXM-A/M

S1DXM-A/M
Dimensions mm in mm
1. S1DXM-A
Control time scale
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagram
Timed-out 2 Form C type
UP LED (orange)
Time range switch
1 4
X10

S1DXM
UP
m
Analog

RANGE

5 8
Timers

22.1 13.35
X1
s

9 12
0

13 14
ON

ON LED (green)
28.5 Operating
16.6 voltage
.654
Timed-out 4 Form C type
4.45 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Nameplate 13.35
57.9
52.7 13 14

For 4 Form C type Operating

5.1 6.4 6.4 voltage
4.1

6.4
* For the DC operating type, terminal 14 is “+” and terminal 13 is “–”.
Tolerance: ±0.5

2. S1DXM-M
Control time scale
Terminal layouts and wiring diagram
Timed-out 2 Form C type
UP LED (orange)
Time range switch 1 4
X10
UP

S1DXM
m
MODE ON RANGE

5 8
Operation mode switch 22.1 13.35
X1

9 12
s

13 14
2
1

ON

ON LED (green)
28.5 Operating
16.6 voltage

Timed-out 4 Form C type

4.45 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Nameplate 13.35
57.9
52.7 13 14

For 4 Form C type Operating

5.1 6.4 6.4 voltage
4.1

6.4
* For the DC operating type, terminal 14 is “+” and terminal 13 is “–”.
Tolerance: ±0.5

Applicable Standard
Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II (2 Form C type);
Safety standard EN61812-1
Pollution Degree 1/Overvoltage Category II (4 Form C type)
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

61

S1DXM-A/M
Precautions during usage
1. Reset periods
After unscheduled operations have been
completed, or if the timer operation power
supply has been turned off at any time
during operation, a reset period of at
least 0.1 seconds should be allowed
before resuming operation.
2. External surge protection
External surge protection may be
required if the following values are
exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit
will be damaged. The typical surge
absorption elements include a varistor, a
capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
absorption element is used, use an
oscilloscope to see whether or not the
foreign surge exceeding the specified
value appears.
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2 × 50) µs]
100
90
Crest value (%)
Crest value
50
30
0
0 1.2
Time (μs)
Operation voltage
100 to 120V AC, 200 to 220V AC
12V DC, 24V DC
Since the main body cover and knob are
made of polycarbonate resin, prevent
contact with organic solvents such as
methyl alcohol, benzine and thinner, or
strong alkali materials such as ammonia
and caustic soda.
3. Terminal wiring
Make sure that terminals are wired
carefully and correctly, referring to the
terminal layout and wiring diagrams.
Particularly, since the DC type has
polarity, do not operate it with reverse
polarity.
4. Assembly
1) When installing, use a terminal socket
or socket intended for the HC/HJ relay.
For adjacent installations, be sure to first
verify the installation conditions of the
terminal sockets or sockets you will be
using.
2) Use the separately-sold dedicated
socket leaf holding clip to secure terminal
sockets and sockets to the timer unit. The
conditions of use for dedicated socket
leaf holding clip will differ depending on
the terminal socket or socket you will be
using. Therefore, please test under actual
conditions before putting into operation.
62
3) If terminals are to be soldered directly,
please hand solder with a 30 to 60 W
solder iron with a tip temperature of
300°C for no more than 3 seconds.
Automatic soldering should be avoided.
4) A flux-tight construction is not used
with this timer, so be careful that flux or
cleaning fluid does not get inside the
case.
5) To assure that characteristics are
maintained, do not remove the case.
5. Long continuous current flow
Long continuous current flow through the
timer cause generation of heat internally,
which degrade the electronic parts. Use
the timer in combination with a relay and
avoid long continuous current flow
through the timer. (Refer to the circuit
diagram below when using a safety
circuit for continuous operation.)
R T R
R T
50
6. Phase synchronization using AC
Surge voltage
load
If the turning on of the timer output relay
4,000V
is synchronized to the AC power supply
1,000V
phase, there may be times when the
service life is shortened because of
electrical factors, or when a locking
phenomenon (defective relay return)
occurs because of contact point welding
or a shift in the contact relay. Check the
operation using the actual timer.
7. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN61812-1.
1) Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 2 (2 Form C type)
Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 1 (4 Form C type)
2) The load connected to the output
contact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic
insulation and can be double-insulated to
meet EN/IEC requirements by using
basic insulation on the load.
3) Please use a power supply that is
protected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
4) You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not touch
the terminals or other parts of the timer
when it is powered. When installing or un-
installing, make sure that no voltage is
being applied to any of the terminals.
S1DXM-A/M 37
5) Do not use this timer as a safety
circuit. For example when using a timer in
a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.
8. Others
1) When setting the time, the dial should
Analog
Timers
be kept within the range indicated on the
dial face. The “0” marking on the dial
indicates the minimum time during which
the control time can be varied (it does not
indicate 0 seconds).
2) Do not rotate the knob past the
stopper.
3) Turn off the power before changing the
DIP switch settings. Changing the DIP
switch with the power on can cause
breakdown.
4) When connecting the operating power
supply, make sure that no leakage
current enters the timer. For example,
when performing contact protection, if set
up like that of fig. A, leaking current will
pass through C and R, enter the timer,
and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B
shows the correct setup.
Leakage current
Operating power supply R C T
(Fig. A) WRONG
R
Operating power supply
T
C
(Fig. B) CORRECT
When a contact switch having an
operation indicating lamp (lamp equipped
limit switch, etc.) is used to apply power
to the timer, a resistor having a value
equal to or greater than the value below
shall be connected in series with the
lamp.
100 to 120V AC operating type:
Min. 33kΩ
200 to 220V AC operating type:
Min. 82kΩ
Limit switch
Example of limit switches
with lamp.
T VL with lamp, Vertical type
Resistor Neon lamp with lamp, ML with lamp.
 38 PM4H-A/s/M

PM4H-A/S/M
DIN48 SIZE
Multi-Range
Analog
Timers

Screw
terminal type
Analog Timer

Features
›› 100-240V AC free-voltage input, 48-125V DC type available ›› 0 setting instantaneous output operation
›› Short body – 62.5mm (screw terminal type) ›› Multiple time ranges – 1 s to 500 h (Max.)
›› Front panel of IP65 type is protected against water-splash ›› 8 different operation modes: (PM4H-A)
and dust
›› Compliant with UL/CSA, CE and LLOYD
›› Built-in screw terminals: Screw terminal type is used for easy
wiring and reducing additional cost for accessories.
›› UL File No.: E122222 CSA File No.: LR39291
Product types
Contact Protective Rated
Type Operation mode Time range Terminal type Part number
arrangement construction operating voltage
11 pins PM4HA-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC125VSW
IP65
11 pins PM4HA-H-24VW
8 operation modes 24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-24VSW
• Pulse ON-delay
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC12VW
• Pulse Flicker 12V DC
• Pulse ON-flicker Relay Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-A Timed-out
• Differential ON/OFF-delay (1) (2) 11 pins PM4HA-H-AC240V
• Signal OFF-delay 2 Form C 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-AC240VS
• Pulse One-shot
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC125V
• Pulse One-cycle 48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC125VS
IP50
11 pins PM4HA-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-24VS
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC12VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HS-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-24VSW
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC12VW
Relay 16 selectable 12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-S Power ON-delay Timed-out ranges
2 Form C 8 pins PM4HS-H-AC240V
1s to 500h 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-AC240VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HS-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC12VS
8 pins PM4HM-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HM-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HM-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
5 operation modes Screw terminal PM4HM-H-24VSW
(With instantaneous contact) Relay 8 pins PM4HM-H-DC12VW
• Power ON-delay Timed-out 12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-M • Power Flicker 1 Form C
Instantaneous 8 pins PM4HM-H-AC240V
• Power ON-flicker 100 to 240V AC
• Power One-shot 1 Form C Screw terminal PM4HM-H-AC240VS
• Power One-cycle 8 pins PM4HM-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HM-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HM-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC12VS
If you use this timer under harsh environment, please order above sealed type (IP65 type).
IP65 type — Protection dust and water jet splay on the front face.
 PM4H-A/s/M 39

PM4H-A/S/M
Time range
Time unit PM4H-A/PM4H-S/PM4H-M
sec min hrs 10h All types of PM4H timer have multi-time
Scale
1 0.1s to 1s 0.1 min to 1 min 0.1h to 1h 1.0h to 10h range.
16 time ranges are selectable.
5 Control 0.5s to 5s 0.5 min to 5 min 0.5h to 5h 5h to 50h
time range
1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled.
10 1.0s to 10s 1.0 min to 10 min 1.0h to 10h 10h to 100h
50 5s to 50s 5 min to 50 min 5h to 50h 50h to 500h

Analog
Timers
Note: 0 setting is for instantaneous output operation.

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 48 to 125V DC, 12V DC, 24V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 10VA (100 to 240V AC)
Rated power consumption Approx. 2.5VA (24V AC)
Approx. 1.5W (12V DC, 24V DC, 48 to 125V DC)
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Rating Pulse ON-delay
Power ON-delay
Pulse Flicker
Power Flicker
Pulse ON-Flicker
Power ON-flicker
Operating mode Differential ON/OFF-delay (1) (2) Power ON-delay
Power One-shot
Signal OFF-delay
Power One-cycle
Pulse One-shot
(with instantaneous contact)
Pulse One-cycle
Time range 1s to 500h (Max.) 16 time ranges switchable
Operating time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
1*, 2* Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C)
Timed-out 1 Form C
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Instantaneous 1 Form C
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 100ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 65°C
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (at 20°C , non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others 100g (Pin type)
Weight
110g (Screw terminal type)
Note: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple
factor for DC), 20°C ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2) For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.

18
 40 PM4H-A/s/M

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

PM4H-A PM4H-S
Pin type Screw terminal type Pin type Screw terminal type
• Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C
Reset input
Start input N.C. N.C.
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
Stop input N.C. N.O. N.O.
N.O.
N.C.
5 6 7 N.O.
11 4 5 11
4 8 1 2 3 4 5 3 6 1 2 3 4 5
Analog
Timers

3 9 Stop
input 2 7
2
1 11
10
Reset
1 8 Operating
input
Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
Operating voltage Start (–) (+)
(–) (+) input
Operating
(+) voltage (–)
1) DC Type
PM4H-M Type Pin Screw terminal
Pin type Screw terminal type Connect the terminal b to negative
PM4H-A Connect the terminal 2 to
• Timed-out 1 Form C • Timed-out 1 Form C (–), and the terminal j to positive (+).
negative (–), and the terminal
PM4H-S Connect the terminal b to negative 1 to positive (+).
• Instantaneous 1 Form C • Instantaneous 1 Form C
PM4H-M (–), and the terminal g to positive (+).
N.C. N.C.

N.O.
4 5
N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
2) Contact
3 6 11

1 2 3 4 5
2 7
Timed-out contact Instantaneous contact
1 8
Operating
(–)
Operating voltage
(+) (+) voltage (–) 3) Voltage should not be applied to the various inputs (reset, start, and stop) of
the PM4H-A multi-range timer. These inputs should be input without voltage.

Part names
PM4H-S PM4H-A
Power indicator LED Output indicator LED Operation mode selector
Selectable from
Hand
Time indicator window 5 operation modes
Set dial ON : Power ON-delay
FL : Power flicker
Time unit indicator FO : Power ON-flicker
Operation mode indicator OS : Power One-shot
OC : Power One-cycle

Time range selector Operation mode selector

16 time settings selectable Selectable from 8 operation modes
(1 s to 500 h) ON : Pulse ON-delay
1s 5s 10s 50s FL : Pulse Flicker
1min 5min 10min 50min Instantaneous output area FO : Pulse ON-flicker
1h 5h 10h 50h When the hand is in this area, OF1 :: Differential ON/OFF-delay (1)
10h 50h 100h 500h instantaneous operation starts. SF : Signal OFF-delay
OS : Pulse One-shot
OF2 :: Differential ON/OFF-delay (2)
OC : Pulse One-cycle

PM4H-M
cator LED Operation mode selector
Selectable from
5 operation modes
ON :: Power ON-delay
FL : Power flicker
FO :: Power ON-flicker
mode indicator OS :: Power One-shot
OC :: Power One-cycle

mode selector
from 8 operation modes
e ON-delay
e Flicker
e ON-flicker
rential ON/OFF-delay (1)
al OFF-delay
e One-shot
rential ON/OFF-delay (2)
e One-cycle
 PM4H-A/s/M 41

Dimensions mm
Tolerance: ±0.5
• PM4H-
Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
6.0 6.0
48 12.0 62.5
48 12.0 66.5
14.5

Analog
Timers
41 dia.

41 dia.
48 44.5
48 44.5

• Panel mount dimensions (with mounting frame)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Rubber gasket Rubber gasket
ATC 18002 (attached) Panel ATC18002 Panel
Mounting frame
Mounting frame AT8-DA4
AT8-DA4 (attached) (Sold separately)

48 66 44.5
50

48 66

50

1 61.5 72.5 (8-pin)

48
48
78 (11-pin)

Rear terminal socket

AT78041 (8-pin: sold separately)
AT78051 (11-pin: sold separately)

• Surface mount dimensions • Panel cutout dimensions • Adjacent mounting

Pin type Standard cutout dimensions are shown below.
Use mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rubber
Din rail socket gasket (ATC18002). 45+0.6
0
AT8-DF8K
(8-pin: sold separately)
AT8-DF11K
(11-pin: sold separately)
45+0.6 Min. 80
0 A
Mounting rail 45+0.6
0
A = (48¥n–2.5)+0.6
0
AT8-DLA1

97.3 (8-pin) Note) 1. T he proper thickness of

Min. 80 mounting panel is between
104.0 (11-pin) 1 to 5mm.
2. Adjacent mount is less
water-resistant.
 42 PM4H-A/s/M

Operation mode
PM4H-A
⎞ LED lighting LED flickering ⎞
⎠T: Setting time t1, t2, ta, tb<T t1+t2=T⎠

Operation type Explanation Time chart

ON
If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3 should be
ON ON ON
shorted ahead of time. Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF
Turn the operation mode selector switch to the ON position.
Analog
Timers

ON
If pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input is Reset ②–⑦ OFF

turned on) with the power supply on, the output will go on after the set time ON
has elapsed. Stop ②–⑤ OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4) T t1 t2

ON are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. ON ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF

while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted

(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

ON
If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) should be
ON ON ON
shorted ahead of time. Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF OFF
Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FL position. ON
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input Reset ②–⑦ OFF

Pulse is turned on) with the power supply on, the limited time interval begins, and ON

Flicker the output goes on after the set time has elapsed. After the output has gone Stop ②–⑤ OFF

on, it goes off when the set time has elapsed, and this process is subse- T T ta t1 t2 tb
FL quently repeated. ON ON
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4) Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF

are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out.
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped OP. LED
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted POWER LED
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation
resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
ON
If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) should be
ON ON ON
shorted ahead of time. Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF OFF
Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FO position. ON
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input Reset ②–⑦ OFF

Pulse is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after the set ON

ON-flicker time has elapsed, it goes off. This process is subsequently repeated. Stop ②–⑤ OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4) T T ta t1 t2 T tb

FO are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF

while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted

(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

*Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

ON
Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF1 position. Power supply OFF
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input
ON ON
is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after the set Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF
time has elapsed, it goes off. ON
Also, when pins 2 to 6 are released (the start input goes off), the output Reset ②–⑦ OFF

Differential goes on, and after the set time has elapsed, it goes off. ON

ON/OFF-delay (1) If the status of pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) changes during Stop ②–⑤ OFF

the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to on), T t1 t2 ta tb
OF1 the time-limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change took ON ON ON
place. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4)

are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. OP. LED Restart

Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while POWER LED
the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted (the stop input
is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
ON
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the SF position. OFF
Power supply
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input
ON ON
is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and when pins Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF
2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are released (the start input is turned
ON
off), the time limit interval begins. After the set time has elapsed, the output Reset ②–⑦ OFF

Signal goes off. If start input is entered at any point during the time limit interval, ON

OFF-delay the time limit interval is reset. Stop ②–⑤ OFF

Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped T ta tb

SF while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted
ON
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation Time out (N.O. contact) OFF
resumes.
OP. LED

POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.
Keep 0.05s or more for start, stop, reset input time.
 PM4H-A/s/M 43

Operation type Explanation Time chart

ON
If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) should be ON ON
shorted ahead of time. Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF

Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OS position. ON

When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input Reset ②–⑦ OFF

Pulse is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on for the set time ON

One-shot limit interval. Stop ②–⑤ OFF

Analog
Timers
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4) T T t1 t2 ta

OS are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF

while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted

(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF2 position. ON
Power supply OFF
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start input
is turned on) with the power supply on, the time limit interval begins, and ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Start ②–⑥
after the set time interval has elapsed, the output goes on.
ON
Also, when pins 2 to 6 are released (the start input goes off), the time limit Reset ②–⑦ OFF
interval begins, and after it has elapsed, the output goes off.
Differential If the status of pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) changes during
ON
Stop ②–⑤ OFF
ON/OFF-delay (2) the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to on), T t1 t2 ta tb

OF2 the time limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change took
ON ON
place. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 4)
are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. OP. LED Restart
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while
POWER LED
the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted (the stop input
is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
ON
If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF

the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) should ON ON ON

be shorted ahead of time. Start ②–⑥ OFF OFF OFF

Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OC position. ON ON

Reset ②–⑦ OFF OFF
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins 2 and 3) are shorted (the start
Pulse input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on after the ON
Stop ②–⑤ OFF

One-cycle set time limit interval has elapsed. After it has gone on, it goes off after
one pulse (approximately 0.8 seconds). T t ta t1 t2 t tb

OC If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins 2 to ON

OFF
ON
OFF
4) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Time out (N.O. contact)

Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped

OP. LED
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins 2 to 5) are being shorted
POWER LED
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation
resumes. One pulse time (t): Approx. 0.8s
Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time. Keep 0.05s or more for start, stop, reset input time. ⎞ LED lighting LED flickering⎞
⎠T: Setting time ⎠
PM4H-S
Operation type Explanation Time chart
Time limit contact relay.
ON
When the power supply is turned on, the output goes on after the set Power supply OFF
time interval has elapsed. ON
T
When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF
Power ON-delay
OP. LED

POWER LED

*Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.

PM4H-M
Operation type Explanation Time chart
Power ON-delay Turn the operation mode selector switch to display the various opera- Power ON-delay
ON tions. ON
When the power supply is turned on, the time limit interval begins, Power supply OFF
Power Flicker
and operation is carried out. ON
FL When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out.
Time out (N.O. contact) OFF

Power ON-flicker T

FO Instantaneous contact (N.O. contact)

ON
OFF

Power One-shot
OP. LED
OS
POWER LED
Power One-cycle
OC *Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.

Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time. PM4H-M timers do not have each input which is start, reset and stop.
 44 PM4H-SD/SDM

PM4H-SD/SDM
DIN48 Size Analog
Star ( ) - Delta
Analog
Timers

( ) Timers

Features
›› Select four types of time ranges between 0.2 s and 100 s on ›› operation
There is a -∆ switching indicator so you can check the
a single unit. at a glance
›› Short body – 66.5mm (screw terminal type) ›› to use. power supply and shorter body make it easier
T
 he AC free
›› Select between five types of time ranges between 0.04 s
and 0.7 s for the -∆ switching times. ›› Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD, UL File No.:
E122222, CSA File No.: LR39291

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-SD/SDM
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 24V AC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common
Rated power consumption Approx. 6VA (100 to 240V AC), Approx. 1.4VA (24V AC)
Rating
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode -∆ star-delta switching (Power ON-delay)
operation control time range 2s to 100s, 4 time ranges switchable
-∆ switching time 0.04, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7s (5 time range selectable)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.5s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
1*, 2* Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C)
Star ( ) side: Timed-out 1 Form A, Delta (∆) side: Timed-out 1 Form A
Contact arrangement
Instantaneous: 1 Form A (Instantaneous for PM4H-SDM type only)
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 10 (at rated control capacity)
5

Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles *3
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles *3
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 500ms
Max. temperature rise 65°C
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 294m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition
Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 100g (Pin type), 110g (Screw terminal type)

Notes: 1* Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage, 20°C ambient
temperature, and 1s power off time.
2* For the 2s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.
3* Between contacts of different poles for PM4H-SDM type only.
 PM4H-SD/SDM 45

Time range
Time range
unit Operating (s) -∆ switching time (s)
Time range
2 0.2 to 2 0.04
10 1 to 10 0.1
0.3
20 2 to 20 0.5
100 10 to 100 0.7

Analog
Timers
Product types
Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC240VW
PM4H-SD Relay Timed-out 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC240VSW
Star ( )-Delta side: 1 Form A
(∆) switching ∆ side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC24VW
24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC24VSW
IP65
PM4H-SDM Relay Timed-out 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC240VW
Star ( )-Delta 100 to 240V AC
side: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC240VSW
(∆) switching
∆ side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC24VW
(Instantaneous 4 selectable ranges over 24V AC
Star ( )- Instantaneous: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC24VSW
contact) 2s to 100s
Delta (∆)
( -∆ switching time: 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC240V
switching 100 to 240V AC
PM4H-SD Relay Timed-out 0.04, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7s) Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC240VS
Star ( )-Delta side: 1 Form A
(∆) switching ∆ side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC24V
24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC24VS
IP50
PM4H-SDM Relay Timed-out 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC240V
Star ( )-Delta 100 to 240V AC
side: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC240VS
(∆) switching
∆ side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC24V
(Instantaneous 24V AC
contact) Instantaneous: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC24VS

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

Pin type Screw terminal type
• No instantaneous contact • With instantaneous contact • No instantaneous contact • With instantaneous contact

6 7 8 9 10
4 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 6 3 6 11 11
2 7 2 7 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 8 1 8
Operating voltage Operating voltage
Operating Operating
voltage voltage

side time-delay contact side time-delay contact

side time-delay contact side time-delay contact
Instantaneous contact Instantaneous contact
(PM4H-SDM type) (PM4H-SDM type)

Dimensions mm

6.0
48 12.0 66.5
14.5

48 41 dia. 44.5

Operation
Power
supply
Instantaneous
contact

side Contact
t1: operation time
( indicator LED lights)
side Contact t2: – switching time
t3: operation time
t1 t2 t3 ( indicator LED lights)
 46 PM4H-F

PM4H-F
DIN48 Size Analog Multi-Range Power
Off-Delay Timers
Analog
Timers

Features
›› Sofwitch operation times between three types of time ranges ›› Instantaneous reset available.
1 s to 10 s and 1 min to 10 min.
›› The shorter body makes it easier to use.
›› Short body – 62.5mm (screw terminal type) ›› Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD, UL File No.:
E122222, CSA File No.: LR39291

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-F8 PM4H-F8R PM4H-F11R
Rated operating voltage 100 to 120V AC, 200 to 240V AC, 24V AC, 12V DC, 24V DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 1.6VA (100 to 120V AC, 200 to 240V AC), Approx. 2.3VA (24V AC)
Rated power consumption
Rating Approx. 1.1W (12V DC, 24V DC)
Rated control capacity 3A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode Power OFF-delay Power OFF-delay (with reset)
Time range 1s to 10s: 3 range switchable 1 min to 10 min: 3 range selectable
Operation time fluctuation 0.3%
Time Setting error 5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy Voltage error 0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
1*, 2* Temperature error 2% (at 20C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50C)
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20C coil temp.), 90 to 110% (DC Type)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles *3
Between contacts of same pole
1,500Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
Electrical 1,500Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
function Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles *3
750Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
s range type: 100ms
Min. power supply width
min range type: 2s
Min. reset time 50ms
Max. temperature rise 55C
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1hr on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50C
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 100g (Pin type), 110g (Screw terminal type)

*Notes: 1* Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% rip-
ple factor for DC), 20°C ambient temperature.
2* For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms. When the power goes on, in rush current (0.3A) flows. Cautions should be taken.
The minimum power supplying time after forced reset input is 2s or more.
3* Between contacts of different pools for PM4H-F8, PM4H-F11R types only.
 PM4H-F 47

Time range
Time range
unit s range type min range type
Time range
1 0.04s to 1s 0.04 min to 1 min
5 0.2s to 5s 0.2 min to 5 min
10 0.4s to 10s 0.4 min to 10 min

Analog
Timers
Product types
Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC24VW
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC12VW
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC24VW
IP65
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC24VW
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC12VW
Power 24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC24VW
Relay Timed-out
PM4H-F8 OFF-delay
2 Form C 100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC120V
(without reset)
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC24V
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC24V
IP50
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC120V
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC24V
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC24V
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC24VW
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC12VW
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC24VW
IP65
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC24VW
over 1 min to 10 min
Power 12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC12VW
OFF-delay 24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC24VW
Relay Timed-out
PM4H-F8R (with
1 Form C 100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC120V
instantaneous
reset) 200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC24V
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC24V
IP50
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC120V
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC24V
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC24V
 48 PM4H-F

Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal

Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC120VW
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC120VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC240VW
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC24VW
IP65 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC24VSW
Analog
Timers

11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC12VW
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC12VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC24VW
24V DC
3 selectable time ranges Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC24VSW
over 1s to 10s 11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC120VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC240V
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC240VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC24V
IP50 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC24VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC12VS
Power 11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC24V
OFF-delay 24V DC
Relay Timed-out Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC24VS
PM4H-F11R (with
2 Form C 11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC120VW
instantaneous 100 to 120V AC
reset) Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC120VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC240VW
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC24VW
IP65 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC24VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC12VW
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC12VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC24VW
24V DC
3 selectable time ranges Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC24VSW
over 1 min to 10 min 11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC120VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC240V
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC240VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC24V
IP50 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC24VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC12VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC24V
24V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC24VS

Dimensions mm
Tolerance: ±0.5
• Screw terminal type (Flush mount) • Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount)

6.0 6.0
48 12.0 62.5 48 12.0 66.5
14.5
41 dia.
41 dia.

48 44.5 48 44.5
 PM4H-F 49

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• PM4H-F8 (without reset input) • PM4H-F8R (with reset input) • PM4H-F11R (with reset input)
Pin type Pin type Pin type
Time-out 2 Form C Time-out 1 Form C, with reset input Time-out 2 Form C, with reset input

N.C. N.C. N.C.

Reset input
N.O. N.O.
N.O.
4 5 4 5 N.C. N.C.
5 6 7
3 6 3 6 N.O. N.O.

Analog
Timers
Reset 4 8

2 7 input
2 7 3
2 10
9

1 8 1 8 1 11

Operating voltage Operating voltage Operating voltage

(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+)

Screw-tightening pin type Screw-tightening pin type

The PM4H-F11R should be used for the time- The PM4H-F11R should be used for the time- Screw terminal type
limit 2C. limit 1C and to connect reset input. Time-out 2 Form C, with reset input

N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

11

1 2 3 4 5

Reset input
Operating
(+) voltage (–)

PM4H-F (with reset) input conditions

1. Contact input (pin type example) 2. Non-contact input (pin type example)

PM4H-F8R PM4H-F11R PM4H-F11R

PM4H-F8R Photo-coupler
Reset input Use a contact with good contact reli- Reset input
ability for the input. Contact bounce Reset input Be sure to use a photo-
Reset input
can lead to erroneous operation of coupler for non-contact
the timer, so use a contact with short input.
bounce time. Make the resistance
between terminals for a short circuit Photo-coupler Check that Vce = 0.6V
less than 1k . Make the resistance Max. when ON.
between terminals for an open circuit
greater than 100k-ohms.

Operation
• PM4H-F8 (without reset input) • PM4H-F8R/F11R (with reset input)
Note: Note:
Tr Tr Ts Tr Ts

Power Power
supply supply
T
Time-delay Reset
contact N.O. input
T t

Time-delay Time-delay
contact N.C. contact N.O.

Time-delay
contact N.C.
 50 PM4H-W

PM4H-W
DIN48 Size Analog Multi-Range
Cyclic Twin Timers
Analog
Timers

Features
›› A single twin timer unit that repeats (variable) ON/OFF. ›› Ttoheuse.AC free power supply and shorter body make it easier
›› Short body – 62.5mm (screw terminal type)
›› Multiple ranges with a 0.1 s to 500 h time specification on a ›› Aconventional
new screw terminal type has been added to the
pin type.
single unit.
›› The output ON/OFF operation is indicated by red and green
LED’s. It’s easy to check the operation at a glance.
Wiring can be done easily with a screwdriver.
›› Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD, UL File No.:
E122222, CSA File No.: LR39291

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-W
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 48 to 125V DC, 12V DC, 24V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 10VA (100 to 240V AC)
Rated power consumption Approx. 2.5VA (24V AC)
Rating
Approx. 1.5W (12V DC, 24V DC, 48 to 125V DC)
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode Cyclic (OFF-start/Twin operation)
Time range 1s to 500h 16 time ranges switchable (T1, T2 time setting individually)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.3s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
1*, 2* Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C)
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 300ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 120g (Pin type), 130g (Screw terminal type)

Notes: 1* Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% rip-
ple factor for DC), 20°C ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2* For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.
 PM4H-W 51

Time range
All types of PM4H-W timer have multi-time range.
16 time ranges are selectable.
1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled.
Time unit
sec min hrs 10h
Scale
1 0.1s to 1s 0.1 min to 1 min 0.1h to 1h 1.0h to 10h

Analog
Timers
5 Control 0.5s to 5s 0.5 min to 5 min 0.5h to 5h 5h to 50h
10 time range 1.0s to 10s 1.0 min to 10 min 1.0h to 10h 10h to 100h
50 5s to 50s 5 min to 50 min 5h to 50h 50h to 500h

Product types
Operating Protective Rated Operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode structure voltage type
8 pins PM4HW-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HW-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-24VSW
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC12VW
Cyclic Relay 12V DC
PM4H-W 16 selectable ranges Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC12VSW
(OFF-start, Timed-out
Twin timer (1s to 500h) 8 pins PM4HW-H-AC240V
Twin) 2 Form C 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-AC240VS
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HW-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC12VS

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

Pin Type Screw terminal type
Cyclic timed-out relay contact: 2C

N.C. N.C.

N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

4 5
3 6 11

1 2 3 4 5
2 7
1 8
Operating
Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
(–) (+)

Dimensions mm
Tolerance: ±0.5
• Screw terminal type: M3.5 • Pin type
6.0 6.0
48 17.0 62.5 48 17.0 66.5
14.5
∆41
∆41

48 m44.5 48 m44.5

Operation
Power supply
T1 T2 T1
Time-delay contact
(N.O. contact)

: Output OFF indicator (green)

Time-delay contact : Output ON indicator (orange)
(N.C. contact)
T1: OFF set time
Output ON-OFF T2: ON set time
indicator
 52 PM4H series modes and time settings

1. Operation method
1) Operation mode setting 2) Time range setting 3) Time setting [common]
[PM4H-A type] [PM4H series common] To set the time, turn the set dial to a
8 operation modes are selectable with 16 time ranges are selectable between desired time within the range.
operation mode selector. 1s to 500h. Instantaneous output will be on when the
Turn the operation mode selector with Turn the time range selector with the dial is set to “0”.
screw driver. screw driver. When the instantaneous output is used,
Analog
Timers

Operation mode is shown up through the
window above the mode selector. The
marks are ON , FL , FO , OF1 , SF , OS , OF2 , OC .
Turn the mode selector to the mark until
you can check by clicking sound.
Confirm the mode selector position if it is
correct.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.
Clockwise turning increases the time
range, and Counter-clockwise turning
decrease the time range.
Confirm the range selector position if it is
correct.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.
the dial should be set under “0” range.
(Instantaneous output area)
When power supply is on, the time
range, setting time and operation mode
cannot be changed.
Turn off the power supply or a reset sig-
nal is applied to set the new operation
mode.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.

2. How to use “Set ring” [PM4H series common]

1) Fixed time setting 2) Time range setting
Set the desired time and put 2 set rings Example: Time range 20s to 30s.
together. ① Shorter time value setting ② Longer time value setting
Insert the rings into stopper to fix the Set the dial to 20s. Set the dial to 30s.
time. Place the stop ring at the right side of Place the stop ring at the left side of
Stopper Stopper boss stopper. stopper.
Set range

Shorter time value Longer time value

Stopper boss

Set ring (2 pcs) 20 Stop ring 30

ATC18001 (sold separately) Set dial

0 0
SEC SEC

Note) The stoppers for the lower limit setting set ring and the upper limit setting set ring face the opposite directions.

Applicable standard (PM4H series common)

Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)
 PM4H-W 53

1. Input connections (PM4H-A type) 3) Terminal ②-⑥ (screw terminal 2-3) 3) Connection of non-contact input (Pin
1) Be sure not to use terminal ⑩ as the should be connected as the start input. type example)
Connect terminals ②-⑦ (screw terminal (voltage input)
Fig. A Contact input
(or non-contact 2-4) for reset signal input. Connect ter-
5
6
7 input) minals ②-⑤ (screw terminal 2-5) for stop
1mA (The start input
No good signal input. Be sure not to connect with Internal circuit is turned on.)
2 10 with photoelectric 6
other terminals and apply excessive volt- sensor, etc. 5 7

Analog
Timers
Operating age. The internal circuit will be damaged. Q
voltage 2
4) The input wiring other than the power
[Example of
Fig. B supply circuit should avoid these condi- start input]
Contact input
6
(or non-contact tions, high-voltage wiring and parallel
5 7 input) wiring with power wire. Wire in short with Even if the open collector is not used,
Good using the shielding wire or metal wiring input is also possible from the non-con-
2 10
tube. tact circuit of 6 to 30V DC. In this case,
Operating
voltage
5) For start, reset and stop input, use the start input is turned on when the sig-
gold-plated contact with high reliability. nal is turned from H to L.
Since contact bouncing causes errors The residual voltage must be 0.6V or
common terminal of the input signal as in the start, use an input contact less less when Q is on. On the AC type, an
shown in Fig. A. Otherwise, the internal bounce time. insulated transformer is required as
circuit of the timer may be damaged. Use 6) Keep the minimum signal input time the power supply for the photoelectric
Fig. C over 0.05 s. sensor, etc. (power supply for the input
10
6
T
devices).
2. Input signal conditions Note: Keep the minimum input signal time of
No good 2
each signal to 0.05s or more.
6
5 7
Reset input
Start input
Stop input

3. Checking the contacts before use

Fig. D
6
T (PM4H-A type)
Good
terminal ② as the common terminal as
shown in Fig. B.
If the circuits is connected as in Fig. C,
the internal circuits must be broken. Be
sure to connect the circuit as in Fig. D.
2) When one input signal is simultane-
ously applied to more than one timer, be
sure to avoid the wiring shown in
Fig. E
Input
2 (PM4H-F only)
10
2 1) Connection of contact input (Pin type
example
Use gold-plated contacts with high-
reliability. The bounce time at the con-
tacts causes errors in the timer operation
time. Accordingly, use start input contact
whose bounce time is short. The resist-
ance when shorted should be less than
1kΩ, and when open resistance should
be more than 100kΩ.
For the screw terminal type, connect the
terminal 2 to the each input signal.
6 Instantaneous output will be on when the
Reset input
When the power ON time is less than
the minimum power application time,
the contacts may remain in an ON state,
so the state of the contacts should be
checked before use. When the contacts
are in an ON state, activating them once
will return them to their normal state (the
OFF state after time-out). (Be aware that
relay characteristics may result in the
contacts being in that same ON state
if exposed to excessive vibration and
impact during transport.)
4. Time setting
To set the time, turn the set dial to a
desired time within the range.

Start input

Stop input

terminal 5 7
2 10
Power dial is set to “0”.
supply
No good 2 When the instantaneous output is used,
Input
terminal the dial should be set under “0” range.
2 10

(Instantaneous output area)

Fig. F
2) Connection of non-contact input (Pin
Contact or type example) Note) When power supply is on, the time
non-contact input
(open-collector) range, setting time and operation mode can-
Input

2
terminal
10 Apply the open-collector connection. not be changed.
Power
supply The characteristics of the transistor used Turn off the power supply or a reset signal is
Good
Input must be VCEO=10V or more, IC=10mA or applied to set the new operation mode.
terminal
2 10
more, and ICBO=6µA or less. Additionally, If the position is not stable, the timer might
the input impedance must be 1kΩ or mis-operate.
less, and the residual voltage must be
Fig. E. Otherwise, the short-circuit cur- 0.6V or less.
rent will flow and cause damage. Be sure For the screw terminal type, connect the
to align the polarity of the power supply terminal 2 to the each input signal.
as shown in Fig. F.
 54 PM4H-W

5. Superimposed surge of power
supply (PM4H series common)
For the superimposed surge of power
supply, the standard waveform is taken
as the standard value for surge-proof
voltage.
If external surge occurs exceeding the
Analog
Timers
6. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN61812-1.
1) Overvoltage category III, pollution
level 2
2) This timer employs a power supply
5) You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not touch
the terminals or other parts of the timer
when it is powered. When installing or
un-installing, make sure that no voltage
is being applied to any of the terminals.
6) Do not use this timer as a safety cir-

specified value, the internal circuit may without a transformer, so the power and cuit. For example when using a timer in
break down. In this case, use a surge input signal terminals are not insulated. a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
absorption element. (PM4H-A only) circuit on the machine side.
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
Operation voltage Surge voltage input circuit, install double insulation on
100 to 240V AC the sensor side.
100 to 120V AC
4,000V (2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
200 to 240V AC
48 to 125V DC insulated relays, etc.
12V DC, 24V DC 3) The load connected to the output con-
500V
24V AC/DC
tact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic insula-
The positive and negative voltages are tion and can be double-insulated to meet
applied each five times between the EN/IEC requirements by using basic
power pins. insulation on the load.
The typical surge absorption elements 4) Please use a power supply that is
include a varistor, a capacitor, and a protected by an overcurrent protection
diode. If a surge absorption element is device which complies with the EN/IEC
used, use an oscilloscope to see whether standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
or not the foreign surge exceeding the
specified value appears.
 Installing DIN size timer 55

INSTALLING DIN SIZE TIMER

Installations
1. Surface mount
1) For the timers of PM4H and LT4H
series, use the pin type timer. With the
PM4S and QM4H series, only pin-type
timers are available.
2) How to mount the timer
From the panel front, pass the timer
through the square hole. Fit the mount-
ing frame from the rear, and then push it
in so that the clearance between the
mounting frame and the panel surface is
5) Correctly connect the pins while see-
ing the pin connection diagram.
Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
of 0.8 N·cm or less. The screws are
M3.5. (screw-tightened terminal type)
6) If the pin type is used, the rear termi-

Analog
Timers
minimized. In addition, lock the mount- nal block (ATC78041) or the 8P cap
ing frame with a screw. (AD8-RC) is necessary to connect the
• Screw terminal type pins. For the 11-pin type, use the rear
Panel cover terminal block (ATC78051) or the 11P
cap (AT8-DP11) and avoid directly sol-
Mounting frame
2) Put the terminal socket on the board dering the round pins on the timer.
directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. 1). Push in 7) Panel cutout dimensions
3) Insert the timer into the terminal sock- The standard panel
et and fix it with clip (Fig. 2) + 0.6
45
cutout dimensions are
0

4) On DIN rail mounting, mount the timer shown in the left figure.
on the DIN rail tightly to get the proper Screw (Panel thickness: 1 to 5
Rubber gasket 45+ 0.6

dimension (Fig. 3). 0

mm )
(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2) • Pin type
Panel Push in
8) Although the
80 mm
timers can be
+ 0.6
45 0
or more
mounted adjacent 45 + 0.6
0

to each other in
Terminal socket
this case, it is rec-
ommended to 80 mm

arrange the or more

Screw
mounting holes
3) Caution in mounting the timer as shown in the
(Fig. 3)
• PM4H, and LT4H series right figure to
a If the PM4H and the LT4H series are facilitate attaching
used as the waterproof types, tighten the and detaching the
DIN rail
reinforcing screws on the mounting mounting frame.
frames so that the timers, the rubber 9) Adjacent + 0.6
45
gaskets, and the panel surfaces are mounting
0

5) 8-pin type should be connected with tightly contacted with each other. Although the
terminal socket (AT8-DF8K). 11-pin type (Tighten the two screws with uniform timers can be A

should be connected with terminal sock- force and make sure that there is no rat- mounted adjacent to each other, remem-
et (AT8-DF11K). tling. If the screws are tightened too ber that the panel surface of PM4H or
6) DIN rail (AT8-DLA1) is also available excessively, the mounting frame may LT4H series timer will lose its water-
(1 m). come off.) resistant effect. (Panel thickness: 1 to 5
2. Flush mount b If the timer is installed with the panel mm )
1) For the timers of PM4H and LT4H cover and the rubber gasket removed, A = (48 × n – 2.5) +0.6
+0 (mm)
series, it is recommended to use the the waterproofing characteristic is lost. When lining up the
built-in screw terminal type for flush 4) Installation timers horizontally,
mount. (Mounting frame and rubber Loosen the screws on the mounting set the frames in
gasket are provided when timer is frame, spread the edge of frame and such a position so
shipped.) remove it. the formed spring
areas are at the Formed spring

top and bottom.

When lining up the
timers vertically,
set the frames in
Pull the mounting 1
such a position as
If the pin type is used, the mounting frame backward while the formed spring Formed spring
frame (AT8-DA4) and rubber gasket spreading out its hooks areas are at the
(ATC18002 for surface waterproofing) with your thumbs and right and left.
that are available at extra costs are nec- index fingers.
2
essary. If the pin connection socket is
the 8-pin type, use the 8P cap (AD8-
RC); or if it is the 11-pin type, use the
11P cap (AT8-DP11). 1

56
 56
x

Terminal sockets (Unit: mm, Tolerance: ±1)

Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• DIN rail socket (8-pin) 24

50 19
M3.5
PM4H-S 40 50
6 5 4 3
PM4H-M
PM4H-SD
2- φ 4.5
PM4H-F8 6 5 4 3 70
PM4H-F8R 2-M4
PM4H-W 7 8 1 2
screw holes
(or 4.2 0.1
Accessories

70 35.5 70
LT4H
Options &

dia. holes)
40 0.2
Timers

The minimum distance

13
LT4H-W between the holes which
areparallel drilled.
QM4H 7 8 1 2
Note: Terminal No.
(8-pin type) on the main body
are identifical to
those on the terminal
ATC180031 4 socket.

• DIN rail socket (11-pin)

50 30.5
40 M3.5
29.5 50
8 7 6 5
4
8 7 6 5

PM4H-A 2- φ 4.5
• 70
PM4H-F11R 4

LT4H 9 3
2-M4
screw holes
70 70 10 11 1 2
LT4H-W (or 4.2 0.1
dia. holes)
40 0.2
(11-pin type) 9 3
13 The minimum distance
between the holes which
areparallel drilled.

10 11 1 2
Note: Terminal No.
on the main body
are identifical to
4 those on the terminal
ATC180041 socket.

Note: The socket’s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals.

Sockets (Unit: mm, Tolerance: ±1)

Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
21
• Rear terminal socket M3.5
38 16 3 4 5 6

PM4H-S
PM4H-M 3 4 5 6 —
PM4H-SD 41
2 1 8 7
PM4H-F8 2 1 8 7
PM4H-F8R AT78041
PM4H-W • 8P cap
LT4H
φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30
LT4H-W
4 5
3

(8-pin type)
6

8
—
2

QM4H
7

1 8
8.6 26

AD8-RC φ 32.5
(34.6)
5 21
• Rear terminal socket M3.5
45 4 5 6 7 8
16

11
—
4 5 6 7 8

43.4 11

PM4H-A 3 2 1 10 9
3 2 1 10 9
PM4H-F11R AT78051
LT4H
LT4H-W • 11P cap
(11-pin type) φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30 6 5
7
4 3 2

9 8

—
8
10

1 11
26
8.6
φ 32.5
AT8-DP11 (34.6)

Note: The terminal socket’s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals.
 x
DIN size timers common options 57

• Rubber gasket • Mounting frame

mm

Applicable for PM4H series

and LT4H series
50.0

48 Applicable for PM4H series

1.0
LT4H series and QM4H
50.0
ATC18002 series
48
AT8-DA4 68
4
The rubber gasket is enclosed in the PM4H
(screw terminal type) and the LT4H series.

Accessories
26

Options &

Timers
1,000 1
•M
 ounting rails (Applicable for 5.5
• Fastening plate 50
12 M4
DIN and IEC standards) 2.75R

5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5
10

Oval hole, 40-5.5x15

35 24 27
AT8-DLA1 ATA4806 10

UP
1.5
ATA4806
Length: 1 m
aluminum 7.5 For holding DIN rails

• Protective cover for DIN 48 size: LT4H, QM4H series • Protective cover for DIN 48 size: QM4H series
Flexible type Hard type
17.2 50.6
11 50 .677 1.992
.433 1.969

50 50.6
1.969 1.992

AQM4803 AQM4801

Accessories
PM4H series
• Panel cover (Black) • Set ring
When you control the fixed time
PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M
range, the setting rings (a set of 2
POWER
PM4H-A
POWER
PM4H-S POWER
PM4H-M pcs.) make it easy to do the time
OP OP OP
setting and keep the time range all
the time. (Excluding PM4H-W)
S S S

N RAN N RAN N RAN

GE GE GE

MODE MODE

ATC18011 ATC18012 ATC18013

PM4H-W PM4H-SD PM4H-F

PM4H-W PM4H-SD PM4H-F
ATC18001
OFF POWER

ON

S S S

L L L
RANGE OFF RANGE S RANGE
-
RANGE RANGE

ATC18014 ATC18015 L
ATC18016

LT4H series
• Panel cover (Black)
LT4H LT4H-W

TIMER TIMER

RESET RESET
UP UP
LOCK SET/LOC
K

LT4H LT4H-W
DOW DOW
N N

ATL58011 ATL68011

The black panel cover is also available so that you can change the
appearance of the panel by changing the panel cover. The color of the
standard panel cover is ash gray.
 x
58 S1DXM-A/M/S1DX common options

S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS

Accessories Note: Accessories are the same as those for the S1DX timer.
mm
• Mounting frame
Appearance Panel cutout dimensions
25.1 + 0.2
5
25.2 0

30
31.5
+ 0.2
3 31.6 0
*Note
3

33.5
Accessories

ADX18002 (Titanium-gray)
Options &

Board thickness 1 to 3 mm
Timers

ADX18006 (Gray) 27.1 Note: Make sure the holes area stays
ADX18007 (Black) as right angles.

• Protective cover • Cap block • Cap • Socket

10.5
28.2
29.4
36
2

18.85
30.0
34.6
7.65

21.2
21.2

ADX18008 ADX18011 ADX18004 ADX18003

Terminal Socket
• HC2 slim DIN • HC2 DIN high • HC4 DIN high • HC4 socket • HJ2 terminal • HJ4 terminal
terminal socket terminal socket terminal socket socket socket

82.5 82.5 82.5 58.1 86.0 86.0

86.5 86.5 86.5 88.0 88.0

10

HC2-SFD-S HC2-SFD-K HC4-SFD-K HC4-SS-K HJ2-SFD/HJ2-SFD-S HJ4-SFD/HJ4-SFD-S

Socket Leaf Holding Clip Socket Line Holding

Clip for S1DXM-A/M
18012 AD68002 ADX28005
Figure Dimensions Figure Dimensions Figure Dimensions Dimensions
4.5
4.5

7.5

63.8 52.6
63.1
61.6

4.5
(2 pieces per set) (2 pieces per set) (2 pieces per set)

Type Application
Terminal socket ADX18001 ADX18012 AD68002 ADX28005
HC2-SFD-S — —
For HC relay HC2-SFD-K — Δ
HC4-SFD-K — Δ
HJ2-SFD — — —
HJ2-SFD-S — — —
For HJ relay
HJ4-SFD — Δ — —
HJ4-SFD-S — Δ — —
Note: The triangles indicate that removal will be slightly difficult when installed laterally in succession.

69
 x
S1DX timer options 59

HC relay terminal sockets

Applicable timers
Name/Part No. Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
 erminal socket, HC
T Screw hole: 2-M3.5
Oval hole: 2-4.2¥5
2-pin 6.2
Terminal screw M3 (or φ 4.20.1 hole)

12 17.5 1 5 9 13
12 20 12

40 40 Not
Available
available
5

Accessories
Options &

Timers
30 30
30 15 2
HC2-SF-K 4 8 12 14 Drilling size of panel holes for installing
For general rails

Note) Only wire springs can be used. the terminal sockets parallel
(Plate springs cannot be used.)
Oval hole: 2-4.2¥9
 igh terminal socket,
H Terminal screw M3
9.5

HC 1-, 2- and 4-pin 2 6 10 22.5 22.5

22.5 28.6
1 5 9 13

53.5 67

53.5 67
Screw Available Available
hole
size 30 30

9 16 8 Screw hole: 2-M3.5

6.2
HC4-HSF-K 4 8 12
(or φ 4.20.1 hole)
30 27.8
14 Drilling size of panel holes for installing
Note) Only wire springs can be used. 3 7 11 the terminal sockets parallel
(Plate springs cannot be used.)

 lim DIN terminal

S
socket, HC2
0.6
15

13.5 0.2
Terminal screw M3 4 1
20 0.6
9
8 5
0.2
0.2
15
15
0.2
4.1

1
67 Not
Available
6.3 0.2 57
Screw hole: 2-M3.5
available
0.5
35.4 0.5
6.4 0.2
67 1 57 (or φ 4.20.1 hole)
2 0.15
0.2
8

22 22
12 9
HC2-SFD-S 6.2 0.3
4.2 0.3 6 0.3 2
22 0.6 28.5 0.6
14 13

 IN high terminal
D
4 1
socket, HC2 26 0.6

Terminal screw M3
0.2
13.35 21 0.6

8 5
For DIN rails

4.1 0.2
10 Not
6.3 0.2
Available
6.4 0.2
67 1
available
2 0.15
4.2 0.3
26 26

HC2-SFD-K 12 9
6
30 0.6
67
14 13
33.5
 IN high terminal
D
26 0.6
4 3 2 1
socket, HC4 13.35 0.2
30 30
4.45 0.2
Terminal screw M3
21 0.6
8 7 6 5
4

Screw hole: 2-M3.5

(or φ 4.20.1 hole)

4.1 0.2
Drilling size of panel holes for installing
6.3 0.2
67 1
the terminal sockets parallel
Available Available
0.2
6.4
2 0.15
4.2 0.3

HC4-SFD-K
6
12 11 10 9
0.6
30
14 13

mm

59
 x
60 S1DXM-A/M/S1DX common options

HJ relay terminal sockets

Applicable timers
Name/Part No. Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
HJ2 terminal socket M3
30
16.5
2-M4.2¥5 terminal screw 4 1
mounting holes 3.4±0.3
4 1 8 5

8 5

72±1 Not
35.4 15±0.2 Available
59±1 available
Accessories
Options &
Timers

12 9

4 12 9
14 13
14 13
6±0.3
HJ2-SFD 22

59±0.3
 J2 terminal socket
H M3
30

(Finger protect type) 2-M4.2¥5 terminal screw 16.5 4 1

mounting holes 3.4±0.3
4 1 8 5

8 5

72±1 2-M3 or M4 Not

35.4
or 4.5 dia. hole Available
59±1 available
12 9

4 12 9
14 13
14 13
6±0.3
HJ2-SFD-S 22

HJ4 terminal socket M3

30

terminal screw 16.5

2-M4.2¥5
mounting holes 3.4±0.3 3 2 1
3 2 1
8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

72±1
35.4±0.5 22±0.2 Available Available
59±1

12 11 10 9

12 11 10 9
4 14 13
Lot No.
4 14 13
6±0.3
HJ4-SFD 29

59±0.3
 J4 terminal socket
H M3
30

(Finger protect type) 2-M4.2¥5 terminal screw 18

3.4±0.3 3 2 1
mounting holes
3 2 1
8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

72±1 2-M3 or M4
35.4
or 4.5 dia. hole
Available Available
59±1

12 11 10 9

4 12 11 10 9
4 14 13
Lot No.
4 14 13
6±0.3
HJ4-SFD-S 29

mm
 x
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX common options 61

Sockets
Applicable timers
Name/Order No. Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
Socket, HC 2-pin •T
 he difference between the HC2 and HC4 • The thickness of applicable chassis plates
sockets is only the number of the pins. Their ranges from 1.0 to 2.0 mm.
appearances and sizes are the same. • To install the socket easily, insert the socket
4.45 4.45 top surface into the drilled holes and press the
4.45 two points on the fastening plate indicated by
4.06
1 2 3 4
arrows as shown in the fig. below.
5 6 7 8
29.4 6.35
9 10 11 12
25.2 6.35 7.06 Not
Available

Accessories
13 14 1.27

Options &
available

Timers
25.5
2.3

HC2-SS-K 16.55
7.65

21.2

Socket, HC 4-pin
General tolerance: ±0.5
4.45 4.45

4.45
4.06

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
29.4 6.35
9 10 11 12
25.2 6.35 7.06 25.8
1.27
13 14
Available Available

25.5
2.3 21.6 5.9
HC4-SS-K 16.55
The interval size between
7.65 the sockets which are
parallel installed.
21.2
Dimensional tolerance of machining: ±0.1
Sockets for PC board
HC2 – Socket for PC board: AP3825K mm
HC4 – Socket for PC board: AP3845K

61
 x
62 Counters selector chart

Classification Classification Electronic counters Electronic counters

Name of product Name of LC2H Counter
product LC2H
LC2H Counter
Counter LC4H
LC2H Counter
Counter LC4H-S
LC4H Counter
Counter LC4H-W
LC4H-S Counter
Counter LC4H-W Counter
Type Type Total counter Preset
Total counter
counter Preset
Preset counter
counter Preset
Preset counter
counter Preset
Preset counter
counter Preset counter
UP, DOWN, and DIR UP, DOWN, and DIR
UP, DOWN, and DIR UP,
UP, DOWN,
DOWN, and
and DIR
DIR UP, DOWN, and DIR
Input mode/Input method Input mode/Input
UP typemethod UP,
UP DOWN
type type UP, DOWN typeElectronic (multi-mode) 2 modes (multi-mode) 2 modes
(multi-mode)/DIP switch counters
(multi-mode)/DIP
(multi-mode)/DIP switch
switch (multi-mode)/DIP
selectable/DIPswitch
switch selectable/DIP switch

Flush Flush Flush

mounting mounting mounting
type type type
Appearance Appearance Appearance
PC board PC board PC board
mounting mounting mounting
type type 4-digit 4-digit
6-digit 6-digit
4-digit
4-digit 4-digit
6-digit
6-digit 6-digit
4-digit 6-digit
type
display display display
display display
display display display
AEL3 AEL3
AEL3 AEL3
AEL3
AEL3
Name of product LC2H Counter
8.7 mm tall 8-digit display 8.7
8.7 mmmm talltall 8-digit
8-digit LC2H Counter
display
display 8.7Bright and8-digit
mm tall LC4H Counter
easy-to-read
display Bright
Bright and
and easy-to-read Bright
LC4H-S Counter
easy-to-read Bright and
and LC4H-W Bright
easy-to-read
easy-to-read Counterand easy-to-read
Type Bright 2-color back light Preset
Bright
Total counter function
2-color backequipped
light display
Preset
Preset counter function equipped display
display
Preset counter display
display
Preset counter display
Preset counter
in half size in Simple
half sizeoperation Simple
Simple operation
operation Simple
Simple operation
operation Simple operation
Input mode/Input Display has backlight for Display Short body
has backlight
UP, for
DOWN, Pre-scale
Short DIR function
and body UPBuilt-in
, DOWN, Upper
Pre-scale
and DIR and lowerUP
function
, DOWN, and DIR
limit
Built-in Upper and lower limit
UP type UP , DOWN type settings are (multi-mode) 2 modes
available.
method instant recognition Conforms
instant to IP66’s
recognition power
Conforms
(multi-mode)/DIP supply
switch for
to IP66’s powerswitch
(multi-mode)/DIP supply for settings are available.
Features Features selectable/DIP switch
weather resistant high-capacity
weather Conforms to IP66’s
sensor (100 high-capacity sensor (100 Conforms to IP66’s
resistant
standards
8.7 mm tall 8-digit display 8.7 mm tall 8-digit display Bright and easy-to-read to 240
standards V AC type) weather resistant
to 240 V AC type)
Bright and easy-to-read weather resistant
Bright and easy-to-read
Bright 2-color back light Preset function equipped display Conforms to IP66’s
display standards
Conforms to IP66’s
display standards
in half size Simple operation weather resistant
Simple operationweather resistant Simple operation
Information
Counters

standards Pre-scale function standards

General

Display has backlight for Short body Built-in Upper and lower limit
Flush mounting type: 24 Vmounting
Flush DC instant 24100
type: recognition V DCto 240 V Conforms
AC 100
to IP66’s
100 toto 240
240 VV AC supply100
power
AC 100
for toto 240
240 VV ACAC
settings are available.
100 to 240 V AC
Features Unnecessary (Built-in Unnecessary (Built-in 24 V AC, 12 to 24 V DC
weather 24 V AC, 12 to high-capacity
resistant 24 V DC sensorAC
24 V (100 Conforms to IP66’s 24 V AC
battery) battery) standards to 240 V AC 12
type) to 24 V DC weather resistant
12 to 24 V DC
Rated operating voltage Rated operating voltage
PC board mounting type: PC board mounting type: Conforms to IP66’s standards
3 V DC (Battery in 3 V DC (Battery in weather resistant
externally installed) externally installed) standards

8-digit
Flush mounting 8-digit
8-digit
type: 24 V DC 4-digit 6-digit
8-digit 4-digit 6-digit
4-digit
100 to 240 V AC 6-digit 6-digit6-digit
4-digit
100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC6-digit
Unnecessary (Built-in 24 V AC, 120 to 24 V DC 24 V AC 0
Number of digits Number of digits battery)
0 00 0 0 00 0 0
12 to 24 V DC
0
Rated operating voltage
(counter capacity) (counter capacity)
PC board mounting type:
3 V DC (Battery in
9 9 9 9 9externally
9 9 9 installed)
9 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 9 99 99 99 99 9 999 99 9 9 9 99 99 99 9 9 99 99 99 99 99 9 9 99 99 9 999 9
9 99 9 9 9 9 9 9
Zero-suppress8-digit
function Zero-suppress
Zero-suppress 8-digit
function
function 7-segment LCD
Zero-suppress 4-digit
function 6-digit
7-segment
7-segment LCD 4-digit 6-digit
LCD 7-segment
7-segment LCD6-digit
LCD 7-segment LCD
(LCD) (LCD)
(LCD) Counter value
(LCD) Counter
Counter value
value Counter
Counter value
value Counter value
Counter/Indication Counter/Indication
0 0 red LED) 0
(backlight (backlight
(backlight
0red LED) 0
red LED) (backlight
(backlight red
red LED)
LED)
0
(backlight red LED)
Number of digits
(counter capacity) Setting value Setting
Setting value
value Setting
Setting value
value Setting value
(backlight yellow LED) (backlight
(backlight yellow
yellow LED)
LED) (backlight
(backlight yellow
yellow LED)
LED) (backlight yellow LED)
9 9type:
Flush mounting 9 9 9 Flush
9 9mounting
9 9 type:
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9999 999999 9999 99999 9 9 9 9 9 9
2kHz/30Hz 2kHz/30Hz
(ChangeableZero-suppress
by a switch) 30Hz/5kHz
function
(Changeable byZero-suppress
a switch) 30Hz/5kHz
function 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD
Counting speed Counting speed
PC board mounting type: 30Hz/5kHz 30Hz/5kHz
30Hz/5kHz 30Hz/5kHz
30Hz/5kHz
Counter value 30Hz/5kHz
(LCD) switchable
PC board (LCD)type:
mounting Counter value
switchable Counter value
Counter/Indication 2kHz/30Hz 2kHz/30Hz (backlight red LED) (backlight red LED) (backlight red LED)
(Different type) (Different type) Setting value Setting value Setting value
Counting (signal) input andCountingCounting (signal)
(signal) input
input and (backlight
2-input (multi-mode)
andCounting (signal) input andyellow
and LED)
2-input
2-input (backlight
(multi-mode)
(multi-mode) and
and yellow LED)
2-input
2-input (backlight
(multi-mode)
(multi-mode) and
and yellow LED)
2-input (multi-mode) and
reset input reset
reset
Flush mounting input
input
type: reset
reset input
input reset
reset input
input reset
reset input
input reset input
• Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting
Input Input 2kHz/30Hz• Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting • Input by short-circuiting
or opening contacts
(Changeable by oraor opening
opening
switch) contacts
contacts 30Hz/5kHz oror opening
opening contacts.
contacts oror opening
opening contacts.
contacts. oror opening
opening contacts.
contacts. or opening contacts.
Counting speed • Open collector PCinput • Open
• Open
board mounting collector
collector
type: input
input • Open
• Open collector
collector 30Hz/5kHz
input
input • Open
• Open collector
collector input30Hz/5kHz
input • Open
• Open collector
collector input30Hz/5kHz
input • Open collector input
• Voltage input
switchable
2kHz/30Hz• Voltage input
• Front reset button (Different
and • Front
•type)
Manualresetreset
buttonwith and • Manual
and • Manual reset
reset with
with • Manual
and • Manual
and reset
reset withwithand • Manual
and • Manual reset
reset with
with and • Manual reset with and
and
Reset external reset
Reset input (signal)
Counting external
external
input and terminal
reset input and (signal)
Counting external
external terminal
terminal
input and 2-input and
and external
external
(multi-mode) terminal
andterminal
2-input and
and external
external
(multi-mode) terminal
2-input
andterminal and
and external
(multi-mode) andterminal and
(Reset input terminal
(Reset input reset input front reset key
terminal reset input front
front reset
reset key
keyreset input front
front reset
reset key
keyreset input front
front reset
reset key
keyreset input front reset key
• External reset
specifications conform to specifications dip by
conform
• Input • Manualreset
• External
to short-circuiting reset• dip
Input • Manual
typesby short-circuiting
• Manual reset
reset •types
Input • Manual
typesby short-circuiting
• Manual reset
reset •types
Input • Manual
typesby short-circuiting
• Manual reset
reset typesby short-circuiting
•types
Input • Manual reset types
Inputinput)
those of counting terminal inside one-short inside
output contacts one-short inside
output contacts. one-short inside
output contacts. one-short output contacts.
oroutput
opening inside one-short output
those of countingorinput) terminal
opening contacts or opening inside one-short oroutput
opening inside one-short oroutput
opening inside one-short
• Open collector inputmodels • Open collector models
models
input • Open collector models
models
input • Open collector models
models
input • Open collector models
input
• Voltage input • Counter number setting • Counter • Operation mode
number • Operation
setting • Operation
setting mode
mode setting • Output mode
setting • Operation modesetting
setting • Output mode setting
• Front reset button withandkey switches
• Manual reset with with
with dipswitches
key
and switches
• Manual reset with with
with dip
anddip switches
• Manual reset with
switches with
with dip
anddip switches
• Manual reset with
switches with dip
andswitches
Preset Preset — — • Counter number setting
Reset (Reset input external reset input • Counter
external terminal and number setting
external • Counter
• Counter
terminal number
and number setting
setting
external • Counter
terminal and number external
setting • Counter
terminal and number setting
specifications conform terminal front reset key with key switches
front reset key with
with keykey switches
switches front reset key with
with keykey switches
switches front reset keywith key switches
to those of counting • External reset dip • Manual reset types • Manual reset types • Manual reset types • Manual reset types
Control outputinput) Control output— terminal — inside one-short output inside one-short output inside one-short output inside one-short output
models or
models oror models orormodels or
• Counter number setting • Operation mode setting
External • Operation
power supply 12 V DC 100mode
Externalsetting —• Output
power supply mode setting
12 V DC 100 —
Power supply output Power supply —
output —— with key switches —— with dip switches — only)
mA max. (AC type mA max. (AC type only)with dip switches
with dip switches
Preset —
• Counter number setting
• Counter number setting • Counter number setting
Options Flush mounting type (No Flush
Options Mounting frame,
mounting rubber
type (No 11 P plug-in
Mounting frame, rubber 1111PP plug-in
plug-in 1111PP plug-in
plug-in 11 P plug-in
with key switches
with key switches with key switches(terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket)
gasket
need for easy installation need for easy installation gasket (terminal
(terminal block, socket) (terminal block,
block, socket) (terminal
socket) block, socket)
type) type) 8 P plug-in 8 P plug-in
Control outputMounting frame, rubber —Mounting frame, rubber (terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket) or
or or
gasket gasket
External power supply 12 V DC 100 —
Power supply output — — — mA max. (AC type only)
Available standards UL/C-UL
Available standards UL/C-UL
UL/C-UL UL/C-UL
UL/C-UL UL/C-UL
UL/C-UL UL/C-UL
UL/C-UL UL/C-UL
Options Flush mounting type (NoP. P. Mounting frame, rubber P. P. 11 pin plug-in
11 P plug-in 11 pin
11 plug-in
P plug-in 11
11 pin plug-in
P plug-in
Page Page P. 72 7279 7986 P.P.8692 P.P.92
100 P. 100
need for easy installation gasket (terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket)
type) 8 pin
8 plug-in
P plug-in
Mounting frame, rubber (terminal block, socket)
gasket

Available standards UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL

Contact Contact Open

output output collector
(1 Form C) (1 Form A) output
62
 x
Counter-related terminology 63

Types of counters 7. Over count 4. Remote reset

Counting continues beyond a preset A signal is sent from a remote point to
1. Electro preset counter number. the reset terminal so as to reset the
The counter is equipped with semi- counter.
conductor counting circuitry. When the 8. Recount
counter counts up to a preset number, its When counting is up, the counter display 5. Automatic reset
output circuit sends a signal. resets to zero and counting restarts. When counting is up, internal circuitry
is activated to automatically reset the
2. Electro magnetic counter 9. Down count counter.
A magnet is magnetized and demagnet- Numbers are counted down one by one
ized to drive the dial and count up num- from a preset number. 6. Reset signal width
bers. This is the time during which the power
10. Up count is off so as to reset the counter or during
Rating Numbers are counted up one by one which an external (manual) reset signal
from zero. is sent.
1. Rated operating voltage
The voltage is applied to start the coun- 11. Up/down count 7. Reset time

Information
Counters
General
ter. Numbers are counted up or down This is the time from the moment a reset
depending on input conditions. signal is sent to the instant the counter is
Countings ready to start counting again.
12. Rejection (gate) input
1. Pulse This signal is used to keep the counter
This is a voltage or current signal sent at from counting.
Others
intermittent time intervals. 1. Function of memorizing condition
Counting data up until the operating
2. Count Outputs voltage is turned off can be stored in
Pulses are used to count up and down. 1. Count up memory. When the power is reactivated,
When a preset number is reached, the the data can be reproduced.
3. Miss-count output circuit sends a signal.
This happens if the number of pulses 2. Anti-surge
does not correspond to the number of 2. Retained output The strength against power voltage
counts. The output is held until a reset signal is surge is determined by applying a single-
sent. pole full-wave voltage (several hun-
4. Hertz dred to several thousand volt wave for
This unit of counting speed is used to 3. One Shot output ±(1.2x50) µs) acrosss the control power
give the number of counts per one This output has a specified width of time. terminals.
second. Surge waveform
[Single-pole full-wave voltage for ±(1.2x50)
5. Make ratio Resettings µs]
This is the ratio of ON time (Ta) to OFF 1. Reset 100
90
time (Tb). The counting process, display and output
Surge voltage (%)

sections are all brought back to the initial Peak value

Ta Tb status. 50

30
Time
2. Power off reset
The operating voltage is turned off to 0
0 1.2 50
reset the counter. Time ( s)
6. Maximum counting speed
Suppose that the counter is operated 3. Manual reset 3. Noise immunity
with an input pulse of a make ratio of 1. The counter is manually reset. This is the strength against external
The highest counting speed is the peak noise. Relay noise tests, noise simulator
of a range in which the output circuit can tests, etc. are conducted.
send signals without mis-counting. The
speed is expressed in units of Hz
(cps: counts per a second).
 x
64 Precautions in using the counter

Cautions for circuits

1. Protective circuit for counter contact
In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting
from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point.

CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Diode circuit Varistor circuit

Counter
Counter contacts
contact Counter
Countercontacts
contact Counter contacts
Counter contact Counter
Countercontacts
contact

Inductive load

Inductive load

Inductive load
Inductive load
Circuit r
r c Diode ZNRvaristor
c

AC (see note.) Available Not available Available

Application
DC Available Available Available Available
If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel Using the rated voltage charac-
Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply voltage is causes the energy stored in the coil teristics of the varistor, this circuit
24 or 48 V and the voltage across the load is 100 to 200 V. to flow to the coil in the form of cur- prevents excessively high voltages
rent and dissipates it as joule heat from being applied across the
If the load is a timer, leakage current at the resistance component of the contacts. This circuit also slightly
Features/Others flows through the CR circuit causing inductive load. delays the release time.
Information
Counters
General

faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release

—
Note: If used with AC voltage, be sure time compared to the CR circuit.
the impedance of the load is sufficiently (2 to 5 times the release time listed in
smaller than that of the CR circuit. the catalog)
As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse break-
c: 0.5 to 1 µF per 1 A contact current down voltage at least 10 times the
r: 0.5 to 1 W per 1 V contact voltage circuit voltage and a forward cur-
Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in counter char- rent at least as large as the load
Device Selection acteristics. current. —
Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the
acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. circuit voltages reverse breakdown
Use a capacitor with a breakdown voltage of 200 to 300 V. Use AC type capacitors voltage of about 2 to 3 times the
(non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply voltage.

2. Type of load and inrush current Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor 4. Long continuous current flow
The type of load and its inrush cur- and other input devices so that short- Avoid keeping the counter on for a
rent characteristics, together with the circuiting can be prevented. long period of time (over one month).
switching frequency, are important Do not use a single coil transformer (e.g., Otherwise heat is generated and accu-
factors which cause contact welding. Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal circuit mulated inside the counter, which may
Particularly for loads with inrush currents, of the counter will be short-circuited as deteriorate its electronic parts. If the
measure the steady state current and shown in Fig. B resulting in breakdown. counter must be kept on for a long period
inrush current and use a relay or magnet of time, a relay is added. See the circuit
switch which provides an ample margin diagram below.
of safety. The table below shows the (Fig. A) Good
relationship between typical loads and R C R R
Insurating transformer
their inrush currents. (+) Input equipment
(sensor, etc.)
(–) Receive output
Type of load Inrush current R Relay C Counter from contact
at relay R
Resistive load Steady state current
Solenoid load 10 to 20 times the steady state current (–)

Motor load 5 to 10 times the steady state current Counter

Incandescent lamp load 10 to 15 times the steady state current 5. Leakage current
Mercury lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current 1) For connecting operating voltage to
Sodium vapor lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current the counter, a circuit should be used,
(Fig. B) No good
Capacitive load 20 to 40 times the steady state current
AC power supply
which will prevent the flow of leakage
Transformer load 5 to 15 times the steady state current current. For example, a circuit for con-
Insurating transformer

When you want large load and long life

(+) Input equipment tact protection as shown in Fig A. will
(sensor, etc.)

of the counter, do not control the load

(–)
permit leakage current flow through R
direct with a counter. When the counter and C, causing erroneous operation of
is designed to use a relay or a magnet
(–)
the counter. Instead, the circuit shown in
switch, you can acquire the longer life of
Counter
Fig. B should be used.
the counter.
(Fig. A) (Fig. B)
AC power supply
3. Connection of input Single coil transformer Leakage current
R
(Except for LC4H-S/AC type) (+) Input equipment Operating
voltage R C C
Operating
voltage C
(sensor, etc.)
The LC4H series use power supply (–) Counter C Counter

without a transformer (power and input

terminals are not insulated). In connect- (–)
AC power
ing various kinds of input signals, there- Counter routing

fore, use a power transformer in which 2) If the counter is directly switched with
the primary side is separated from the a non-contact element, leak current may
ungrounded secondary side as shown in flow into the counter and cause it to mal-
function.

Cautions for use
(common for all models)
1. Terminal connections
Correctly connect the pins while seeing
the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In
particular, the DC type, which has polari-
ties, does not operate with the polarities
connected reverse. Any incorrect con-
nection can cause abnormal heating or
ignition.
2. Connection to operating voltage
1)Apply the entire supply voltage through
a switch, relay or other contact.
2) The operating voltage for the DC type
must be at the specified ripple percent-
age or less. The average voltage must
fall within the allowable operating voltage
range.
Rectification type Ripple percentage
Single-phase, full-wave Approx. 48%
Three-phase, full-wave Approx. 4%
Three-phase, half-wave Approx. 17%
3) Make sure that no induced voltage
and residual voltage are applied between
the power terminals on the counter after
the power switch is turned OFF.
(If the power line is wired in parallel with
the high-voltage and motor lines, induced
voltage may be produced between the
power pins.)
3. Control output
1) Keep the load capacity below the
counter‘s rated control capacity. If used
above the rating, the counter‘s service
life may shorten. With the transistor
output type counters, transistors may be
damaged.
4. Installing the counter
1) To install the counter, use the dedi-
cated pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid
connecting the pins on the counter by
directly soldering them.
2) In order to maintain the characteris-
tics, do not remove the counter cover
(case).
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE COUNTER
5. Superimposed surge of power
supply
For the superimposed surge of power
supply, the standard waveform
(±1.2x50µs or ±1x40µs) is taken as the
standard value for surge-proof voltage.
(The positive and negative voltages are
applied each three or five times between
the power pins.)
For the standard values for the LC4H
type counters, see the respective items
in „Cautions for use.“
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2x50) µs]
100
90
Surge voltage (%)
Peak value
50
30
0
0 1.2
Time ( s)
If external surge occurs exceeding the
specified value, the internal circuit may
break down. In this case, use a surge
absorption element. The typical surge
absorption elements include a varis-
tor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
absorption element is used, use an oscil-
loscope to see whether or not the foreign
surge exceeding the specified value
appears.
6. Signal input
The counter‘s signal input comes in two
ways. One is by opening and closing the
input terminal. The other is by applying a
specified H-level or L-level voltage to the
input terminal.
For an input sensor‘s residual voltage,
input impedance, input voltage level and
other signal input conditions, see the rat-
ings for each type of product.
7. Operating environment
1) For the ambient operating temperature
and humidity, see the ratings for each
type of product.
2) Avoid using the counter in a location
where inflammable or corrosive gas is
generated, the counter is exposed to
much dust and other foreign matter; water
or oil is splashed on the counter; or vibra-
tions or shocks are given to the counter.
x
65
3) The counter cover (case), the knobs,
and the dials are made of polycarbonat-
ed resin. Therefore, prevent the counter
from being exposed to organic solvents
such as methyl alcohol, benzine, and
thinner, strong acid substances such as
caustic soda, and ammonia and avoid
using the counter in atmosphere contain-
ing any of those substances.
4) If the counter is used where noises
are emitted frequently, separate the input
signal elements (such as a sensor), the
wiring for the input signal line, and the
counter as far as possible from the noise
source and the high power line contain-
ing noises.
Information
Counters
General
Input line
Sensor,
etc.
Counter As remote as possible
50
Power line, etc.
8. Checking the actual load
In order to increase the reliability in the
actual use, check the quality of the coun-
ter in the actual usage.
9. Others
1) If the counter is used exceeding the
ratings (operating voltage and control
capacity), the contact life, or any other
specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or
ignition may occur.
2) The LC2H series counter, incorpo-
rates a lithium battery.
Never disassemble the lithium battery or
throw it into fire because this may affect
humans and facilities. The lithium bat-
tery must be disposed of as an incom-
bustible like other used batteries.
3) If any malfunction of the counter is
likely to affect human life and properties,
give allowance to the rated values and
performance values. In addition, take
appropriate safety measures such as a
duplex circuit from the viewpoint of pro-
duct liabilities.
 66 LC4H

Pin type
LC4H
DIN 48 SIZE LCD ELECTRONIC
COUNTER
Screw terminal type

Features
›› Bright and Easy-to-Read Display
A brand new bright 2-color backlight
LCD display. The easy-to-read screen
in any location makes checking and
setting procedures a cinch.
Counters
›› Conforms to IP66’s Weather Re- ›› Changeable Panel Cover
Also offers a black panel cover to
sistant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out meet your design considerations.
water and dirt for reliable operation ›› 4-digit or 6-digit display
Two sizes of displays are offered for
even in poor environments.

›› Stype)
hort Body of only 64.5 mm (screw ›› Screw terminal and Pin Type are you to choose the one that suits your
needs.
or 70.1 mm (pin type)
With a short body, it easily installs in
Both Standard Options
The two terminal types are standard ›› Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE,
UL File No.: E122222, C-UL File No.:
even narrow control panels. options to support either front panel
›› SSeesaw
imple Operation
buttons make operating the
installation or embedded installa-
tion.
E122222

unit even easier than before.

Product types
Digit Count speed Output mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LC4H8-R4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-R4-AC24V
24 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R4-AC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-R4-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-R4-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-DC24VS
4 8 pins LC4H8-T4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-T4-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-T4-AC24V
Transistor 11 pins LC4H-T4-AC24V
24 V AC
(1a) Screw terminal LC4H-T4-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-T4-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-T4-DC24V
30 Hz (cps)/ Screw terminal LC4H-T4-DC24VS
5 KHz (Kcps) Available 8 pins LC4H8-R6-AC240V
switchable 11 pins LC4H-R6-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-R6-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-R6-AC24V
Relay 11 pins LC4H-R6-AC24V
24 V AC
(1c) Screw terminal LC4H-R6-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-R6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-R6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-R6-DC24VS
6 8 pins LC4H8-T6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T6-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-T6-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-T6-AC24V
Transistor 11 pins LC4H-T6-AC24V
24 V AC
(1a) Screw terminal LC4H-T6-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-T6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-T6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-T6-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.
 LC4H 67

Part names
DIP switches
• 4-digit display type
COUNTER
Counter display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
Controlled output indicator
Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK

Down keys
Lock switch LC4H DOWN

(Same for screw terminal type)

DIP switches
• 6-digit display type

COUNTER
Counter display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
Controlled output indicator
Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK

Counters
Lock switch LC4H
(Same for screw terminal type)

Specifications
Relay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC type AC type DC type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA 30 V DC
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE)
Input mode
5 modes selectable by DIP switch
Max. counting speed 30 Hz/5 kHz (selectable by DIP switch)
Counting input (Input 1, 2) Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz, ON time: OFF time = 1:1
Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switch)
Rating
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms
Contact or Open collector input/Input impedance: 1 k or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 k or more, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output mode HOLD-A/HOLD-B/HOLD-C/SHOT-A/SHOT-B/SHOT-C/SHOT-D (7 modes selectable by DIP switch)
One shot output time Approx. 1 s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
4-digit display type –999 to 9999 (–3 digits to +4 digits) (0 to 9999 for setting)
Digit
6-digit display type –99999 to 999999 (–5 digits to 6 digits) (0 to 999999 for setting)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)
Contact arrangement 1 Form C 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Initial contact resistance 100 m (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) 2x107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 ope. (At rated control voltage) 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
7

Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage

Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (11-pin type)
Break down voltage Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (11-pin type)
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between input and output: 2,000 V AC for 1 min
Between open contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 M (11-pin type)
Insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 M (11-pin type)
Between input and output: Min. 100 M
(At 500 V DC) (Initial value) Between input and output: Min. 100 M
Between open contact: Min. 100 M
Temperature rise Max. 65° C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)
 68 LC4H

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4
 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 1 0 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 1
 0 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±1.0
• 4-digit display type
Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
70.1
Counters

5.5 5.5
48 64.5 55.6

COUNTER

OP.
48 RST 44.5 44.5
LOCK

RESET UP

LOCK

LC4H DOWN
7.5 7.5

• 6-digit display type

Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
70.1
5.5 5.5
48 64.5 55.6

COUNTER

OP.
48 RST 44.5 44.5
LOCK

RESET

LOCK

LC4H
7.5 7.5
 LC4H 69

• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type

Rubber gasket Panel Rubber gasket Panel
Mounting frame Mounting frame 8-pin type
ATC18002 (supplied) ATC18002 (supplied) (8p cap AD8-RC
for flush mount for flush mount
AT8-DA4 sold separately)
AT8-DA4 (supplied)
(supplied) 11-pin type
COUNTER COUNTER (11p cap AT8-DP11
sold separately)

OP. OP.
48 RST 50 44.5 48 RST

66
LOCK LOCK 50
UP
66
RESET RESET

LOCK LOCK

LC4H DOWN LC4H

1 1
48 63.5 48 90

• Dimensions for front panel installations
DIN rail terminal block
8-pin type: AT8-DF8K
(sold separately)
11-pin type: AT8-DF11K
(sold separately)
• Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
rubber gasket (ATC18002).
80 min.
45-0.6
0

45-0.6
0

Device installation rail

Counters
AT8-DLA1 45-0.6
0

(sold separately) A
80 min.
–0.6
95.5 A = (48 × n – 2.5) 0

( ) Dimensions for 8-pin type. Note 1: The installation panel thickness should be between
1 and 5 mm.
Note 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• 8-pin type • 11-pin type • Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
2 2
1 NC 1 1 1
1 1 NO 2 2
2 5 6 7 NO 2
4 5 4 5 5 6 7 NO
3 6 3 6 4 8 4 8
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
3 9 3 9 NC
2 7 2 7 2 10 2 10
1 8 1 8 1 11 1 11

O O O O 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

O O

Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 90.
 70 LC4H

Setting the operation mode and set value

Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode)
Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
DIP switches
Table 1: Setting the output mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Output mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON SHOT-A
2 Output mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF SHOT-B
3 ON OFF OFF SHOT-C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20 ms 1 ms OFF ON OFF SHOT-D
5 Maximum counter speed 30 Hz 5 kHz ON ON OFF HOLD-A
6 OFF OFF ON HOLD-B
7 Input mode Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON
8 OFF ON ON — (See note 1)

Table 2: Setting the input mode

DIP switches (See note 2)
DIP switch No.
6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON ON Addition input
ON

OFF OFF OFF Subtraction input

ON OFF OFF Directive input
OFF ON OFF Independent input
Counters

ON ON OFF Phase input

(Same for 6-digit and screw terminal types) OFF OFF ON — (See note 1)
ON OFF ON (See note 1)
OFF ON ON — (See note 1)
Notes:1) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Notes:3) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Notes:4) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value
Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter.
Front display section
• 4-digit display type 7 DOWN keys
1 Counter display COUNTER Changes the corresponding digit of
1
2 Set value display the set value in the subtraction direc-
3
3 Controlled output indicator 2 tion (downwards).
OP.
4 Reset indicator 4 RST 8 RESET switch
LOCK

5 Lock indicator
6 UP keys
Changes the corresponding
digit of the set value in the
addition direction (upwards).
• 6-digit display type
1 Counter display
2 Set value display
3 Controlled output indicator
4 Reset indicator
5 Lock indicator
• Changing the set value
1. It is possible to change the set value
with the up and down keys (4-digit type
only) even during counting. However, be
aware of the following points.
1) If the set value is changed to less than
the count value with counting set to the
addition direction, counting will continue
until it reaches full scale (9999 with the
4-digit type and 999999 with the 6-digit
type), returns to zero, and then reaches
the new set value. If the set value is
changed to a value above the count
value, counting will continue until the
count value reaches the new set value.
5
Resets the counting value and the
UP 6
RESET output.
8 7
9
LOCK 9 LOCK switch
LC4H DOWN Locks the operation of all keys on
the counter.
COUNTER
6 UP keys
1 Changes the corresponding digit of
3 the set value in the addition direction
2
4
OP. (upwards).
RST
LOCK 7 RESET switch
5 6 Resets the counting value and the
RESET
7
LOCK
output.
8 8 LOCK switch
LC4H Locks the operation of all keys on
the counter.
2) Suppose that the counter is preset 2) Down-count (subtraction) input when
to count down. Whether a preset count- counting is set to the subtraction direc-
down value is smaller or larger than the tion, counting will continue until full scale
count value, the counter counts down to is reached (-999 with the 4-digit type and
“0(Zero)”. -99999 with the 6-digit type), and then
2. If the set value is changed to “0,” the the display will change to  with
unit will not complete count-up. It starts the 4-digit type and  with the
counting up when the counting value 6-digit type. The counting value does not
comes to “0 (Zero)” again. become “0” and so the counter does not
1) Up-count (addition) input when count- count up.
ing is set to the addition direction, count- 3) For directive, independent, and phase
ing will continue until full scale is reached input, when the counting value increases
(9999 with the 4-digit type and 999999 or decreases from the value „0“ and then
with the 6-digit type), return to zero, and returns back to the value „0,“ count-up is
then complete count-up. completed.
 LC4H 71

Operation modes
1. Input mode: For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes
 UP
DOWN
DIR
IND
PHASE

Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block
(gate) for the other input.
H
IN1 L
A A A A
Blocked
Addition H
IN2 L
UP

Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count-up completed

Counters
H Blocked Blocked
IN1 L
A A A A

H
IN2 L
Subtraction
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN Counting (addition)

n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0
Counting (subtraction)
Reset Count-up completed

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H H
IN1 L
level. A A A A
Addition Subtraction Addition
H
Directive IN2 L
DIR
 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
IN1 H
L

H
IN2 L
Independent
Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
IND
 Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances IN1 H

L
beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
H
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. IN2 L
B B
Phase advance Phase retard

Phase Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset
PHASE

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

 72 LC4H

2. Output mode
For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven
modes
SHOT-A
HOLD-A
SHOT-B
HOLD-B
SHOT-C
HOLD-C
SHOT-D

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
count-up completion and until reset-
ting. During that time, the count display 3 2 1 0
Counting (subtraction)
Maintain output does not change from that at count-up
Hold count completion. Counting able/unable Able Unable

HOLD-A ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until resetting.
However, counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Maintain output completion of count-up.
Counters

Over count I Counting able/unable Able

HOLD-B ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until the next
Maintain output signal enters. However, counting is Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count II possible despite completion of count-
up. Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-C
 ON
Output control OFF OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion for a fixed time
One shot (approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2

Over count despite completion of count-up.

Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-A
 ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
count-up completion for a fixed time
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is pos- Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2
One shot
sible despite completion of count-up. Reset (automatic)
Recount I However, reset occurs simultaneous
Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-B
 with completion of count-up. While
ON
output is being maintained, restarting of OFF OFF
Output control
the count is not possible. Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
count-up completion for a fixed time
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is pos- Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1
One shot
Recount II sible despite completion of count-up. Reset (automatic)
However, reset occurs simultaneous Counting able/unable
Able
SHOT-C
 with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
count-up completion for a fixed time
(approx. 1 sec). During that time, the Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1
One shot
Hold count count display does not change from Reset (automatic)
that at count-up completion. Reset Counting able/unable
Able Unable Able
SHOT-D
 occurs simultaneous with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
 LC4H-S 73

11 Pin type LC4H-S

DIN 48 SIZE
Screw terminal type
LCD ELECTRONIC COUNTER

Features ›› Built-in power supply for high- ›› Conforms to IP66’s Weather Resis-

›› Bright and Easy-to-Read Display

A brand new bright 2-color backlight
capacitance sensor
An internal power supply drives a
tant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out wa-
12 VDC, 100 mA high-capacitance ter and dirt for reliable operation even
LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in poor environments.
sensor.
in any location makes checking and
setting procedures a cinch.
(AC power supply types only) ›› 4-digit or 6-digit display

›› Easy to use, simple operation,

Photoelectric switches, proximity
switches and encoders can be
Two sizes of displays are offered for
you to choose the one that suits your

Counters
simple settings needs.
›› Operation
directly connected.
modes (input/output
modes) can be set easily, using DIP
›› Dual-path AC sensor can be ›› Screw terminal and Pin Type are
Both Standard Options
connected.

›› Values can be set easily, using key ›› Basic insulation between the po-
switches on the side panel. The two terminal types are standard
options to support either front panel
switches on the front panel.
wer supply and the input terminal
installation or embedded installation.
›› Pre-scaling function provided
A pre-scaling function enables
(only for the sensor type model
with power supply) ›› CULompliant with UL, c-UL and CE,
File No.: E122222 C-UL File No.:
There is no need for caution when
conversion of lengths and volumes to E122222
connecting between terminals.
any desired values, and displays the
results.

PRODUCT TYPES
Product types
Digit Count speed Output Operation voltage Power down Additional function Terminal P/N
insurane
Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-PS-R4-AC240V
100-240 V AC Scale Factor Screw LC4H-PS-R4-AC240VS
with 12V DC power supply Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-PSV-R4-AC240V
Relay Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-PSV-R4-AC240VS
Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-S-R4-24V
4 Scale Factor Screw LC4H-S-R4-24VS
Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-SV-R4-24V
12-24 V DC / 24 V AC Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-SV-R4-24VS
Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-S-T4-24V
Transistor Scale Factor Screw LC4H-S-T4-24VS
30 Hz (cps) Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-SV-T4-24V
5 kHz (kcps) Available Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-SV-T4-24VS
switchable Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-PS-R6-AC240V
100-240 V AC Scale Factor Screw LC4H-PS-R6-AC240VS
with 12V DC power supply Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-PSV-R6-AC240V
Relay Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-PSV-R6-AC240VS
Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-S-R6-24V
Scale Factor Screw LC4H-S-R6-24VS
6 Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-SV-R6-24V
12-24 V DC / 24 V AC Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-SV-R6-24VS
Scale Factor 11 Pin LC4H-S-T6-24V
Transistor Scale Factor Screw LC4H-S-T6-24VS
Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input 11 Pin LC4H-SV-T6-24V
Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LC4H-SV-T6-24VS
 74 LC4H-S

Part names
• 4-digit display type DIP switches

COUNTER
Counter display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
Controlled output indicator
Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch SET/ LOCK
Down keys
Set/lock switch LC4H DOWN

(Same for screw terminal type)

• 6-digit display type DIP switches

COUNTER
Counter display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON
Controlled output indicator
Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch
Counters

SET/ LOCK

Set/lock switch LC4H

(Same for screw terminal type)

Specifications
Relay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC/AC type DC/AC type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V 12 to 24 V DC/24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC/24 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC

Input mode
Max. counting speed 30 Hz, 5 kHz (selectable by DIP switches)
Counting input (input 1, input 2) 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz ON time: OFF time = 1:1
Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switches)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms
Contact, Open collector input/DC two-wire system sensor Input impedance: 1 k or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Rating Open impedance: 100 k or less, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output mode HOLD-A, HOLD-B, HOLD-C, SHOT-A, SHOT-B, SHOT-C, SHOT-D, 7 modes selectable by DIP switches
One shot output time 1 s, 0.5s, 0.2s, 0.1s, 0.05, 0.01s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
4-digit display type –999 to 9999 (0 to 9999 for setting)
Digit
6-digit display type –99999 to 999999 (0 to 999999 for setting)
Decimal point Can be set to three digits
Pre-scaling 0.001 to 9.999 (4-digit type), 0.001 to 99.999 (6-digit type)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)
Power for senser 12 V DC (±10%) 100 mA Max. —
Contact arrangement 1 Form C 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Initial contact resistance 100 m (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) 2x107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts)
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Operating voltage range 85 to 264 V AC 10.8 to 26.4 V DC, 20.4 to 26.4 V AC
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (pin type)
Initial withstand voltage
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Initial insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 M (pin type)
(At 500 V DC) Between input and output: Min. 100 M
Temperature rise Max. 65° C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C
Operating
Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions
Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Connection 11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)
 LC4H-S 75

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2 / Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 EN55011 Group1 ClassA

Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage
(EMS)EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
Static discharge immunity 8 kV air
EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
RF electromagnetic field immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
EMC EFT/B immunity 1 kV (signal line)
EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity 100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm General tolerance: ±1.0

Pin type (Flush mount/Surface mount) Screw terminal type: M3.5 (Flush mount)
5.5 70.1 14.5 5.5
48
55.6 64.5

Counters
COUNT ER

OP. (44.5)
48 (44.5)
s

RESET UP

SET/LOCK

LC 4 H DOWN

7.5
73* 81.9*
87.5*
* With power supply for sensor * With power supply for sensor

(* 6-digit display type has the same dimensions.)

• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Rubber gasket Mounting frame Rubber gasket Mounting frame
Panel for flush mount ATC18002 (supplied) Panel for flush mount
ATC18002 (supplied)
AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied)

11 pin type
COUNTER COUNTER 11 pins cap:
ATA4861 (sold separately)

OP. OP.
(44.5
48

RST RST
50

66

50

66
48

LOCK LOCK

RESET UP RESET

SET/LOCK SET/LOCK

LC4H DOWN LC4H

1
48 63.5 48 1 90
80.9 104.5
* With power supply for sensor * With power supply for sensor

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
rubber gasket (ATC18002).
DIN rail terminal block Min. 80
45-0.6

11-pin type: AT8-DF11K

(sold separately) 45-0.6
45-0.6

A
Device installation rail When n units are attached in a continuous series,
ATA48011
Min. 80

the dimension of (A) is:

(sold separately) –0.6
A = (48 ¥ n – 2.5) 0
Note 1: T
 he installation panel thickness should be between
95.5 (112.9) 1 and 5 mm.
Note 2: F
 or connected installations, the waterproofing ability
* With power supply for sensor
between the unit and installation panel is lost.
 76 LC4H-S

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• Pin type * With power supply for sensor

Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset Reset Reset
Input 1 NC Input 1 Input 1 NC Input 1
Input 2 5 6 7 NO Input 2 5 6 7
Input 2 5 6 7 NO Input 2 5 6 7
Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8
3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9
2 10 2 10 0V 2 10 0V 2 10
1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11
DC 12V DC 12V
– Operating + – Operating + 100mA Max. ~Operating~ 100mA Max. ~Operating~
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ voltage voltage

• Screw terminal type * With power supply for sensor

Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 Input 2
Lock NO Lock Lock NO Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
NC NC
0V 11 0V 11
DC 12V DC 12V
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 100mA Max. 1 2 3 4 5 100mA Max. 1 2 3 4 5

+ Operating – + Operating – ~Operating~ ~Operating ~

~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ voltage voltage
Counters

Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 90.
 LC4H-S 77

Setting the operation mode and counter

Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode)
Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
DIP switches
Table 1: Setting the output mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Output mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON SHOT-A
2 Output mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF SHOT-B
3 ON OFF SHOT-C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20 ms 1 ms OFF ON OFF SHOT-D
5 Maximum counter setting 30 Hz 5 kHz ON ON OFF HOLD-A
6 OFF OFF ON HOLD-B
7 Input mode Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON HOLD-C
8 OFF ON ON — (See note 1)

Table 2: Setting the input mode

DIP switches (See note 2) DIP switch No.
Input mode
6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

ON ON ON Addition input
OFF OFF OFF Subtraction input
ON OFF OFF Directive input
OFF ON Independent input

Counters
ON ON OFF Phase input
(Same for 6-digit, screw-down terminal type) OFF OFF ON — (See note 1)
ON OFF ON — (See note 1)
OFF ON ON — (See note 1)
Notes:1) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Notes:3) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Notes:4) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.

Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value

Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter.
Front display section
• 4-digit display type 7D
 OWN keys
1 Counter display C Changes the corresponding digit of the set
2 Set value display value in the subtraction direction (down-
3 Controlled output indicator wards)
4 Reset indicator 4
L C
8R
 ESET switch
5 Lock indicator Resets the counting value and the output
6 UP keys 9S
 ET/LOCK switch
L C
Changes the corresponding This is used to handle pre-scaling values,
LC4H
digit of the set value in the one-shot times, decimal point position set-
addition direction (upwards) tings, and key lock operations (to disable Up
key, Down key, and Reset key operations).

• 6-digit display type 6U

 P keys
1 Counter display C Changes the corresponding digit of the set
2 Set value display value in the addition direction (upwards)
3 Controlled output indicator 7R
 ESET switch
4 Reset indicator 4 Resets the counting value and the output
L C

5 Lock indicator 8S
 ET/LOCK switch
L C
This is used to handle pre-scaling values,
one-shot times, decimal point position set-
LC4H
tings, and key lock operations (to disable Up
key, Down key, and Reset key operations).

Setting procedure 3) Setting the input mode

The input mode is set using the key switch in the [Display] section on the front of the counter.
• Decimal point position setting mode
1 Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the second digit to access the decimal point position setting mode.
Example 6-digit type
Decimal point position setting mode display
(Example shows default value displayed)

2 When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.
 78 LC4H-S

3 The decimal point is set using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to specify the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th digits (this applies only to 4-digit
models).(The 1st digit is set using the [UP] key or [DOWN] key in settings where there is no decimal point (this applies only
to 4-digit models).)

Example 6-digit type

Example shows 2nd digit displayed using [UP] key

4 Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed decimal point position and return to normal operation.
• Setting the pre-scaling value
1 Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the first digit to access the pre-scaling value setting mode.
Example) 4-digit type Example) 6-digit type
Pre-scaling value setting mode displayed
(Example shows default values displayed)

2 When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.
3 Use the [UP] or [DOWN] key to set the pre-scaling value (this applies only to 4-digit models).
Select either: 0.001 to 9.999 (4-digit) or 0.001 to 99.999 (6-digit)
Counters

4 Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed pre-scaling value and return to normal operation.
• Setting the one-shot output time
1 Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the third digit to access the one-shot output time setting mode.
Example 6-digit type
One-shot output time setting mode displayed
(Example shows default value displayed)

2 When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.
3 Each time the 1st-digit [UP] key is pressed, the one-shot output time changes in the following sequence, moving to the
right:
→ 1 s → 0.5 s → 0.2 s → 0.1 s → 0.05 s → 0.01 s

(With a 4-digit type, the [DOWN] key can also be used to move to the left.)
4 Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed one-shot output time and return to normal operation.

Changing the set value

1. It is possible to change the set value
with the up and down keys
(4-digit type only) even during count-
ing. However, be aware of the following
points.
1) If the set value is changed to less than
the count value with counting set to the
addition direction, counting will continue
until it reaches full scale (9999 with the
4-digit type and 999999 with the 6-digit
type), returns to zero, and then reaches
the new set value. If the set value is
changed to a value above the count
value, counting will continue until the
count value reaches the new set value.
2) Suppose that thew counter is preset
to count down. Whether a preset count-
down value is smaller or larger than the
count value, the counter counts down to
“0 (zero)”.
2. If the set value is changed to “0,” the
unit will not complete count-up. It starts
counting up when the counting value
comes to “0 (zero)” again.
1) Up-count (addition) input
When counting is set to the addition direc-
tion, counting will continue until full scale
is reached (9999 with the 4-digit type and
999999 with the 6-digit type), return to
zero, and then complete count-up.
2) Down-count (subtraction) input
When counting is set to the subtraction
direction, counting will continue until full
scale is reached (-999 with the 4-digit
type and -99999 with the 6-digit type),
and then the display will change to 
with the 4-digit type and  with the
6-digit type.
The counting value does not become
“0 (zero)” and so the counter does not
count up.
3) Directive, independent, and phase
inputs.
The counting value is counted up or
down to any number other than “0” once.
When it comes to “0 (zero)” again, the
counter starts counting up.

Cautions for use

For more information regarding the cautions for use of LC4H series counter, refer to page 89 “PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H
SERIES”.
 LC4H-S 79

Operation mode
1. Input mode
For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes
UP

DOWN

DIR

IND

PHASE

Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block
(gate) for the other input.
H
IN1 L
A A A A
Blocked
Addition H
IN2 L
UP

Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count-up completed

Counters
H Blocked Blocked
IN1 L
A A A A

H
IN2 L
Subtraction
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN Counting (addition)

n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0
Counting (subtraction)
Reset Count-up completed

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H H
IN1 L
level. A A A A
Addition Subtraction Addition
H
Directive IN2 L
DIR
 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
IN1 H
L

H
IN2 L
Independent
Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
IND
 Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances

beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. IN1 H
L
H
Phase IN2 L
B B
Phase advance Phase retard

PHASE Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

 80 LC4H-S

2. Output mode
For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven
modes
SHOT-A
HOLD-A
SHOT-B
HOLD-B
SHOT-C
HOLD-C
SHOT-D

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
count-up completion and until reset-
Maintain output ting. During that time, the count display 3 2 1 0
Counting (subtraction)
Hold count does not change from that at count-up
completion. Counting able/unable Able Unable
HOLD-A
ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until resetting.
Maintain output However, counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count I completion of count-up.
Counting able/unable Able
Counters

HOLD-B
 ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until the next
Maintain output signal enters. However, counting is Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count II possible despite completion of count-
up. Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-C
 ON
Output control OFF OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion for one shot output
One shot time. Counting is possible despite com- Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2

Over count pletion of count-up.

Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-A
 ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
count-up completion for one shot out-
put time. Counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2
One shot
completion of count-up. However, reset Reset (automatic)
Recount I occurs simultaneous with completion of
Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-B
 count-up. While output is being main-
ON
tained, restarting of the count is not OFF OFF
Output control
possible Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
count-up completion for one shot out-
put time. Counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1
One shot
Recount II completion of count-up. However, reset Reset (automatic)
occurs simultaneous with output OFF. Counting able/unable
Able
SHOT-C
 ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
count-up completion for one shot output
time. During that time, the count display Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1
One shot
Hold count does not change from that at count-up Reset (automatic)
completion. Reset occurs simultaneous Counting able/unable
Able Unable Able
SHOT-D
 with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
 LC4H-S 81

Input connections
• Signal input type

1) Open collector 2) For voltage output

(PC, sensor etc.) (Photoelectric sensor,

+ 12 V DC proximity sensor, etc.) + 12 V DC

Output Output

0V 0V
– –

11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 1 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 1

Screw-down Screw-down
terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11 terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11
0V Lock Input Input Reset 12 V DC 0V Lock Input Input Reset 12 V DC
input 2 1 input output input 2 1 input output

3) Contact input 4) For a rotary encoder

Relay, switches etc. 12 V DC
A
phase
B

Counters
0V phase

11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
Screw-down
terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11-pin type 3 5 6 1
0V Lock Input Input Reset
Screw-down
input 2 1 input
terminal type 6 8 9 11
0V Input Input 12 V DC
2 1 output

* There is no 12 V DC with 12 - 24 V DC/24 V AC types.

5) For a dual-line sensor What is the prescale function?

The prescale function converts the count into an actual value
+
(amount) and displays it.
Example
0V
For a device that outputs 500 pulses when 1 m has been fed:
–
1. Set decimal position to the last 3rd place.
11-pin type 3 5 6 7 2. Set the prescale value to 0.002 (1/500).
Screw-down
terminal type 6 8 9 10 1m

0V Input Input Reset

2 1 input

CO UNT E R

1 pulse RESET UP

SET/LOCK
Can be set to
L C4H DOWN
easy-to-understand
unit.

Prescale value: 0.002

Encoder CO UNT E R

500 pulses RESET UP

* If a dual-line sensor is connected to a 12 - 24 VDC/24 VAC SET/LOCK

L C4H DOWN

type, 24 VDC (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) and 24 VAC (21.6 to 26.4 VAC)
should be applied to the power supply voltage of the counter.
 82 LC4H-W

11-pin type LC4H-W

DIN 48 SIZE
LCD ELECTRONIC COUNTER
Screw terminal type

Features
›› Two-stage presetting (upper and
lower limits)
LCD display. The easy-to-read screen
in any location makes checking and
options to support either front panel
installation or embedded installation.
setting procedures a cinch. ›› Changeable Panel Cover
›› Simple
SET2
Count

Operation Also offers a black panel cover to

SET1
Seesaw buttons make operating the meet your design considerations.
›› Compliant
Counters

unit even easier than before. with UL, c-UL and CE,
Output 1

Output 2
›› Conforms to IP66’s Weather Resis-
tant Standards
UL File No.: E122222, C-UL File No.:
E122222
›› Short Body of only 64.5 mm (screw The water-proof panel keeps out wa-
type) or 70.1 mm (pin type) ter and dirt for reliable operation even
With a short body, it easily installs in in poor environments.
even narrow control panels. ›› SBoth
crew terminal and Pin Type are
›› Bright and Easy-to-Read Display
A brand new bright 2-color backlight
Standard Options
The two terminal types are standard

Product types
Output mode Operating Power down
Digit Count speed Output Terminal type Part number
Output 1 Output 2 voltage insurance
11 pins LC4H-W-R6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC
Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-AC240VS

Relay 11 pins LC4H-W-R6-AC24V

24V AC
(1a+1a) Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-AC24VS
11 pins LC4H-W-R6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC
30 Hz (cps)/ Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-DC24VS
6 5 KHz (Kcps) Available
switchable 11 pins LC4H-W-T6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC
Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-AC240VS

Transistor 11 pins LC4H-W-T6-AC24V

24V AC
(1a+1a) Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-AC24VS
11 pins LC4H-W-T6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC
Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

Part names
Setting value 1/2 selector Counter display  : Used to set the corresponding digits for the count-up mode.
COUNTER

Controlled output indicator Set value display : Used to reset counting and its output.

OP 1

Lock indicator 1 2 2
Up keys
LOCK
SET/LOCK key : Used to select between the Setting 1 display
Reset switch
RESET
and Setting 2 display and to lock the keys
SET/LOCK
(UP and RESET keys not responsive to
LC4H-W
Set/lock switch touch). Used also to set and confirm the
Sixth digit First digit
input mode.
 LC4H-W 83

Specifications
Relay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC type AC type DC type
100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC
Rated operating voltage 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
24 V AC 24 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 3 A, 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC
Input mode Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE) (5 modes selectable by DIP switch)
Counting speed 30 Hz(cps)/5 KHz(cps) (selectable by DIP switch)
Counting input (Input 1, 2) Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz(cps)/0.1 ms at 5 KHz(cps) ON time: OFF time = 1:1

Rating Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switch)
Contact or Open collector input/Input impedance: 1 k or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 k or more, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output 1. HOLD-B, C, D SHOT-A (4 modes)
Output mode Output 2. HOLD-A, B, C SHOT-A, B, C, D (8 modes)
(selectable by DIP switch)
One shot output time Approx. 1 s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
Digit –99999 to 999999 (–5 digits to 6 digits) (0 to 999999 for setting)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)

Counters
Contact arrangement 1 Form A + 1 Form A 1 Form A + 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Intial value) 100 m (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2x107 ope. —
Life
Electrical (contact) Min. 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
5 Min. 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Allowable operating
85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage
voltage range
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (pin type)
Break down voltage Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between input and output: 2,000 V AC for 1 min
Between open contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 M (pin type)
Insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 M (pin type)
Between input and output: Min. 100 M
(At 500 V DC) (Initial value) Between input and output: Min. 100 M
Between open contact: Min. 100 M
Max. 65°C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)

Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)

resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10°C to 55°C
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less 20 % or less
Connection 11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)
 48 5.5 64.5

COUNTER

84 LC4H-W OP. 1
1 2 2 44.5
LOCK

RESET

SET/LOCK

LC4H-W

Dimensions 7.5

mm
• LC4H-W electrical counter General tolerance: ±1.0
Pin type
Screw terminal type (embedded Pin typeinstallation/
panel
Screw-down terminal type front panel installation) mount)
(Flush mount):
(embedded M3.5
installation) (Flush mount/Surface
Screw-down terminal type 70.1

48 5.5 64.5 5.5 Panel 55.6 Mounting frame

Rubber gasket
for flush mount
ATC18002 (supplied)
AT8-DA4 (supplied)
COUNTER
COUNTER

OP. 1 OP. 1
1 2 2 66 44.5 44.5
1 2 2 48 LOCK
44.5 50
LOCK
RESET

RESET SET/LOCK

SET/LOCK LC4H-W

LC4H-W
7.5 7.5
48 1
63.5

• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)

Pin type Pin type
type
Screw terminal
Screw-down type type
terminal Pin
(embedded panel installation/
Rubber gasket
Panel front panel
Mounting frame installation) Rubber gasket
Panel Mounting frame
for flush mount for flush mount
ATC18002 (supplied) ATC18002 (supplied)
AT8-DA4 (supplied) 70.1 AT8-DA4 (supplied)
11P cap
Counters

5.5 55.6
COUNTER AT8-DP11
COUNTER sold separately

OP. 1
OP. 1
1 2 2 66 44.5 48 1 2 2
50 66
48 LOCK 50 LOCK

RESET
RESET
SET/LOCK
SET/LOCK 44.5
LC4H-W LC4H-W

48 1 1
63.5 48 90

• Dimensions for front panel installations 7.5

• Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
Pin type
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
DIN rail terminal Panel
block below.
Mounting Use
framethe mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
Rubber gasket
AT8-DF11K (sold separately) for flush mount 45 0
+0.6
ATC18002 (supplied) rubber
AT8-DA4 gasket (ATC18002).
(supplied) 80 min.
1.772 0
+.024

11P cap +0.6

45 0
COUNTER AT8-DP11
sold separately
A
Device installation rail
+0.6
45 0
OP. 1 AT8-DLA1 (sold separately) When n units are attached in a continuous
48 1 2 2
50 66 series, the dimension of (A) is:
LOCK
A = (48 × n – 2.5)
+0.6
0
RESET 80 min.
SET/LOCK Note 1): T
 he installation panel thickness should be between
95.5 1 and 5 mm.
3.760 LC4H-W
Note 2): F
 or connected installations, the waterproofing ability
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

48 90

• Pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2
5 6 7 NO 5 6 7
NO
4 8 4 8
3 9 3 9
2 10 2 10
1 11 1 11
– Operating + – Operating +
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2
NO NO
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

+ Operating – + Operating –
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~

Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 90.
 LC4H-W 85

Setting the operation mode and counter

Setting procedure 1) Setting the output mode (output 1, 2)
Set the output 1 and output 2 with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
The minimum input signal width and maximum counting speed for the reset are set at the same time.
DIP switches Table 1
DIP swith No. Output mode
Item OFF ON (Output 1)
1 2 3
1
ON ON ON (See note 1)
2 Output mode Refer to table 1
OFF OFF OFF HOLD–B
3 Output 1
ON OFF OFF HOLD–C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20ms 1ms
OFF ON OFF HOLD–D
5 Maximum counter setting 30Hz 5kHz
ON ON OFF SHOT–A
6
OFF OFF ON (See note 1)
7 Output mode Refer to table 2
ON OFF ON (See note 1)
8 Output 2
OFF ON ON (See note 1)
Table 2
DIP switches (see note 2)
DIP swith No. Output mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 7 8 (Output 2)
ON

ON ON ON HOLD–A
OFF OFF OFF HOLD–B
ON OFF OFF HOLD–C
OFF ON OFF HOLD–D
ON ON OFF SHOT–A
OFF OFF ON SHOT–B
ON OFF ON SHOT–C

Counters
(Same for screw terminal type)
OFF ON ON SHOT–D
Notes:1) T
 he counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) S
 et the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value Notes:3) W
 hen the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Set the set value with the UP keys on the front of the counter. Notes:4) T
 he DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.


1 Counter display COUNTER 6 UP keys
2 Set value display 1 [Changes the corresponding digit of
4
3 Controlled output the set value in the addition direction
indicator 2 (upwards)]
OP.
4 Setting 1/2 selection dis- 1 2 2
1
7 RESET switch
play (*Note) 3 LOCK Resets the counting value and the
5 Lock indicator 5 6
output
*Note: RESET 8 SET/LOCK switch
Pressing the [SET/LOCK] key switches 7 Used to select between the Setting
the display between the set value 1 and SET/LOCK
2 displays. 8 1 display and Setting 2 display, to
Display either set value [1] or [2], and LC4H-W set and confirm the input mode, and
set the value.
to lock the keys (UP and RESET
Sixth digit First digit keys not responsive to touch).
Procedure 3) Setting the input mode
Set the input mode using the key and switch in the front display section on the counter front.
(1) Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the first digit. The setting mode is accessed. Example)
(2) Now release the SET/LOCK key. Input mode displayed
(3) Press the UP key for the first digit and the input position changes counterclockwise. (UP: addition mode)

Addition subtraction Directive Independent Phase difference

(4) Press the RESET key and the input mode being displayed is set. The display then goes back to normal.
• Checking the input mode
Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key
for the second digit. The input mode is displayed for
about 2 seconds and then the display goes back to
normal. (During these 2 seconds, all operations other
than the display are being performed.)
• Locking the keys
Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key
for the sixth digit. The keys will lock. This means that
the UP and RESET keys do not respond to touch. To
unlock the keys,hold down the SET/LOCK key and
press the UP key for the sixth digit again.
* The input mode, maximum counting speed and minimum
reset signal width cannot be preset independently for Setting
1 and Setting 2.
• Selecting the Setting 1 or Setting 2 dis-
play
Press the SET/LOCK key and the display changes
between Setting 1 and Setting 2. (This operation
does not affect overall operation.)
• Changing the setting
1. While the counter is working, the UP key can
be used to change the setting. Keep the follow-
ing points in mind, however.
1) Suppose that a preset count-up value is smaller
than the displayed count value. The counter counts
up to the full scale mark (999999), goes back to „0“,
and counts up again to the preset number. When the
preset count-up value is larger than the displayed
count value, the counter counts up to the preset
value.
2) Suppose that the counter is preset to count down.
Whether a preset count-down value is smaller or
larger than the count value, the counter counts down
to „0“.
2. When the preset value is „0“, the counter does
not start in the count-up mode. It starts counting
up when the count value comes to „0“ again.
1) Up-count input
The counter counts up to the full scale mark
(999999), goes back to „0“ and starts counting up
again.
2) Down-count input
The counter counts down to the full scale mark
(–99999) and the display reads .
The count value does not become „0“ and so the
counter does not count up.
3) Direction input, individual input, and phase input
The preset value is counted up or down to any num-
ber other than „0“ once. When it comes to „0“ again,
the counter starts counting up.
 86 LC4H-W

Operation modes
1. Input mode
1) For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five
modes. IND
UP PHASE

DOWN 2) After the counter has been reset, setting 2 is displayed in

DIR the count-down mode. „0“ appears instead in all other modes.
Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block
(gate) for the other input.
H
I N 1 L
A A A A

Blocked
Addition I N 2 H
L
UP

Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count UP
Counters

H Blocked Blocked
I N 1 L
A A A A

I N 2 H
Subtraction L
Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0
Reset Count UP

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value 2

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H H
I N 1 L
level. Addition
A A
Subtraction
A A
Addition

Directive I N 2 H
L
DIR
 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value 2

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
H
I N 1 L

I N 2 H
Independent L

IND Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
 Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances

beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. I N 1
H
L
H
I N 2 L
Phase B B
Phase advance Phase retard
PHASE
 Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

 LC4H-W 87

2. Output mode
For the set value 1, you can choose one of the following four For the set value 2, you can choose one of the following eight
modes. modes.
HOLD-B HOLD-A
HOLD-C HOLD-B
HOLD-D HOLD-C
SHOT-A HOLD-D
SHOT-A
SHOT-B
SHOT-C
SHOT-D

• Output mode for set value 1

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until resetting.
However, counting is possible despite
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
completion of count-up.
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2

Counters
Over count I
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-B

ON
Output control 1 OFF

* n: Set value 1
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until the next
signal enters. However, counting is Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
possible despite completion of count-
Maintain output up. Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Over count II Able
Counting able/unable
HOLD-C
 ON
Output control 1 OFF OFF

* n: Set value 1
If the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value when count- Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
ing up, the control output is held. The
count operation is possible anyway. Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Maintain output
Counting able/unable Able
Over count III
HOLD-D

ON
Output control 1 (addition) OFF
ON
Output control 2 (subtraction) OFF

* n: Set value 1
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
despite completion of count-up.
One shot Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Over count Able
Counting able/unable
SHOT-A
 ON
Output control 1 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 1
 88 LC4H-W

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until reset-
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
ting. During that time, the count display
does not change from that at count-up
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 3 2 1 0
completion.
Hold count Able Unable
Counting able/unable
HOLD-A
 ON
Output control 2 OFF

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until resetting.
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
However, counting is possible despite
completion of count-up.
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count I Able
Counting able/unable
HOLD-B
 ON
Output control 2 OFF
Counters

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until the next
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
signal enters. However, counting is
possible despite completion of count-
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
up.
Over count II Able
Counting able/unable
HOLD-C
 ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF

* n: Set value 2
If the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value when count- Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
ing up, the counter starts counting up
again. The count operation is possible Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Maintain output anyway.
Counting able/unable Able
Over count III
HOLD-D ON
 Output control 2 (addition) OFF
ON
Output control 2 (subtraction) OFF

* n: Set value 2

Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2

Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
One shot
Counting able/unable Able
Over count
SHOT-A ON
 Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is pos-
sible despite completion of count-up. Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2
One shot However, reset occurs simultaneous Reset (automatic)
Recount I with completion of count-up. While Able
Counting able/unable
SHOT-B
 output is being maintained, restarting of
ON
the count is not possible. Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2
 LC4H-W 89

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is pos-
sible despite completion of count-up. Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1
One shot However, reset occurs simultaneous Reset (automatic)
Recount II with output OFF. Able
Counting able/unable
SHOT-C ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
(approx. 1 sec). During that time, the
count display does not change from Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1
One shot that at count-up completion. Reset Reset (automatic)
Hold count occurs simultaneous with output OFF. Counting able/unable Able Unable Able
SHOT-D

ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

Counters
* n: Set value 2

Output mode for set value 1

  HOLD-C HOLD-D  HOLD-B  SHOT-A

As usual As usual
 SHOT-A
(this combination unchanged) (this combination unchanged)

Approx. 1s
Output 1 Output 1
Output mode for
 SHOT-B Output 1
set value 2 Output 2 Output 2

Approx. 1s Output 2 Approx. 1s

 SHOT-C
 SHOT-D

Note) When control output 1 is on, the output mode of setting 2 (SHOT-A, B, C, D) is also on and output 1 changes as shown in the above table.

3. Count-up
(1) In control output 1, when the count
value is equal to the preset value 1, it is
counted. (However, if the output mode of
the preset value 1 is HOLD-D, it is count-
ed when the count value is greater than
or equal to the preset value 1, regardless
of the input mode.)
(2) In control output 2, when the count (3) It is not counted even when the
value is equal to 0 in the count-down counting conditions are satisfied right
input mode, it is counted. In the other after resetting. It can be counted from
modes, when the count value is equal when the count value changes.
to the preset value 2, it is counted.
(However, if the output mode of the
preset value 2 is HOLD-D, it is counted
when the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value 2, regardless of
the input mode.)
 90 Precautions in using the LC4H series

Precautions during usage

1. Terminal wiring
1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the
terminal layout and wiring diagrams and
be sure to perform the wiring properly
without errors.
If independent power circuitry must be Also, use transistors with a residual volt-
used, keep the input contacts or transis- age of less than 2 V when the transistor
tors separate from each other, as shown is on.
in Fig. B.
(Fig. B)
Reset input

2) When using the instrument with an Input contact

Input 1
or transistor Input 2
flush mounting, the screw-down termi- Lock
nal type is recommended. For the pin Input input
terminal
type, use either the rear terminal block 3
2 10 Power
(AT78041) or the 8P cap (AD8-RC) for 8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3
supply
the 8-pin type, and the rear terminal 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
Input contact
block (AT78051) or the 11P cap (AT8- or transistor Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
DP11) for the 11-pin type. Avoid solder- Input
Note: The LC4H-W does not have the lock input d,
ing directly to the round pins on the unit. 3
terminal
7 .
When using the instrument with a front 2 10

panel installation, use the DIN rail termi-
nal block (AT8-DF8K) for the 8-pin type
and the DIN rail terminal block (AT8-
DF11K) for the 11-pin type.
3) After turning the counter off, make
Counters
When power circuitry is not independ-
ent, one input signal can be fed to two
or more counters at once, as shown in
Fig. C.
* The short-circuit impedance should be
less than 1 k .
[When the impedance is 0 , the current
coming from the input 1 and input 2 ter-

sure that any resulting induced voltage (Fig. C) minals is approximately 12 mA, and from
or residual voltage is not applied to Input contact the reset input and lock input terminals is
or transistor
power supply terminals 2 through 7 approximately 1.5 mA.]
(8-pin type), 2 through 10 (11-pin type) Input
terminal
3
1 or 2 and (screw terminal type). Also, the open-circuit impedance should
2 10 Power
(If the power supply wire is wired parallel be more than 100 k .
supply
to the high voltage wire or power wire, an
induced voltage may be generated * As shown in the diagram below, from
between the power supply terminals.) Input a non-contact point circuit (proximity
terminal
4) Have the power supply voltage pass 3 switches, photoelectric switches, etc.)
2 10
through a switch or relay so that it is with a power supply voltage of between
applied at one time. If the power supply 12 and 40 V, the signal can be input
is applied gradually, the counting may 3. Input and output without using an open collector transis-
malfunction regardless of the settings, 1) Signal input type tor. In the case of the diagram below,
the power supply reset may not function, (1) Contact point input when the non-contact point transistor Q
or other such unpredictable occurrence Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. switches from off to on (when the signal
may result. Since the contact point’s bounce time voltage goes from high to low), the sig-
2. Input connections (except LC4H-S/ leads directly to error in the count value, nal is input.
AC type) use contacts with as short a bounce time
The power circuit has no transformer as possible. In general, select Input 1 12 to 40V DC
without a transformer (power and input and Input 2 to have a maximum counting
terminals are not insulated). When an speed of 30 Hz and to be reset with a Reset input
input signal is fed to two or more coun- minimum input signal width of 20 ms.
Q
ters at once, do not arrange the power
Reset input
circuit in an independent way. Input 1
8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3
If the counter is powered on and off inde- Input 2
11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
pendently as shown in Fig. A, the coun- Lock
input Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
ter‘s internal circuitry may get damaged.
(The above example is for reset input)
Be careful never to allow such circuitry.
(Figs. A, B and C show the circuitry for 8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3

the 11-pin type.) 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 2) The input mode and output mode
(Fig. A) Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 change depending on the DIP switch set-
Input contact or transistor
Note: The LC4H-W does not have the lock input d,
tings. Therefore, before making any con-
7 . nections, be sure to confirm the opera-
Input
3
terminal tion mode and operation conditions cur-
(2) Non-contact point input rently set.
2 10 Power
supply
Connect with an open collector. Use
transistors whose characteristics satisfy
the criteria given below.
Input VCEO = 20 V min.
terminal
3 IC = 20 mA min.
2 10
ICBO = 6µA max.
 Precautions in using the LC4H series 91

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES

3) The LC4H series use power supply
without a transformer (power and input
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES
• Surge wave form
LC4H counter
[± (1.2 × 50) ms uni-polar full wave voltage]
As NPN output
terminals
3) The LC4H are series
not insulated).
use power Insupply
connect- LC4H
• Surge wave form
{ counter 100
ing various
without kinds of input
a transformer signals,
(power there-
and input As NPN output
O I
[± (1.290× 50) ms uni-polar full wave voltage]

voltage (%)
fore, use aare
terminals power transformerIninconnect-
not insulated). which Load
{ O I 100
the various
ing primarykinds
side isofseparated
input signals, fromthere-
the 90
50
Peak value

Surge(%)
ungrounded
fore, secondary
use a power side asinshown
transformer which in Load
Load’s power supply 30

Surge voltage
Fig.primary
the A, for thesidepower supply for
is separated a sensor
from the 50
Peak value
LC4H counter
and other input
ungrounded devices side
secondary so that short-cir-
as shown in Load’s power supply 300
As PNP output 0 1.2 50
cuiting
Fig. canthe
A, for bepower
prevented. supply for a sensor
LC4H Time (µs)
Once
and the wiring
other to be used
input devices is completely
so that short-cir- { counter
O I
As PNP output 0
0 1.2 50
installed
cuiting canandbeprior to installing this
prevented. Load below are considered the noise-resistant
Time (µs)
counter,
Once theconfirm
wiring to that
bethere
used is is complete
completely { O I voltages. If voltages rise above these
insulationand
installed between
prior tothe wires connected
installing this Load values,are
below malfunctions
consideredor damage
the to the
noise-resistant
Load’s power supply
to the power
counter, confirmterminals
that there(2 each) and the
is complete internal circuitry
voltages. mayrise
If voltages result, so take
above thesethe
Note: With the LC4H 8-pin type and the LC4H-W,
wires connected
insulation between to the
each inputconnected
wires terminal. If necessary
values, precautions.
malfunctions or damage to the
there is no diode between points
Load’s power I and O.
supply
thethe
to power
power and input lines
terminals are not
(2 each) andinsulat-
the Noise wave
internal form (noise
circuitry simulator)
may result, so take the
Note: With the LC4H 8-pin type and the LC4H-W,
ed, a short-circuit
wires connected tomay each occur
inputinside the If
terminal. (2) Use the diode connected to the out- necessaryPower
precautions.
supply terminals
there is no diode between points I and O. Input
counter
the power andandresult
inputinlines
internal
are damage.
not insulat- put transistor’s collector for absorbing Noise wave form (noise simulator)
DC type terminals
AC type
In addition,
ed, when moving
a short-circuit may occur your equipment
inside the theUse
(2) reverse voltage
the diode from induced
connected to theloads.
out- Power supply24V AC type
terminals
Input
to a newand
counter installation
result in location, confirm
internal damage. (LC4H
put only) collector for absorbing
transistor’s Noise
1,500V DC type terminals
1,000V 600V
that
In there iswhen
addition, no difference
moving your in environmen-
equipment the reverse voltage from induced loads. voltage AC type 24V AC type
LC4H counter
talaconditions
to as compared
new installation location, toconfirm
the previ- (LC4H only) Noise
Rise time: 1 ns
1,500V 1,000V 600V
voltage

Counters
ous there
that location.
is no difference in environmen- Pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns
LC4H counter
(except
tal LC4H-S/AC
conditions as comparedtype) to the previ- Polarity:
Rise time:± 1 ns
ous location. Inductive load
Cycle:width:
Pulse 100 cycles/second
1 µs, 50 ns
(Fig. A) Good example
(except LC4H-S/AC type)
Diode rating: 5) When± connecting the operation power
Polarity:
IF (forward current): 1 A
supply, make sure that no leakage cur-
AC power supply

Insulation transformer Inductive load

Cycle: 100 cycles/second
VR (reverse Load’s
(Fig. A) Good example
(+) Diode rating:voltage): 600 V rent
5) enters
When the counter.
connecting the For example,
operation power
Input device
(e.g., sensor)
power supply
IF (forward current): 1 A
when performing
supply, make surecontact
that noprotection,
leakage cur-if
AC power supply (–)

Insulation transformer
Load’s
(+)
(–) Input device 6)V When
R (reverse voltage): 600 V
wiring, usepower shielded
supply wires or set up
rent like that
enters of diagram
the counter. ForA,example,
leaking cur-
(e.g., sensor)

Counter
(–)
metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire rent will
when pass through
performing C and
contact R, enterifthe
protection,
(–)
lengths
6) Whenas short use
wiring, as possible.
shielded wires or unit,upand
set likecause
that ofincorrect
diagramoperation.
A, leaking cur-
(Fig. B) Bad Counter
example metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire Diagram
rent B shows
will pass throughthe Ccorrect
and R,setup.
enter the
AC power supply
4. Output
lengths as mode
short as setting
possible. unit, and cause incorrect operation.
The output mode can be set with the DIP
Insulation transformer

(Fig. B) Bad example

(+)
Input device
Diagram B shows the correct setup.
AC power supply (–)
(e.g., sensor)
4. Outputon
switches mode
the sidesetting
of the counter. Leakage current
Make
The the DIP
output mode switch
cansettings
be set withbeforethe DIP
Insulation transformer

(+)
(–) Input device
Operation power supply
Counter
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
installing on
switches thethecounter
side of onthethecounter.
panel. R C
Leakage current
C

(–)
5. Conditions
Make the DIP switch of usage settings before
Operation power supply
AC power supply
Counter 1) Avoid locations
installing the counter subject
on the topanel.
flammable R C C
5.
or Conditions
corrosive gases, of usage
excessive dust, oil,
Single coil transformer

(+)
Input device
(Fig. A)
AC power supply (–)
(e.g., sensor)
vibrations,
1) or excessive
Avoid locations subject shocks.
to flammable
2) corrosive
or Since the gases, cover of the unit isdust,
excessive made oil,of
Single coil transformer

(+)
Input device
(Fig. A)
(–)

Counter
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
Alternative
current flow
polycarbonate
vibrations, resin, avoid
or excessive contact with
shocks.
or Since
2) use inthe environments
cover of thecontaining
unit is made methyl
of
(–)

Counter
Alternative
current flow
alcohol, benzene,
polycarbonate resin,thinners, and other
avoid contact with R
4) The input signal is applied by the organic
or use insolvents;
environments and ammonia,
containingcausticmethyl Operation power supply
shorting of each input terminal with the C
sodas, and
alcohol, other alkaline
benzene, thinners,substances.
and other R
C
common
4) terminal
The input signal(terminal
is applied Qbyforthe
8-pin 3) If power
organic supplyand
solvents; surges exceedcaustic
ammonia, the val- Operation power supply
type, terminal
shorting of each for 11-pin
E input typewith
terminal andtheter- C
ues given
sodas, andbelow, the internal
other alkaline circuits may
substances.
C
minal 6 terminal
common for screw(terminal
terminalQ types). Never
for 8-pin become
3) If power damaged. Be sure
supply surges to usethe
exceed surge
val- (Fig. B)

connect
type, other E
terminal terminals
for 11-pinor voltages
type andhigh-
ter- absorbing
ues element
given below, thetointernal
preventcircuits
this frommay 6) Long periods of continuous operation
er than640forVscrew
minal DC , because
terminal ittypes).
may Never happening.
become damaged. Be sure to use surge in the count-up completed (Fig. B)
condition (one
destroy the
connect internal
other terminalscircuitry.
or voltages high- 4) Regarding
absorbing external
element noise, the
to prevent thisvalues
from month
6) Longorperiods
more) will result in the
of continuous weaken-
operation
5) than
er Transistor
40 V DCoutput, because it may happening. ingthe
in of count-up
the internal electricalcondition
completed components(one
(1) Since
destroy thethe transistor
internal output is insulat-
circuitry. 4)Operating
Regarding voltage
externalSurge voltage
noise, the(peak value)
values from the
month or generated heat and,
more) will result therefore,
in the weaken-
ed from the
5) Transistor internal circuitry by a pho-
output AC type 6,000V should
ing beinternal
of the avoided. If you docomponents
electrical plan to use
tocoupler,
(1) Since it can be used
the transistor outputasisan NPN
insulat- Operating voltage Surge voltage (peak value)
DC type the unit
from thefor such continuous
generated heat and,operation,
therefore,
1,000V
output
ed fromorthePNP (equal
internal value) by
circuitry output.
a pho- 24V
ACAC type
type 6,000V use in conjunction
should be avoided.with If you a relay as to
do plan shown
use
(The aboveit example
tocoupler, can be used is 11-pin
as antype)
NPN DC type
1,000V in the
the unitcircuit in the
for such diagram below.
continuous operation,
output or PNP (equal value) output. 24V AC type
use in conjunction with a relay as shown
(The above example is 11-pin type) in the
R circuitC in the diagram
R below.
R

R C R R
Receive output
R Relay C Counter from contact
at relay R

Receive output
R Relay C Counter from contact
at relay R
141

141
 92 Installing the DIN size counter (common)
6. Self-diagnosis function
If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear.
Display Contents
or Minimum value went below –999
or –99999. See note 1.
Incorrect DIP switch setting.
Malfunctioning CPU.
Malfunctioning memory. See
note 2.
Note 1: When the counter value goes below the minimum value during any of the subtraction, directive, independent, or phase input modes.
Note 2: Includes the possibility that the EEPROM’s life has expired.
7. Compliance with the CE marking
When using in applications to which
EN61812-1 applies, abide by the follow-
ing conditions.
Overvoltage category II, pollution level
2 (for sensor type model with power
supply)
1. Connections between the power sup-
Counters
ply and input/output have basic insula-
tion. Use a device with basic insulation
to connect to the I/O terminals.
(for sensor type model without power
supply)
1) This counter employs a power supply
without a transformer, so the power
and input signal terminals are not
insulated.
Output condition Restoration procedure
Enter reset or RESET
key.
No change
Restart unit (correct DIP
switch settings)
Enter reset, RESET key,
OFF
or restart unit.
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
input circuit, install double insulation
on the sensor side.
(2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
insulated relays, etc.
The load connected to the output con-
tact should have basic insulation.
This counter is protected with basic
insulation and can be double-insulated
to meet EN/IEC requirements by using
basic insulation on the load.
Applied voltage should be protected
with an overcurrent protection device
(example: 250 V 1A fuse, etc.) that con-
forms to the EN/IEC standards.
Preset values after restoration
No change
The values at start-up before the CPU
malfunction occurred.
0
2) You must use a terminal block or
socket for installing the pin-type coun-
ter. Do not touch the terminal section
or other parts of the timer unit while
an electric current is applied. Before
installation or removal, confirm that
there is no voltage being applied to
any of the terminals.
3) Do not use this timer with a safety cir-
cuit. For example, when using a timer
in a heater circuit, etc., provide a pro-
tection circuit on the machine side.
 Installing the DIN size counter (common) 93

Installation methods
1. Surface mount
1) For the counters of LC4H series, use
the pin type counter.
2) Put the terminal socket on the board
directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. 1).
3) Insert the counter into the terminal
2) How to mount the counter
From the panel front, pass the counter
through the square hole. Fit the mount-
ing frame from the rear, and then push
it in so that the clearance between the
mounting frame and the panel surface is
minimized. In addition, lock the mount-
ing frame with a screw.
Panel cover
Mounting flame
5) Correctly connect the terminals while
seeing the terminal layout and wiring
diagram.
6) If the pin type is used, the rear pin-
bracket (AT8-RR) or the 8P cap (AD8-
RC) is necessary to connect the pins.
For the 11-pin type, use the 11P cap
(AT8-DP11) and avoid directly soldering
the round pins on the counter.
7) Panel cutout dimensions
The standard panel
cutout dimensions are
+0.6

socket and fix it with clip (Fig. 2) 450

shown in the left fig-
PUSH
4) On DIN rail mounting, mount the ure. (Panel thickness:
counter on the DIN rail tightly to get the +0.6 1 to 5 mm)
450

proper dimension (Fig. 3). 8) Although the

Min. 80
(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2)
Screw counters can 45
+0.6
0

Rubber
gasket be mounted
3) Caution in mounting the counter adjacent to +0.6
45
0

Counters
Terminal socket each other in
) If the LC4H series are used as the this case, it is Min. 80
waterproof types (IEC IP66), tighten recommended
the reinforcing screws on the mounting to arrange the
frames so that the counters, the rub- mounting holes
(Fig. 3)
ber gaskets, and the panel surfaces as shown in the
are tightly contacted with each other. figure to facili-
(Tighten the two screws with uniform tate attaching +0.6
45
DIN rail 0

force and make sure that there is no and detaching

rattling. If the screws are tightened too the mounting
A
excessively, the mounting frame may frame.
come off.) 9) Adjacent mounting
5) 8-pin type should be connected with
) If the counter is installed with the Although the counters can be mounted
terminal socket AT8-DF8K. 11-pin type
panel cover and the rubber gasket adjacent to each other, remember that
should be connected with terminal socket
removed, the waterproofing characteris- the panel surface of LC4H series counter
AT8-DF11K.
tic is lost. will lose its water-resistant effect. (Panel
6) DIN rail (AT8-DLA1) is also available
4) Removal thickness: 1 to 5 mm)
(1 m).
Loosen the screws on the mounting A = (48xn – 2.5)+0.6
+0

frame, spread the edge of frame and When lining up the counters horizontally,
2. Flush mount
remove it. set the frames in such a position so the
1) For the counters of LC4H series, it is
formed spring areas are at the top and
recommended to use the built-in screw
bottom.
terminal type for flush mount. (Mounting
When lining up
frame and rubber gasket are provided
the counters
when counter is shipped.)
vertically, set
the frames in
such a position Formed spring
Pull the mounting 1 as the formed
frame backward
spring areas
while spreading out
are at the right
its hooks with your
and left.
thumbs and index
2
fingers.
Formed spring

1
 94 PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE COUNTER
Hour Meters

Panasonic automation products and service available

The range from Panasonic Electric Works

includes PLCs, HMIs, sensors and many more.
For detailed information please visit our website

www.panasonic-electric-works.com.
 LC2H 95

LC2H

DIN HALF SIZE

DIN HALF SIZE
LC2H
LCD COUNTER
LC2H LC2H
Counters
LCD COUNTER
Counters
DIN Half Size LCD Counter

Features
Features 1. 8.7 mm .343 inch Character Height 6. Screw Terminals Designed for
1. 8.7 mm .343 inch Character Height (previously 7 mm)
6. Screw Terminals Designed for Safety
Features
(previously 7 mm) Easy-to-read
Safety character height increased Built in finger protection.

›› 8.7Easy-to-read
mm Character character
Height height
from 7 mm to 8.7 mm .276 inch to .343
Easy-to-read character
increased
(previously 7 mm)
from
inch.
7 mm to 8.7
››
mm
Built in finger protection.
7. Panel Covers Replacable
.276 inch to .343
Screw Terminals Designed
7. Panel Covers Replacable
(Standard forcolor
Safety
is ash gray.)
Panel mountingheight
type increased from 7mm to 8.7 Built in finger Change
protection the panel design by replacing
inch. (Standard color is ash gray.)
ype
n type
mm. One-touch installation type

8.7mm
››
Change the panel design
with a black panel cover.
Panel 8.7mm
by Covers
replacing
.343inch
with a black panel cover.
Replaceable
8. Conforms to IP66 Protective
(Standard color is ash gray.)
.343inch 8. Conforms to IP66 Change Protective Construction (Only installation frame
the panel design
type.)by replacing
(Front panelwith a black panel
surface)
Plenty of Digits
Construction (Only installation frame
cover. 9. Input Methods

Counters
Plenty of Digits
9. Input Methods ››
type.) (Front panel surface)

tion frame type.)

1) Non-voltage
Conforms to IP66 Protective
2)
(FrontVoltage
panel input
input method
Construction
method
surface)
(Only Installa-
1) Non-voltage 8input method
digits
ype
Panel mounting type
8 frame
Installation digitstype 3. 3)
Counting Speed››
2) Voltage input method Input Methods
Switchable
Free voltage input method
1) Non-voltage input and
3) Free voltage input method
10. Backlight Type Added to Series
method
between
10. 2 kHz
Backlight and
Type30 Hz
Added to Series Now 2-color Switchable (green/
››
ype 3. Counting Speed Switchable
4. Panel Mounting Type 2)Features
Voltage input method red)
Counting
betweenSpeed2 kHz and 30 Hz between 2 kHz and
Switchable and Now30 Hz2-color Switchable (green/
›› 4. Panel
Panel Mounting
Mounting Type
2 InstallationMethods
Methods
Type Features
Features
2 Installation
red)
Comes with
Methods3) Free voltage input Easy
very ››
easy one-touch
Easy viewing even in Backlight
dark placesType
methodviewing even in dark places and
switchable
and Added to Series between green and red
and Now 2-color Swit-
2 Installation installation type and
switchable between greenalso installation
and(green/red)
red (Voltage input type).
Comes with very easy one-touch chable
Comes with PC very
board easy one-touch
mounting type installationframe
type and
type
(Voltage also
that
input uses the
type). bracket on the 11. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
installation type and also installation Easy viewing even in dark places and switchable between
installation
frame type frame type the
that uses thatbracket
uses the onbracket
the timer/counter.
on11. timer/ Choose
theCompliant with a method
UL, c-UL and that CE.
type green and red (Voltage input type.)
suits the application.
››
counter. Choose a method that
timer/counter. Choose a method that suits the application.

ty information
›› RoHS
suits Directive
Battery the
To5.replace
Batterybattery
compatibility information
application.
replacement
Replacement
Easy on Environment
http://www.nais-e.com/ Easy on
simply remove
5. Battery Replacement
Environment
body for the
Easy on with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD, UL File No.:
Compliant
E122222, CSA File No.: LR39291
To one-touch
replace battery simply remove body
e.com/ Environment
installation type, and remove battery lid for the installation
for the one-touch installation type, and
To replace battery simply remove body
frame type. remove battery lid for the installation
for the one-touch installation type, and
frame type.
remove battery lid for the installation
frame type.
Product chart
Type Standard type Backlight type
Standard type Voltage input type
Backlight type Free voltage input type Voltage input type
Type Installation type Non-voltage input type
(4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
Voltage input type Free voltage input type Voltage input type
Non-voltage
Panel input type
One-touch installation
(4.5 to 30type
V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
mounting
llation type type Installation frame type
e type PC board mounting type — — —

Product types — — —

1. Panel mounting type

1) One-touch installation type
1 Standard type
pe
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
Non-voltage input type LC2H-FE-2KK
ting speed Front reset 2 kHz/30 Hz switchableInput method Part No.
8 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK
Non-voltage input type LC2H-FE-2KK
Hz switchable 30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-FE-FV-30
Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK
Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.
30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-FE-FV-30
ithout front resetting.
2 Backlight type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
8 digits 2 kHz/30 Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK-B
ting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK-B
98
95
 96 LC2H

LC2H
2) Installation frame type
1 Standard type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
Non-voltage input type LC2H-F-2KK
2 kHz/30 Hz switchable
8 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F-DL-2KK
30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-F-FV-30
Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.

2 Backlight type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
8 digits 2 kHz/30 Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F-DL-2KK-B

2. PC board mounting type

No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
2 kHz LC2H-C-2K-N
8 digits No Non-voltage input type
30 Hz LC2H-C-30-N

Specifications
1. Panel mounting type
Type Standard type Backlight type Standard type
Counters

Item Non-voltage input Voltage input Free voltage type

No. digits 8 digits
External power supply Not required (built-in batter y)
Max. counting speed 2 kHz/30 Hz (Switchable by switch) 30 Hz (Note 2)
Min. input signal width
0.25 ms/16.7 ms (Switchable by switch) 16.7 ms
(ON: OFF = 1:1)
High level:
Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC Low level:
Count connection
0 to 2.4 V AC/DC
input
When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Approx. 4.7 kΩ —
When open:
Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V — —
Min. input signal width 200 ms
Non-voltage input using Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC
connection connection
Reset
input When shorted: When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Appox. 4.7 kΩ
When open: When open:
Max. 750 kΩ Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max 0.5 V — Max. 0.5 V
7-segment LCD
Display method 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD
With green/red backlight
Between charged and
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute. uncharged parts: 2,000 V
AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.
Backlight power — 24 V DC (± 10%) —
Protective construction (Note 3) IEC Standard IP66 (only panel front: when using rubber gasket)
Accessories (Note 3) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket
Batter y life 7 years (at 25°C ) Note 1 6 years (at 25°C )
Notes) 1. The value given for battery life is calculated based on continuous operation (count input signal ON/OFF = 1:1), therefore, this value is not guaranteed.
Also, battery life is decreased 30% when operation is continuous with 2 kHz count inputting in 2 kHz mode.
2. Operation is at 25 Hz when using 24 V AC.
3. Only for installation frame type.
 LC2H 97

LC2H
2. PC board mounting type
Type
PC board mounting type
Item
Input method Non DC voltage input
No. digits 8 digits
Rated operation voltage 3 V DC
Allowable operation voltage range 2.7 to 3.3 V DC
Current consumption Max. 30 µA (max. 250 µA during reset input)
Max. counting speed 2 kHz 30 Hz
Min. input signal width
0.25 ms 16.7 ms
(ON: OFF = 1:1)
Count Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V
Min. input signal width 10 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Reset
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual power Max. 0.5 V
Break down voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged par ts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute.

Counters
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.

3. Common
Type
Panel mounting/PC board mounting types
Item
Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to +55°C (without frost or dew)
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C (without frost or dew)
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)

Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)

Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

100
 98 LC2H

LC2H
Part names
1. Front reset button COUNTER Count speed switch
This button resets the count value. It
does not work when the lock switch is
ON. Be aware that battery life will RESET

LC2H
decrease if this switch is used frequently.
2. Lock switch (Refer to chart on
right.) Front reset button

Disable the front reset button. Lock switch

Note) Turn ON at the LCD side (reset disabled) and
OFF at the terminal block side (reset enabled).
3. Count speed switch (Refer to chart
on right.)
Use this switch to switch the count speed Non-voltage input/voltage input Free voltage input
between 30 Hz and 2 kHz. (On the non-
voltage and voltage input types, 30 Hz is (Terminal block side) OFF
on the LCD side and 2 kHz is on the Lock switch
terminal block side. Fixed at 30 Hz for (Unit display 1)
free voltage input type.) (LCD side) ON
Note) You must press the front reset button when you
change the count speed switch setting.
Confirm, however, that the Lock Switch is OFF
(front switches operable). (Terminal block side) 2k Hz
Count speed
—
switch
Counters

(Unit display 2)
(LCD side) 30Hz (Fixed at 30 Hz)

Notes) 1. Default setting when shipped.

2. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±1.0
1. Panel mounting type
• External dimensions • Panel installation diagram
1) One-touch installation type
44.8

Panel (1 to 4.5mm
54.4
Rubber spacer
thickness)

Note) When installing to a 4.5 mm thick panel, remove the rubber spacer
first.

When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure

10.4 (44) 5 48 that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
To prevent the installation spring
COUNTER from pinching the rubber gasket:
22 24 1. Set the rubber gasket on both
RESET
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
LC2H

7
Reset button 2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
rear of the timer unit.

101
 LC2H 99

LC2H
2) Installation frame type • Panel mounting diagram
44.8 Mounting screws Mounting frame
(found on mounting frame) ATH3803 (included)

54.4 37

Rubber gasket
Panel ATH3804 (included)
(1 to 4.5mm thickness)

10.4 44 5 48

COUNTER

22 24
RESET

LC2H

7 Reset button

• Panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

Counters
The standard panel cut-out is shown below. (Only installation frame type.)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber packing (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type.)

22.2+0.5
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0

60 min.
45+0.5
0

Notes) 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm .

2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
22.2+0.5
0

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

1) Standard type
Non voltage input type Voltage input type Free voltage input type

Count input Reset input Count input Reset input Count input Reset input
+V +V

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4

0V 0V
W -R are connected internally.

2) Backlight type
Voltage input type

Backlight
<When green> <When red>
0V +V
Count input Reset input
+V +V
5 5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6
0V 0V

0V +V

102
100 LC2H

LC2H
2. PC board mounting type General tolerance: ±1.0 mm
• External dimensions
PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW)
33.02±0.3
5.08±0.3 5.08±0.3 Mounting area
2.54
0.6±0.1 1.9
DIP switch × 8

2.54
3.3±0.3 15.24 Connection sockets
28 pin DIP terminal
8-0.8 dia.

1.9
43.4 17.3 0.5±0.3 5.08 5.19
5.19 5.08
19 15.24±0.3 33.02

COUNTER LC2H

0.3±0.1
General tolerance: ±0.1

Note: The AXS212811K is recommended as a compatible connection socket.

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

15 17 26 28
Count input Reset input
14 12 3 1
Counters

Q -E , } -w , e -t and S -F are connected internally.

An external power supply is required.

Input method
1. Standard type
Non-voltage input type
Panel mounting type PC board mounting type
Transistor input Transistor input
Contact input Contact input
NPN transistor NPN transistor

15 17 26 28 15 17 26 28
Count Reset Count 1 2 3 4 Reset Count Reset Count Reset
1 2 3 4 input input input input
input input input input 14 12 3 1 14 12 3 1

0V 0V
(W and R are connected internally.) (W and R are connected internally.) 3V DC 3V DC

Notes) 1. When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals ① and ③ on the panel mounting type and terminals ⑮ to ⑰ and 26 to 28 on the PC board
mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.
2. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)

Voltage input type

Transistor input Free voltage input type
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor
+V +V +V +V
Count Reset
input input Count 1 2 3 4 Reset
Count input

Reset input

input input
1 2 3 4 Count Reset 1 2 3 4
input 1 2 3 4 input
or or or

Notes) 1. ② and ④. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
2. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
3. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

103
 LC2H 101

LC2H
2. Backlight type
Voltage input type
Transistor input Backlight connection
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor

Green Red
+V +V +V +V

Count Reset 24V DC

input input
5 Count 5 Reset 5 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Count 1 2 3 4 Reset input input
6 input input 6 6 6
6

0V 0V 24V DC

Notes) 1. Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC voltage for the backlight.
2. ② and ④. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
3. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
4. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

Explanation of operation
1. Counting takes place when the count
input signal is ON. Count input
2. Counting resumes again when the

Counters
count value reaches 99999999 (full scale Reset input
value) and then returns to “0” with a new
count input. Count value 0 1 99999999 0 1 0 1

3. No measurement takes place when a Note) Count becomes “1” when the reset input is turned OFF while the count signal is being input.
reset is input.
1) When reset is ON, resetting takes
place and the count becomes “0”.
2) Press the front reset button when you
want to reset manually (only panel
installation type).
Note) Be aware that battery life will decrease if the
count input or reset input are left ON.

104
102 LC2H
Cautions for use
1. Non-voltage input type
For both panel mounting and PC
board mounting types
1) Never apply voltage to the non-voltage
input type. This will damage the internal
elements. Also, since there is a possibility
of erroneous operation, do not connect in
parallel the inputs of a non-voltage input
type and another counter from a single
input signal.
2) Since the current flow is very small
from the count input and reset input
terminals (① and ③ on the panel
mounting type and terminals ⑮ to ⑰ and
26 to 28 on the PC board mounting type)
please use relays and switches with high
contact reliability.
3) When inputting with an open collector
of a transistor, use a transistor for small
signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or less and
always input with no voltage.
Counters
4) When wiring, try to keep all the input
lines to the count and reset inputs as
short as possible and avoid running them
together with high voltage and power
transmission lines or in a power conduit.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
exceeds 500 pF (10 m for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). When using 2
kHz mode, use with a wiring floating
capacitance of 120 pF (3 m for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). In particular,
when using shielded wiring, be careful of
the capacitance between wires.
PC board mounting type
1) For external power supply use
manganese dioxide or lithium batteries
(CR type: 3V).
2) Always reset after external power is
applied and confirm that the display
reads “0”.
3) Make the wiring from the battery to the
counter unit as short as absolutely
possible. Also, be careful of polarity.
4) Calculate battery life with the following
formula.
t = A/I
t: battery life [h]
I: LC2H current consumption [mA]
A: battery capacity until minimum
operation voltage is reached [mAh]
5) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do
not dip solder. With the tip of the
soldering iron at 300°C perform
soldering within 3 seconds (for 30 to 60
W soldering iron).
2. Voltage input type
1) Be aware that applying more than 30 V
DC to count input terminals ① and ② ,
and reset input terminals ③ and ④ will
cause damage to the internal elements.
LC2H
2) For external resetting use H level Voltage input type
(application of 4.5 to 30 V DC) between +V +V
reset terminals ③ and ④ of the rear R
Tr
terminals. In this case, connect + to
3 4 3 4 3 4 or 3 4
terminal ③ and – to terminal ④ . This is
the valid polarity; therefore, the counter Note) Make sure that H (reset ON) level is at least 4.5
will not work if reversed. V.
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input 5. Backlight luminance
lines to the count and reset inputs as To prevent varying luminance among
short as possible and avoid running them backlights when using multiple Backlight
together with high voltage and power types, please use the same backlight
transmission lines or in a power conduit. power supply.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires 5 5
24V DC 2 2 2 2 24V DC
exceeds 500 pF (10 m for 6 6
parallel wires of 2 mm2). Green Red
3. Free voltage input type
6. Environment for use
1) Use count input terminals ① and ② for
1) Ambient conditions
free voltage input and reset terminals ③
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
and ④ for non-voltage input.
• Indoor use
2) Be aware that the application of
• Acceptable temperature and humidity
voltage that exceeds the voltage range of
range: –10 to +55°C, 35 to 85%RH (with
the H level to the count input terminal,
no condensation at 20°C)
and the application of voltage to the reset
• Under 2000 m elevation
input terminal, can cause damage to the
2) Use the main unit in a location that
internal elements.
matches the following conditions.
3) Since the current flow is very small
• There is minimal dust and no corrosive
from reset input terminal ③ , please use
gas.
relays and switches with high contact
• There is no combustible or explosive
reliability.
gas.
4) When inputting a reset with an open
• There is no mechanical vibration or
collector of a transistor, use a transistor
impacts.
for small signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or
• There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
less and always input with no voltage.
• Located away from large-volume
5) To reset externally, short reset input
electromagnetic switches and power
terminals ③ and ④ on the rear.
lines with large electrical currents.
6) Input uses a high impedance circuit;
3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
therefore, erroneous operation may occur
EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
if the influence of induction voltage is
input section.
present. If you plan to use wiring for the
4) Applied voltage should be protected
input signal that is 10 m or longer (wire
with an overcurrent protection device
capacitance 120 pF/m at normal
(example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
temperature), we recommend the use of
that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder
(Free voltage input type)
resistor.
4. How to reset multiple panel
mounting type counters all at once
(input is the same for count)
Non-voltage input type
D D D
Tr
3 4 3 4 3 4 or
Notes) 1. Use the following as a guide for choosing
transistors used for input (Tr).
Leakage current < 1 µA
2. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the
forward voltage so that the voltage between
terminals 3 and 4 during reset input meets
the standard value (0.5 V).
( At IF = 20 µA, forward voltage 0.1 and
higher.)
105
 LC2H 103

LC2H
LC2H LC2H DIN HALF SIZE LC2H
LC2H LCD COUNTER
Counte
PRESET COUNTER Preset Counters
Counter
PRESET COUNTER
LC2H
Counter
Features
Features 1. 8.7 mm .343 inch Character Height 6. Screw Terminals Desig
Features
Features (previously 7 mm) Safety
››1. Preset function equipped in half
Preset function equipped in half size (24 x 48 mm).
size (24 × 48 mm 0.945 × 1.890 inch). 1. Preset function ››
3. 8.7 mm 0.343 inch Character
equipped 8.7Easy-to-read
mm
in half
Height
Character character
Height height increased
(previously
3. 8.7 mm 0.343 inch Character 7 mm) Built in finger protection.
Height
››
(previously 7 mm 0.276 inch) 7.mm
Panel
Display
2. Display has hasbacklight forfor
backlight instant
instant sizeEasy-to
recognition. (24 × 48 readmmcharacter
0.945 × 1.890
from
Easy-to
height
7
inch).
mm
increased
to 8.7
read charactermm .276
(previously
inch to
height increased .343
7 mm 0.276 from 7
inch) to Covers Replacab
inch. (Standard color is ash gray
recognition. 2.mounting
Display
from 7 typehasto
mm backlight for
8.7 mm 0.2768.7instant
mm.
inch to 0.343 Easy-to read character heightChange increased
Panel the panel design b
recognition.
One-touch inch.
installation type from 7 mm to 8.7 mm
8.7mm 0.276 inch
with to
a 0.343panel cover.
black
Counting Counting up inch. .343inch 8. Conforms to IP66 Prot
Red or (Green) Counting Counting up
8.7mm Construction (Only insta

Counters
(backlight) Red or (Green)
.343inch 8.7mm
type.) (Front panel surfac
Plenty of Digits
(backlight)
.343inch
9. Input Methods
Green or (Red) 4. Plenty of Digits 1) Non-voltage input metho
(backlight) (Lit or Flashing) Green or (Red) 4. Plenty of Digits 2) Voltage input method
(backlight)
Panel mounting type (Lit or Flashing) 8 digits 3) Free voltage input meth
Installation frame type 3. Counting Speed Switchable 10. Backlight Type Added
Red or (Green) 8 digits between 2 kHz and 30 Hz and Now 2-color Switcha
Green or Red can
(backlight)
››
5. Counting Speed Switchable
Red or (Green)
4. Panel
Counting
(backlight) Mounting
Speed Type
SwitchableFeatures
8 digits red)
between 30 Hz and 5 kHz
››
be selected at setup. Green or Red can
between
be selected 30 Hz and 5 kHz
at setup. 2 Installation Methods5. Counting Speed Switchable Easy viewing even in dark
Conforms to IP66 Protective Constructionswitchable (Front between green
6. Conforms to IP66 Protective Comes with verybetween 30 Hz and 5 kHz
easy one-touch
panel surface)
installation 6. Conforms to IP66 Protective (Voltage input type).
(Lit or Flashing) Construction (Front panel surface)type and also installation
Lit or Flashing PC
can board mounting type Weatherproofing
(Lit frame supported
Construction
type that uses
or Flashing) the bracketby (Front
using
on theoptional 11.mounting
Compliant with UL, c-
panel surface)
Weatherproofing supported by using
be selected at setup.
optional mounting frame ortimer/counter.
Litframe and
Flashing
and rubber canrubber Weatherproofing
Choose
gasket a method supported
that by using
››
be selected at setup.
gasket suits the application.optional mounting frame and rubber
Includes reassuring lock mode and lock switch to
RoHS Directive compatibility
7. Includes information
reassuringprevent5. Battery
lock mode Replacement
and gasket Easy on
erroneous operation.
Environment 7. Includes reassuring lock mode and
http://www.nais-e.com/
operation. ››
lock switch to prevent erroneous
To replace
Screw
for the
battery
terminals
one-touch
simply
lock
are switchremove
constructed
installation
operation. type,
body
to prevent erroneous
to protect
and
fingers to
8. Screw terminals areensure constructed safety.to
nformation
om/ RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/
protect fingers to ensure
9. Compliant with
››
UL,
remove battery lid
c-UL
safety.
Compliant
frame type.with UL,
and CE.
8. for the installation
Screw terminals are constructed to
c-ULfingers
protect
and CE. to ensure safety.
9. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
Product chart
Product types Type Standard type
Voltage input type Free voltage input type
Bac
Volta
Output mode Output Operating voltage PartNon-voltage
No. input type
No. digits Counting speed Installation typemode
Output Output Operating voltage (4.5 to 30 V DC)Part No.(24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5
• Maintain output/hold count
• Maintain output/over count •Panel
Maintain output/hold
One-touch count
installation type
30 Hz/5 kHz (1a)
Transistor •mounting
Maintain output/over
24 V DC count LC2HP-FEW-B-DC24V
8 digits
• One shot/over count
Installation frame typeTransistor (1a) 24 V DC LC2HP-FEW-B-DC24V
• One shot/recount switchable • One
type shot/over count
• One shot/recount
Mounting frame PC board mounting type ATH3803 — —
Mounting frame
Use for waterproofing (front panel surface) ATH3803
Rubber Options Use
ATHfor waterproofing (front panel surface)
ket are not included.
gasket
Product types
Rubber gasket
380 4
ATH3804
Note: Mounting
Note: Mountingframe
frameand
andrubber 1.are
gasket
rubber Panel
gasket notnot
are mounting
included. type
included.
1) One-touch installation type
1 Standard type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method
Non-voltage input type LC2H-F
2 kHz/30 Hz switchable
8 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F
30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-F
Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.

2 Backlight type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method
8 digits 2 kHz/30 Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F

98
104 LC2H

Specifications
Item Descriptions
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Rated power consumption Max. 1.5 W
Rated control capacity 100 mA 30 V DC
Input mode Addition/Subtraction (selectable by front switch)
Max. counting speed 30 Hz/5 kHz (selectable by slide switch on side)
Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz,
Counting input
ON time : OFF time = 1 : 1
Reset input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
• Non-voltage input using contacts or open-collector connection
Rating
Input signal • Input impedance; when shorted: Max. 1 kΩ, when open: Min. 100 kΩ
• Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
• Maintain output/hold count • Maintain output/over count
Output mode • One shot/over count • One shot/recount
(Selectable by front switch)
7-segment LCD
Display method
(Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for count up.)
–9999999 to 99999999 (–7 digits to +8 digits)
Digit
(0 to 99999999 for preset value)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 operations or more)
Counters

Contact arrangement 1 Form A (Open collector)

Electrical life (contact) 107 operations (at rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Electrical Break down voltage (Initial value) Between input and output: 1,500 V AC, for 1 min.
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between input and output: 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC)
Functional vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Destructive shock resistance Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to 55°C (without frost or dew)
Operating
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C (without frost or dew)
conditions
Ambient humidity 30 to 85% RH (at 25°C, non-condensing)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket)
* The factory default preset value is set to 1000000.

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
 LC2H 105

Part names
1. Front reset key 5
This key resets the count value. It does
not work when the lock switch is ON. COUNTER

2. Mode key
Use to switch between each mode.
3. Setting key
RESET MODE SET

LC2H
Used to set digits of preset values or set 1 2 3 4 6
each mode.
4. Set key
Use to set preset values or to switch
between modes.
5. Lock switch : Default setting when shipped.
Disable the operation of the front panel
reset key and the mode key. With the lock (Terminal block side) OFF
switch on, is displayed for about Lock switch
two seconds when the reset key or mode 5
(unit display 1)
switch is operated. (LCD side) ON
6. Count speed switch
Use this switch to switch the count speed
between 30 Hz and 5 kHz. (Terminal block side) 5kHz

Counters
Count speed switch
6
(unit display 2)
(LCD side) 30Hz

Notes: 1. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

2. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the count speed switch when the power is on. The
setting will become valid when the power is turned back on.

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ± 1.0
• External dimensions
44.8
When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure
that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
To prevent the installation spring
54.4 from pinching the rubber gasket:
1. Set the rubber gasket on both
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
10.4 44 5 48
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
COUNTER

22
RESET MODE SET
24 rear of the timer unit.
LC2H

• Panel cut out dimensions • When installing repeatedly (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut out is shown below. (Only installation frame type)
Use the mounting bracket (ATH3803) and the rubber gasket (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type)

22.2+0.5
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0

60 min.
45+0.5
0

Notes: 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm.

2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
22.2 +0.5
0
106 LC2H
How to set
1. Preset value setting mode
This is the mode for setting preset values.
Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value.
1) Pressing the MODE key takes you to
the preset value setting mode.
Sample display in preset value
setting mode
(when preset value is 1000)
2) Pressing the setting key moves the
flashing digit left by one. Following the
highest digit it returns to the lowest digit
and each time the digit setting key is
pressed it moves one to the left.
3) Pressing the set key increases the
value by one. (After 9 it returns to 0 and
then changes to 1, 2, 3, etc.)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
Counters
the displayed preset value and returns
you to the regular operation mode.
5) In the preset value setting mode if you
do not operate the digit setting key or the
set key for ten seconds or more you will
be returned to regular operation. In this
case the preset value will not change.
2. Lock mode
This mode prohibits everything except
the preset value setting mode.
+ mode reads “
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the set key while holding
down the mode key takes you to the lock
mode.
2) The display reads “Un-Lock” after
entering the lock mode (initial setting).
Display after entering lock mode
(Example showing “Un-Lock”.)
3) Pressing the setting key changes the
display between “ Lock” and “Un-
lock”.
(Example showing “
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
5) When the lock mode display reads
“ Lock”, you will not be able to move
to the backlight setting mode, the input
setting mode, or the output setting mode.
3. Backlight setting mode
This is the mode for setting the backlight
during count up.
+
Press the SET key while pressing
the MODE key.
Lit red
Lit green
1) Pressing the SET key two times while
holding down the MODE key takes you to
the backlight setting mode.
2) The display in the backlight setting
LEd”
Lock
Display after entering
the backlight setting mode.
3) The LED backlight will be red (initial
setting).
LC2H
4) The backlight changes from flashing
green to flashing red to lit green and to lit
red with each press of the setting key.
5) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the current backlight color and returns
you to regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
Lock”.)
4. Input setting mode
This is the mode for setting addition or
subtraction.
+
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the SET key three times
while holding down the MODE key takes
you to the input setting mode.
2) The display after entering the input
setting mode reads “ UP” (initial
setting).
Display after entering input
setting mode
(Example showing “UP”)
3) Pressing the setting key changes the
Flashes green
Flashes red display to “dn” (subtraction) and pressing
it again changes it to “UP” (addition). The
display alternates between “dn” and “UP”.
(Example showing “dn”)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
109
 LC2H 107

LC2H
5. Output setting mode
This sets the operation mode.
2) Lock mode
+ +
Press the SET key while pressing HOLD-A HOLD-B
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock Lock
the MODE key. SHOT-B SHOT-A
the MODE key.
When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than
1) Pressing the SET key four times while backlight setting mode.
holding down the MODE key takes you to 3) Backlight setting mode
the output setting mode. +
2) The display reads “HoLd-A” (initial Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green
the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red
setting) after entering the output setting
Front panel reset key
mode.
4) Input setting mode
+
Regular operation mode
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
3) Pressing the setting key causes the
display to change as follows:
HOLD-B (Output maintain/over count I) 5) Output setting mode
+
Press the SET key while pressing HOLD-A HOLD-B
the MODE key. SHOT-B SHOT-A

SHOT-A (One shot/over count)

Counters
Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key.
Lock mode Backlight setting mode
Output setting mode Input setting mode

SHOT-B (One shot/recount I) Please be aware that after doing a front Preset Output
Count value
panel reset key and returning to regular value change
operation mode, the preset values, count Lock
× × ×
mode
value and output will be as shown in this
HOLD-A (Output maintain/hold count) Backlight
table. setting × × ×
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets mode
the display content and returns you to Input Addition: “0”
regular operation mode. setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode “Preset value”
mode if you do not press the front panel reset Output Addition: “0”
key. setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
mode “Preset value”
Note: “×” sign: No change

Changing the preset value

1. It is possible to change the preset
value even during counting. However,
be aware of the following points.
1) If the preset value is changed to less
than the count value with counting set to
the addition direction, counting will
continue until it reaches full scale, returns
to zero, and then reaches the new preset
value. If the preset value is changed to a
value above the count value, counting will
continue until the count value reaches the
new preset value.
2) Suppose that the counter is preset to
count down. Whether a preset count
down value is smaller or larger than the
count value, the counter counts down to
“0 (zero)”.
2. If the preset value is changed to “0”,
the counter will not complete count-
up. It starts counting up when the
counting value comes to “0 (zero)”
again.
1) Addition (up-count) input when
counting is set to the addition direction,
counting will continue until full scale is
reached, return to zero, and then
complete count-up.
2) Subtraction (down-count) input when
counting is set to the subtraction direction,
counting will continue until full scale
“–9999999” is reached, and then the
display will change to “ ”.

Compliance with the CE marking

• EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
The LC2H Preset Counter conforms to
the EMC Directive as a simple counter.
Applicable standards: EN61000-6-4,
EN61000-6-2

110
108 LC2H

LC2H
Operation mode
Output mode Operation Example when input mode is either addition or Subject:ubtraction
Output control is maintained after count-up
completion and until resetting. Output OFF ON

Output maintain/ During that time, the count display does not Counting able/unable Able Unable
hold count change from that at count-up completion.
Addition 0 1 2 3 4 n–1 n
HOLD-A
Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 n–4 1 0

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up

completion and until resetting. However, Output OFF ON

Output maintain/ counting is possible despite completion of Counting able/unable Able

over count I count-up.
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–2 n–1 n n+1 n+2 n+3
HOLD-B
Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up One shot pulse width: approx. 1 sec.
completion for a fixed time (approx. 1 sec.).
Output OFF ON
Counting is possible despite completion of
One shot/ count-up. Counting able/unable Able
over count
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–2 n–1 n n+1 n+2 n+3
SHOT-A
Counters

Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up One shot pulse width: approx. 1 sec.
completion for a fixed time (approx. 1 sec.).
Output OFF ON
Counting is possible despite completion of
One shot/ count-up. However, reset occurs Counting able/unable Able
recount I simultaneous with completion of count-up.
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–1 0 1 2 3 4
SHOT-B While output is being maintained, restarting
of the count is not possible. Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 1 n n–1 n–2 n–3 n–4

n: Preset value

111
 LC2H 109

Cautions for use

1. Input and output connection VCEO = Min. 20 V (3) Input wiring
1) Input connection IC = Min. 20 mA When wiring, use shielded wires or
(1) Contact input ICBO = Max. 6 µA metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire
Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Also, use transistors with a residual lengths as short as possible.
Since the contact’s bounce time leads voltage of less than 2 V when the 2) Output connection
directly to error in the count value, use transistor is on. Since the transistor output of counter is
contacts with as short a bounce time as * The short-circuit impedance should be less insulated from the internal circuitry by a
possible. In general, select input to have than 1 kΩ. photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN
a maximum counting speed of 30 Hz. (When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current output or PNP (equal value) output.
coming from the count input terminal is As NPN output
Count 5 Reset approximately 5 mA and from the reset
1 2 3 4 Load
input 6 input
input terminal is approximately 1.5 mA.)
5
Also, the open-circuit impedance should 1 2
6
3 4
Load’s power
supply

(2) Non-contact input (Transistor input) be more than 100 kΩ.

Connect with an open collector. Use As PNP output
transistors whose characteristics satisfy Count
input 1 2
5
3 4
Reset
input
6
the criteria given below. 1 2
5
3 4
Load’s power
6 supply

Load

Counters
2. Self-diagnosis function 3. Terminal connection
If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. 1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and
Output Restoration Preset values after wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly
Display Contents
condition procedure restoration without errors.
The preset value at An external power supply is required in order to run the main
Malfunctioning Enter front start-up before the unit.
Err-00
CPU reset key or CPU malfunction Power should be applied between
OFF occurred. 5
restart terminals (1) and (2). Terminal (1) acts 1 2 3 4
Malfunctioning counter 6
Err-01 0 as the positive connection and terminal
memory*
(2) as the negative.
* Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM’s life has expired. Operating voltage

2) After turning the counter off, make sure that any resulting
induced voltage or residual voltage is not applied to power
supply terminals (1) through (2). (If the power supply wire is
wired parallel to the high voltage wire or power wire, an induced
voltage may be generated at the power supply terminal.)
3) Have the power supply voltage pass through a switch or relay
so that it is applied at one time.
110 Precautions in using the LC2H series
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC2H SERIES
Cautions for use
1. Insulation sheet
Before using a panel mounting type,
please pull and remove the insulation
sheet from the side of the product in the
direction of the arrow.
In consideration that the product might be
stored for long periods without being
used, an insulation sheet is inserted
before shipping. Remove the insulation
sheet and press the front reset button.
• LC2H total counter (one-touch
installation type)
Counters
Reset button
Insulation sheet
• LC2H total counter (installation
frame type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
2. Waterproof construction
• LC2H total counter (installation
frame type)
The operation part of the panel
installation type (installation frame type)
is constructed to prevent water from
entering the unit and a rubber gasket is
provided to prevent water from entering
the gap between the unit and the panel
cutout.
There must be sufficient pressure applied
to the rubber gasket to prevent water
from entering.
Be sure to use the mounting
reinforcement screws when installing the
mounting frame (ATH3803).
Note: The one-touch installation type is
not waterproof.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
• LC2H preset counter
1) The front plate will not be waterproof
when this product is installed on a panel.
To make the front plate waterproof,
please install the following.
When using the waterproof type (IP66:
panel front only), install the counter to the
front plate with mounting frame ATH3803
(sold separately) and rubber gasket
ATH3804 (sold separately). Be sure to
tighten using mounting screws.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
Rubber gasket (ATH3804)
When installing the mounting frame
and rubber gasket please remove the
pre-attached o-ring.
2) Panel installation order
(1) Remove o-ring.
(2) Place rubber gasket.
(3) Insert counter into panel.
(4) Insert mounting frame from the
rear.
(5) Secure with mounting screws (two
locations)
3. Do not use in the following
environments
1) In places where the temperature
changes drastically.
2) In places where humidity is high and
there is the possibility of dew.
(When dew forms the display may vanish
and other display errors may occur.)
4. Conditions of use
1) Do not use on places where there is
flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust,
presence of oil, or where the unit might
be subject to strong vibrations or shocks.
2) Since the cover is made of
polycarbonate resin, do not use in places
where the unit might come into contact
with or be exposed to environments that
contain organic solvents such as methyl
alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong
alkali substances such as ammonia and
caustic soda.
LC2H
5. Cautions regarding battery
replacement
1) Remove wiring before replacing the
battery. You may be electrocuted if you
come into contact to a part where high
voltage is applied.
2) Make sure you are not carrying a static
electric charge when replacing the
battery.
3) Battery replacement procedure
For LC2H total counter (one-touch
installation type)
(1) Remove the up/down hook of the
case using a tool.
(2) Pull the unit away from the case.
(3) Remove the battery from the side of
the unit. Do not touch the display or
other parts.
(4) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(5) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(6) After replacing the battery, return
the unit to the case. Verify that the
hook of the case has properly
engaged.
(7) Before using, press the reset button
on the front.
Tool
1
2
1
3
6
113
 Precautions in using the LC2H series 111

LC2H
For LC2H total counter 6. Terminal connection
1
(installation frame type) Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
(1) Remove the battery cover from the of 0.8 N·cm or less.
case.
(2) Remove the battery from the side of
the case. The battery will come
loose if you put the battery side face
down and lightly shake the unit.
(3) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(4) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(5) After replacing the battery, return 2
the battery cover to the case. Verify “+” side
that the hook of the battery cover is
properly engaged.
(6) Before using press the reset button
5
on the front. “−” side

Counters
6

Options
1. Accessories (for LC2H total 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
counter) Mounting frame
Pa
Panel cover (black) CR2n4asonic (Suitable for installation frame type LC2H
3V 77
JAPA
N
total counter and LC2H preset counter)
COUNTER

Part No.: ATH3802

RESET
LC2H
Part No.: AEL3801
You can change the design of the front
panel by replacing it with this black panel
cover. The counter comes with an ash
gray panel cover as standard.
Note: No panel cover accessory (black) is available
for the LC2H preset counter.
Packaged with the LC2H (excluding the
PC board mounting type).
Warning
• Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
positioned correctly. Part No.: ATH3803
Packaged with the mounting bracket type
• Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to LC2H total counter
come into contact with heat.
• The battery is not rechargeable. Rubber gasket
(Suitable for installation bracket type
LC2H total counter and LC2H preset
counter)

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LC2H total counter

114
112 Hour meters selector chart

Types DIN 24 × 48 size Hour Meters DIN 52 × 52 size Hour Meters

Name of product LH2H Hour Meters LH2H Preset Hour Meters TH 13 Hour Meter TH23 Hour Meter

Appearance

Front section of part Panel PC board

number mounting type mounting type ATH3 TH13 series TH23 series
Flush mounting type: 0 to 999999.9 hours/
0 to 999999.9 hours/0 to 3999 days 23.9 hours (selectable) 0 to 3999 days 23.9 hours (selectable)
Counting range 0 to 999 hours 59 min 59 sec/0 to 9999 hours 59.9 min (selectable) 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours
PC board mounting type: 0 to 999 hours 59 min 59 sec/
0 to 999999.9 hours/9999 hours 59.9 min (different type) 0 to 9999 hours 59.9 min (selectable)
Big 7-digit display, 8.7 mm tall display
Bright, 2-color back light (voltage input type) Preset function equipped in half With zero reset function
Features For controlling total integrated hours
Plenty of input methods size For controlling measured integrated hours
• Non-voltage input, Voltage input, free voltage input
Driving method Quartz oscillation type Quartz oscillation type AC motor AC motor
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition or subtraction Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
Flush mounting type: Unnecessary
(Built-in battery) 100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC, 100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC,
Voltage 24 V DC
Power PC board mounting type: 3 V DC 115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
(Battery is externally installed.)
Frequency — — Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Counting integral/ ±0.01% ±50 ms in case of power on start Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency
±100 ppm (25°C)
Counting max. speed ±0.01% ±30 ms in case of input signal start
Min. counting unit 0.1 h, 0.1 min, 1 s 0.1 h, 0.1 min, 1 s 0.1 h 0.1 h
Reset input Push button and external reset input terminal Push button and external reset input terminal — Manual reset
Max. power consumption — Max. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Flush mounting type: 55 g 135 g
Weight 50 g 130 g
PC board mounting type: 15 g
Both the TH13 and 23 series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the voltage
Remarks
and frequency required.
The third number from the front of the part number indicates the required voltage as follows: 4:100
— — V, 5:200 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 V (for 50 Hz only) or 115 V to 120 V (for 60 Hz only), 8:220 V, 9:240 V
The fourth number from the front of the part number indicates the required frequency as follows:
5:50 Hz. 6:60 Hz
Ex.) The part number for the TH13 series of 220 V & 50 Hz specification is TH1385.
Hour Meters

HOUR METERS SELECTOR CHART

Page P. 116 P. 122 P. 131 P. 131

Types DIN 48 × 48 size Hour Meters

Name of product TH14 Hour Meter TH24 Hour Meter TH40 Hour Meters

Appearance

TH14 series TH24 series TH40 series

Reset side
0 to 9999.9 hours
Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours
Without reset side
0 to 99999.9 hours
Composite function for total
With zero reset function
For controlling total accumulated hours
Features For controlling measured
integrated hours monitoring and measuring
integrated hours
each zero reset
Driving method AC motor AC motor AC motor
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC,
48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC,
Voltage
Power 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC,
200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Frequency 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common)
Counting integral/ Synchronizing with power Synchronizing with power Synchronizing with power
Counting max. speed supply frequency supply frequency supply frequency
Min. counting unit 0.1 h 0.1 h 0.1 h
Reset input — Manual reset Manual reset
Max. power consumption Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Weight 145 g 150 g 160 g

The TH50 series displays

— —
time in minute.
Remarks
The TH14, 24, 40, 63, and 64 series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the voltage required as follow
1:100 V, 2:200 V, 3:12 V, 4:24 V, 5:48 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 to 120 V, 8:220 V, 9:240 V,
Ex.) The part number of the TH24 series with 220 V is TH248. When “S” is specified at the end of the part number, a silver pane
Page P. 133 P. 133 P. 135
 x
Precautions in using the LC2H series 113

Types DIN 24 × 48 size Hour Meters

Name of product TH63 Hour Meters TH64 Hour Meter HOUR METERS SELECTOR CHART
Types DIN 52 × 52 size Hour Meters TH Hour Meter: Round type
Name of product TH13 Hour Meter TH23 Hour Meter DC Hour Meter

Appearance

Appearance
Front section of part
number TH63 series TH64 series

Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours

TH13 series TH23 series TH8 series
Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours
With zero reset functionWith zero reset function
Features For For
controlling totaltotal
controlling integrated
integrated hours Driven on DC power
Features For controlling
Formeasured
controllingintegrated
measured integrated hours
Driving method AC motor hours AC motor Ceramic oscillation + AC motor
Counting
Driving direction
method Addition
AC motor (UP) AC moto Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
Counting direction 100 VAddition
AC, 200 (UP)
V AC, 110 V AC, Additio100
n V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC,
Voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC
115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Power 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC,
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz —
48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC,
Voltage
Counting integral/
Power 110 V AC, with
Synchronizing 115 power
to 120 supply
V AC, frequency110 V AC, 115 to 120 with
Synchronizing V AC,power supply frequency ±0.2% (25°C)
Counting max. speed 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Min. counting unit 0.1
50/60Hz (common) h 0.1 h 0.1 h
Frequency 50/60Hz (c
Reset input — Manual reset —
Counting integral/ Synchronizing with power supply Synchronizing with power supply
Max. power
Counting consumption
max. speed frequency Approx. 1.5 W frequency Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Weight
Min. counting unit 130
0.1 h g 0.1 135 g 170 g
Reset input Both the TH13 and 23 — series have numbers at the endManual of the part
resetnumber that indicate the voltage
and frequency required.
Max. power consumption
Remarks The third number Approx.
from 1.5the W Approx.the required voltage as follows: 4:100
front of the part number indicates
V, 5:200 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 V (for 50 Hz only) or 115 V to 120 V (for 60 Hz only), 8:220 V, 9:240 V —
Weight 80 g 90 g
The fourth number from the front of the part number indicates the required frequency as follows:
5:50
TheHz, 6:60 Hzat the end of the part number indicate voltage.
numbers

Hour Meters
Remarks Ex.) Thethe
partremarks
numberabove.)
for the TH13 series of 220 V & 50 Hz specification is TH1385.
(See
Page P. 1P3.7166 P. 166 P. 178
Page P. 137

Types TH Hour Meter: Round type

Name of product TH8 DC Hour Meter

Types DIN 52 × 52 size Hour Meters

Appearance
Name of product TH13 Hour Meter TH23 Hour Meter

TH8 series
Counting range 0 to 9999.9 hours
Appearance
Features Driven on DC power

Driving method Ceramic oscillation + AC motor

Counting direction Addition (UP)
TH13 series TH23 series
Voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC
Counting range
Power 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours
Frequency — With zero reset function
Features
Counting integral/ For controlling total integrated hours
±0.2% (25°C) For controlling measured integrated hours
Counting max. speed
Driving method AC motor AC motor
Min. counting unit 0.1 h
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
Reset input —
100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC, 100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC,
Voltage
Max. power consumption 115 to Approx.
120 V AC,1.5220
W V AC, 240 V AC 115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Power
Weight 170 gz or 60 Hz
Frequency 50 H 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Counting integral/
Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency
Counting max. speed
Remarks
Min. counting unit — 0.1 h 0.1 h
Reset input — Manual reset
Max. power consumption Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Weight 130 g 135 g
Page P. 139
Both the TH13 and 23 series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the voltage
and frequency required.
Remarks The third number from the front of the part number indicates the required voltage as follows: 4:100
V, 5:200 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 V (for 50 Hz only) or 115 V to 120 V (for 60 Hz only), 8:220 V, 9:240 V
The fourth number from the front of the part number indicates the required frequency as follows:
5:50 Hz, 6:60 Hz
Ex.) The part number for the TH13 series of 220 V & 50 Hz specification is TH1385.
Page P. 166 P. 166

147
 114 LH2H

LH2H
LH2H

DIN HALF SIZE LH2H

DIN HALF SIZE LH2H
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
DIN HALF SIZE HOUR METER
Panel mounting type
One-touch installation type

Features
Features 1. 8.7 mm Character Height
(previously 7 mm .343 inch)
5. Battery Replacement Easy on
Environment
1. 8.7 mm Character Height 5. Battery Replacement Easy on
Easy-to-read character height increased To replace battery simply remove body
Features
(previously 7 mm .343 inch) Environment
from 7 mm to 8.7 mm .276 inch to .343 for the one-touch installation type, and
››
Easy-to-read character height increased
8.7from
mm 7Character
Easy-to-read
mm to 8.7Height
mm .276
Panel mounting type
character
(previously
height increased
inch.
from 7
To replace battery simply remove body
inch to .3437 mm) for the one-touch installation
mm to 8.7
installation
type, type,
remove battery lid for the installation
and and remove battery lid for the installation
frame type.
inch. frame type.
remove battery lid for the installation
››
8.7mm
One-touch installation type 6. Screw Terminals Designed for
pe mm. frame type. .343inch
Screw Terminals Safety
Designed for Safety
n type 8.7mm 6. Screw Terminals Designed for protection.
Built in finger Built in finger protection.
.343inch Safety
Plenty
Built of Digitsprotection.
in finger ›› 7. Panel Covers Replacable
Panel Covers Replacable
(Standard color is ash gray.)
Plenty of Digits 7. Panel Covers Replacable(Standard color is ash gray.)
Change the panel design by replacing
(Standard color is ashChangegray.) the panel design by replacing with a black panel
with a black panel cover.
Change the7panel design
digits by replacing
cover. 8. Conforms to IP66 Protective
››
Panel mounting type
with a black panel cover.
7 digits
Installation frame type 3. Select by switch between two
Conforms time to IP66Construction (Only installation
Protective Construction (Only frame
pe 8. Conforms to IP66 Protective
ranges in a single meter. installation frame type.)
type.)(Front
(Front panel
panel surface)
surface)
ype 3. Select by switch between two time 0 to 999999.9h/0 Construction (Only installation frame
››
ranges in a single meter.
Select by switch between two time ranges 0 toin
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable 4. Panel
type.) (Front
a single
999h59m59s/0
9. Input Methods
››
to 3999d23.9h switchable
panel surface)
9. Input Methods
Input Methods 1) Non-voltage input method
to 9999h59.9m switchable
1) Non-voltage input methodinput method
meter. Mounting Type Features 2 2) Voltage
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable 1) Non-voltage input method
2) Voltage input method
0 to4.999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchableInstallation Methods 3) Free voltage input method
Panel Mounting Type Features 2 2) Voltage input method
0 toInstallation
999h59m59s/0
PC boardMethods to 9999h59.9m
mounting type Comes with very easy one-touch
switchable 3) Free voltage input 10. method
Backlight Type Added to Series
3) Free voltage input method
››
Hour Meters

››
Comes with very easy one-touch
installation type and also installation
Backlight
10. Backlight Type Added to Series Type and Now
Added 2-color
to Series Switchable
and (green/
Now 2-color Swit-
LCD

type Panel Mounting Type Features 2 Installation

frameMethods
type that uses the frame on the red)
installation type and also installation
Comes with very easy one-touch installation and Now
type and also 2-color Switchable
chable (green/
(green/red)
timer/counter. Choose a method that Easy viewing even in dark places and
frame type thattype
usesthat
the uses
framethe on frame
the on the red) Easy viewing evenswitchable
in dark places andgreen
switchable between
installation frame suits thetimer/coun-
application. between and red
timer/counter. Choose a method that Easy viewing even in dark greenplaces
and and
red (Voltage input type).
ter. Choose a method that suits the application. (Voltage input type).

y information
RoHSsuits
››
the application.
Directive compatibility information
››
switchable between green and red
Replacement Easy on Environment (Voltage input type). Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE marking
http://www.nais-e.com/
Battery
11. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE
marking.
To replace battery simply remove body for the one-touch 11. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE
.com/ marking.
Product chart
T
Type Standard type Backlight type
V
Voltage input type Free voltage input type V
Voltage input type
TypeInstallation type Standard type Non-voltage input type Backlight type
(4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
Voltage input type Free voltage input type Voltage input type
Panel
Non-voltageOne-touch
input typeinstallation type
(4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
mounting
lation type type Installation frame type

e type PC board mounting type — — —

Product types — — —

1. Panel mounting type

1) One-touch installation type
1 Standard type
pe
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
No. digits 0 to 999999.9h/0
surement time range reset
to 3999d23.9h
Front Measurement time range switchable
Input method Front reset Part No. Input method LH2H-FE-DHK
Part No.
Non-voltage input type
0 t o 99 9 h 5 9m 5 9s / 0 t o 9 9 9 9 h 59 . 9 m switchable LLH2H-FE-DHK
H2H-FE-HMK
0 to 3999d23.9h switchable 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK
Non-voltage input type
0 to 999999.9h/0 to Non-voltage
3999d23.9h input type
switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-DL
s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchabl0
7 digits e to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable Yes LH2H-FE
Voltage -HMtype
input K (4.5 to 30 V DC) LH2H-FE-HMK
0
0 tto
o9 99h59m59s/to
999999.9h/0 0 t3999d23.9h
o 9999h59.9switchable
m switchable LLH2H-FE-DHK-DL
H2H-FE-HMK-DL
0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-DL
7 digits 0 to Yes
999999.9h/0 to Voltage
3999d23.9h type (4.5 to 30 V DC) Yes
input switchable Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LH2H-FE-DHK-FV
s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchabl0e to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2Hvoltage
Free -FE-HMinput
K-DLtype (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LH2H-FE-HMK-DL
0 t o 99 9 h 5 9m 5 9s / 0 t o 9 9 9 9 h 59 . 9 m switchable LLH2H-FE-DHK-FV
H2H-FE-HMK-FV
0 to 3999d23.9h switchable 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-FV
Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchabl0e to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK-FV LH2H-FE-HMK-FV
 x
LH2H 115

LH2H
2 Backlight type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-DL-B
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK-DL-B

2) Installation frame type

1 Standard type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK
Non-voltage input type
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-DL
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-DL
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-FV
Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-FV

2 Backlight type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-DL-B
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-DL-B

2. PC board mounting type

No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h LH2H-C-H-N
7 digits No Non-voltage input type
0 to 9999h59.9m LH2H-C-HM-N

Specifications
1. Panel mounting type
Type Standard type Backlight type Standard type
Item Non-voltage input Voltage input Free voltage type
No. digits 7 digits

Hour Meters
External power supply Not required (built-in battery)

LCD
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h (Switchable by switch)
Measurement time range
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m (Switchable by switch) Separate product type
Min. input signal width 200 ms
High level:
Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC Low level:
connection
Start 0 to 2.4 V AC/DC
input When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Approx. 4.7 kΩ —
When open:
Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V — —
Min. input signal width 100 ms
Non-voltage input using Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC
connection connection
Reset
input When shorted: When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Appox. 4.7 kΩ
When open: When open:
Max. 750 kΩ Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max 0.5 V — Max. 0.5 V
7-segment LCD
Display method 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD
With green/red backlight
Between charged and
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute. uncharged parts:
2,000 V AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.
Backlight power — 24 V DC (±10%) —
Protective construction (Note) IEC Standard IP66 (only panel front: when using rubber gasket)
Accessories (Note) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket
Battery life 10 years (at 25°C )
Note) Only for installation frame type.

149
116 LH2H

LH2H
2. PC board mounting type
Type
PC board mounting type
Item
Input method Non DC voltage input
No. digits 7 digits
Rated operation voltage 3 V DC
Allowable operation voltage range 2.7 to 3.3 V DC
Current consumption Max. 20 µA (max. 200 µA during reset input)
Measurement time range 0 to 999999.9h 0 to 9999h59.9m
Min. input signal width 200 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Start
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V
Min. input signal width 10 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Reset
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual power Max. 0.5 V
Break down voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged par ts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.

3. Common
Type
Panel mounting/PC board mounting types
Item
Time accuracy ±100 ppm (25°C )
Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to +55°C (without frost or dew)
Hour Meters
LCD

Storage temperature –25 to +65°C (without frost or dew)

Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
EMC 8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (90 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

150
 x
LH2H 117

LH2H
Part names
1. Front reset button HOUR METER Time range switch
Reset the elapsed time. It does not work
when the lock switch is ON. Be aware
that battery life will decrease if this switch RESET h m s
LH2H
is used frequently.
2. Lock switch (Refer to chart on
right.) Front reset button Time unit seal

Disable the front reset button. Lock switch

Note) Turn ON at the LCD side (reset disabled) and
OFF at the terminal block side (reset enabled).
3. Time range switch (See chart on
right).
Switch the time range. 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h 0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m
Note) Always press the front reset button when
operating the time range switch. (Terminal block side) OFF
4. Time unit sticker
Lock switch
Unit seals are included in the package. (Unit display 1)
Affix them in accordance with the time
(LCD side) ON
range.

(Terminal block side) 0 to 999999.9h (Terminal block side) 0 to 9999h59.9m

Count speed
switch
(Unit display 2)
(LCD side) 0 to 3999d23.9h (LCD side) 0 to 999h59m59s

Notes) 1. Default setting when shipped.

2. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±1.0

Hour Meters
1. Panel mounting type

LCD
• External dimensions • Panel installation diagram
1) One-touch installation type
44.8
M3.5

Panel (1 to 4.5mm
54.4 Rubber spacer
thickness)

Note) When installing to a 4.5 mm thick panel, remove the rubber spacer first.

When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure

10.4 (44) 5 48
that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
To prevent the installation spring
HOUR METER from pinching the rubber gasket:
22 24 1. Set the rubber gasket on both
RESET
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
LH2H

7 Reset button 2. Confirm that the installation

spring is not pinching the rubber
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
rear of the timer unit.

151
118 LH2H

LH2H
2) Installation frame type • Panel mounting diagram
44.8 Mounting screws Mounting frame
M3.5 (found on mounting bracket) ATH3803 (included)

54.4 37

Rubber gasket
Panel ATH3804 (included)
(1 to 4.5mm thickness)

10.4 44 5 48

HOUR METER

22 24
RESET

LH2H

7 Reset button

• Panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut-out is shown below. (Only installation frame type.)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber packing (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type.)

22.2+0.5
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0

60 min.
45+0.5
0
Hour Meters

Notes) 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm.

2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
LCD

22.2 +0.5
0

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

1) Standard type
Non voltage input type Voltage input type Free voltage input type

Start input Reset input Start input Reset input Start input Reset input
+V +V

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4

0V 0V
W -R are connected internally.

2) Backlight type
Voltage input type

Backlight
<When green> <When red>
0V +V
Start input Reset input
+V +V
5 5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6
0V 0V

0V +V

152
 x
LH2H 119

LH2H
2. PC board mounting type General tolerance: ±1.0 mm
• External dimensions
PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW)
33.02±0.3
5.08 ±0.3
5.08 ±0.3
Mounting area
2.54
0.6±0.1 1.9
DIP switch × 8

2.54
3.3±0.3 15.24 Connection sockets
28 pin DIP terminal
8-0.8 dia.
1.9
43.4 17.3 0.5±0.3
5.08 5.19
5.19 5.08
19 15.24±0.3 33.02
HOUR METER LH2H

0.3±0.1
General tolerance: ±0.1

Note: The AXS212811K is recommended as a compatible connection socket.

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

15 17 26 28
Start input Reset input
14 12 3 1

Q -E , } -w , e -t and S -F are connected internally.

An external power supply is required.

Input method
1. Standard type
Non-voltage input type
Panel mounting type PC board mounting type
Transistor input Transistor input
Contact input Contact input

Hour Meters
NPN transistor NPN transistor

LCD
15 17 26 28 15 17 26 28
Start Reset Start 1 2 3 4 Reset Start Reset Start Reset
1 2 3 4 input input input input
input input input input 14 12 3 1 14 12 3 1

0V 0V
(W and R are connected internally.) (W and R are connected internally.) 3V DC 3V DC

Notes) 1. When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals 1 and 3 on the panel mounting type and terminals 15 to 17 and 26 to 28 on the PC board
mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.
2. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)

Voltage input type

Transistor input Free voltage input type
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor
+V +V +V +V
Start Reset
input input Start 1 2 3 4 Reset
Reset input

input input
Start input

1 2 3 4 Start Reset 1 2 3 4
input 1 2 3 4 input
or or or

Notes) 1. 2 and 4 . (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
2. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
3. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

153
120 LH2H

LH2H
2. Backlight type
Voltage input type
Transistor input Backlight connection
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor

+V +V Green Red
+V +V
Start Reset
24V DC
input input Start 1 2 3 4 Reset
input input 5 5
5 Start 5 Reset
1 2 3 4 input 1 2 3 4 input 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6 6

24V DC

Notes) 1. Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC voltage for the backlight.
2. 2 and 4 . (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
3. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
4. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

Explanation of operation
1. Time measuring takes place when the
ON ON
start input is ON.
2. When the elapsed (measured) time Start input OFF

reaches full scale it returns to “0”, and ON

then measuring starts again from “0”. Reset input OFF
3. When reset input is ON, the display
becomes “0”. You cannot measure during Full scale
reset input.
For PC board mounting type the display
disappears while the reset input is ON; PC board type
however, the display reads “0” when the
Elapsed time
reset input turns OFF.
4. Press the front reset button if you want 0
Hour Meters

to perform a manual reset (for panel

LCD

installation type)

154

Cautions for use
1. Non-voltage input type
For both panel mounting and PC
board mounting types
1) Never apply voltage to the non-voltage
input type. This will damage the internal
elements.
2) Since the current flow is very small
from the start input and reset input
terminals (1 and 3 on the panel
mounting type and terminals e to t and
S to F on the PC board mounting type)
please use relays and switches with high
contact reliability. When inputting with an
open collector of a transistor, use a
transistor for small signals in which ICBO
is 1 µA or less and always input with no
voltage.
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input
lines to the start and reset inputs as short
as possible and avoid running them
together with high voltage and power
transmission lines or in a power conduit.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
exceeds 500 pF (10 m for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). In particular,
when using shielded wiring, be careful of
the capacitance between wires.
PC board mounting type
1) For external power supply use
manganese dioxide or lithium batteries
(CR type: 3V).
2) Always reset after external power is
applied and confirm that the display
reads “0”.
3) Make the wiring from the battery to the
hour meter unit as short as absolutely
possible. Also, be careful of polarity.
4) Calculate battery life with the following
formula.
t = A/I
t: battery life [h]
I: LH2H current consumption [mA]
A: battery capacity until minimum
operation voltage is reached [mAh]
5) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do
not dip solder. With the tip of the
soldering iron at 300°C perform
soldering within 3 seconds (for 30 to 60
W soldering iron).
2. Voltage input type
1) Be aware that applying more than 30 V
DC to start input terminals 1 and 2 , and
reset input terminals 3 and 4 will cause
damage to the internal elements.
2) For external resetting use H level
(application of 4.5 to 30 V DC) between
reset terminals 3 and 4 of the rear
terminals. In this case, connect + to
terminal 3 and – to terminal 4 . This is
the valid polarity; therefore, the hour
meter will not work if reversed.
x LH2H 121
LH2H
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input 5. Backlight luminance
lines to the start and reset inputs as short To prevent varying luminance among
as possible and avoid running them backlights when using multiple Backlight
together with high voltage and power types, please use the same backlight
transmission lines or in a power conduit. power supply.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
5 5
exceeds 500 pF (10 m for 24V DC 2 2 2
6
2
6
24V DC
parallel wires of 2 mm2). Green Red
3. Free voltage input type
1) Use start input terminals 1 and 2 for 6. Acquisition of CE marking
free voltage input and reset terminals 3 Please abide by the conditions below
and 4 for non-voltage input. when using in applications that comply
2) Be aware that the application of with EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1
voltage that exceeds the voltage range of 1) Ambient conditions
the H level to the start input terminal, and • Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
the application of voltage to the reset • Indoor use
input terminal, can cause damage to the • Acceptable temperature and humidity
internal elements. range: –10 to +55°C, 35 to 85%RH (with
3) Since the current flow is very small no condensation at 20°C)
from reset input terminal 3 , please use • Under 2000 m elevation
relays and switches with high contact 2) Use the main unit in a location that
reliability. matches the following conditions.
4) When inputting a reset with an open • There is minimal dust and no corrosive
collector of a transistor, use a transistor gas.
for small signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or • There is no combustible or explosive
less and always input with no voltage. gas.
5) To reset externally, short reset input • There is no mechanical vibration or
terminals 3 and 4 on the rear. impacts.
Hour Meters
6) Input uses a high impedance circuit; • There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
LCD
therefore, erroneous operation may occur • Located away from large-volume
if the influence of induction voltage is electromagnetic switches and power
present. If you plan to use wiring for the lines with large electrical currents.
input signal that is 10 m or longer (wire 3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
capacitance 120 pF/m at normal EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
temperature), we recommend the use of input section.
a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder 4) Applied voltage should be protected
resistor. with an overcurrent protection device
4. How to reset multiple panel (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
mounting type counters all at once that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
(input is the same for count) (Free voltage input type)
Non-voltage input type 7. Terminal connection
Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
D D D
Tr of 0.8 N·cm or less.
3 4 3 4 3 4 or
Notes) 1. Use the following as a guide for choosing
transistors used for input (Tr).
Leakage current < 1 µA
2. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the
forward voltage so that the voltage between
terminals 3 and 4 during reset input meets
the standard value (0.5 V).
( At IF = 20 µA, forward voltage 0.1 and
higher.)
Voltage input type
R
+V +V
3 4 3 4 3 4
Tr
or 3 4
Note) Make sure that H (reset ON) level is at least
4.5 V.
155
 122 LH2H

LH2H
LH2H LH2H
PRESET HOUR METERDIN HALF SIZE
LH2H LH2H
PRESETHOUR
HOUR METERS
METER Hour MeterHour Met
LH2H
Panel mounting type
One-touch installation type

PRESET HOUR METER

Hour Meter
Features Features
• Preset function equipped 1. in8.7
halfmm Character • 8.7Height
mm 0.343 inch Character Height
5. Battery Replacement Ea
size (24 × 48 mm 0.945 × 1.890 inch). (previously
(previously 7 mm .343 inch) 7 mm 0.276 inch)
Environment
Features
Features • Display has backlight for instant Easy-to-read character Easy-to readincreased
height character height increased
To replace battery simply re
››
• Preset
Preset function
size
(24 x(24
function equipped
24×mm).
equippedin inhalf
48 mm 0.945 × 1.890 inch).
halfsize recognition.
››
• 8.7 mm 0.343 inch Character
(previously
Time counting7 mm 0.276
from 7Height
8.7 mm Character Height
inch.
inch)
from 7 mm to 8.7
mm to 8.7 mm .276 inch to .343 mm 0.276 for thetoone-touch
inch 0.343
inch. (previously 7 mm) remove battery lid for the ins
installation
Easy-to read character height increased from 7frame
Timing up mm totype.
8.7
››
• Display has backlight for instant Panel mounting
Easy-to read type character height increased
Display has backlight for instant One-touch
recognition installation type mm.
Red or (Green)
8.7mm 6. 8.7mm
Screw Terminals Design
recognition. from 7 mm to 8.7 mm 0.276(backlight) inch to 0.343
inch. .343inch .343inch
Safety
Time counting Timing up Built in finger protection.
Red or (Green) Green or (Red) Plenty
8.7mm of Digits
• Plenty of Digits 7. Panel Covers Replacabl
(backlight) (backlight) .343inch
(Lit or Flashing) (Standard color is ash gra
Change the panel design by
with a black panel cover.
Green or (Red)
Panel
• Plenty of Digits
mounting type Red or (Green) 7 digits 7 digits 8. Conforms to IP66 Prote
(backlight) (Lit or Flashing) (backlight)
Installation frame
Green or Redtype
can 3. Select by switch between
• Select two time
by switch between Construction
two time (Only install
meter.in a single meter. type.) (Front panel surface
be selected at setup.
ranges in a single
Red or (Green) ››
7 digitsSelect 0 to 999999.9h/0
by switch between
ranges
to03999d23.9h
twoswitchable
time ranges
to 999999.9h/0 in9.
to 3999d23.9h a Input
singleMethods
1) Non-voltage input method
(backlight) (Lit 0ortoFlashing)
meter 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable
Selectable
Hour Meters

Green or Red can

be selected at setup. • Select by switch between two
4.Flashing
Panel time
Mounting Type Features 2 2) Voltage input method
0 to or 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h Selectable
LCD

ranges in a single meter.

Lit can 0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m
Installation
be selected at setup. Methods 3) Free voltage input metho
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m Selectable
Selectable
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h Comes with very easy one-touch 10. Backlight Type Added
(Lit or Flashing)
Lit or Flashing can
PC board mounting type
Selectable ››
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m
installation
Conforms
surface)
• Conforms
type and
to IP66 Protective to IP66 Protective
also installation
Construction and Now
(Front
Construction (Front panel surface)
frame type that uses the frame on the red)
panel2-color Switchab
be selected at setup.
Selectable timer/counter. Choose Weatherproofing
a method supportedEasy
that by using
viewing even in dark p
Weatherproofing supported by using optional mounting
• Conforms to IP66 Protective suits the optional
application. mounting bracket and rubber between green a
switchable
bracket and rubber gasket
››
Construction (Front panel surface) gasket (Voltage input type).
RoHS Directive compatibility information Includes reassuring• Includes lock mode and lock switch
reassuring lock11. to
mode and with UL, c-U
Weatherproofing supported by using Compliant
http://www.nais-e.com/ prevent erroneous lock switch
operation to prevent erroneous
marking.
optional mounting bracket and rubber
gasket Screw terminals are operation. constructed to protect fingers to ensure
safety. • Screw terminals are constructed to
Product chart
• Includes reassuring lock mode and
RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/ operation.
››
Type
erroneous with UL,protect
lock switch to prevent Compliant fingers to ensure safety.
c-UL and CE marking
• Compliant
Standardwith
type UL, c-UL and CE Back
• Screw terminals are constructed to marking.
Voltage input type Free voltage input type Voltag
Installation type Non-voltage input type
protect fingers to ensure safety. (4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to
rmation Panel One-touch installation typeUL, c-UL and CE
m/ Product types mounting
• Compliant
marking.
with
type Installation frame type
Measurement time
No. digits Operation mode
PC board mounting type
Output Operating voltage —
Part No. —
range

Product types
0 to 999999.9h/
0 to 3999d23.9h G (Totalizing ON delay) LH2HP-FEW-DHK-B-DC24V
Operation mode
7 digits
selectableOutput 1. Panel mounting
BOperating
(Signal ON type
delay)
voltage Part No.
Transistor (1a) 24 V DC
0 to 999h59m59s/ 1) One-touch installation type
F (Signal flicker)
0 to 9999h59.9m E (Pulse
1 Standard type ON delay) LH2HP-FEW-HMK-B-DC24V
G (Totalizing ON delay) selectable LH2HP-FEW-DHK-B-DC24V
B (Signal ON delay) No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method P
Transistor (1a) 24 V DCMounting frame ATH3803
F (Signal flicker) Options 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable Use for waterproofing (front panel surface) LH2H-F
E (Pulse ON delay) R u bb e r g a s k e t Non-voltage input type ATH3804
0 to 999h59m59sLH2HP-FEW-HMK-B-DC24V
/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F
Note: Mounting
Note: Mountingframe
frameand
andrubber
rubbergasket are
gasket notnot
are included.
included.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F
Mounting frame 7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m(front
Use for waterproofing 59s/0 panel 9h59.9m switcATH3803
to 999surface) hable LH2H-F
Rubber gasket 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable ATH3804 LH2H-F
are not included. Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F

148
 x Lh2H 123

LH2H
Specifications
Item Descriptions
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Rated power consumption Max. 1.5 W
Rated control output 100 mA 30 V DC
Time counting direction Addition or Subtraction (selectable by front switch)
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h (selectable by slide switch on side)
Measurement time range
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m (selectable by slide switch on side)
Star t input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
Rating Reset input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
• Non-voltage input using contacts or open-collector connection
Input signal • Input impedance; when shorted: Max. 1 kΩ, when open: Min. 100 kΩ
• Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
Totalizing ON delay, Signal ON delay, Signal flicker, Pulse ON delay
Operation mode
(selectable by front switch)
7-segment LCD
Display method
(Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for time up.)
Power failure emor y EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 operations or more)
Operating time fluctuation
±0.01% ±50 ms  Rated operating voltage: 
Voltage error
Time in case of power on start  85 to 110% 
accuracy Temperature error ±0.01% ±30 ms  Ambient temperature: 
Setting error
in case of input signal start  –10 to +55°C 
Contact arrangement 1 Form A (Open collector)
Electrical life (contact) 107 operations (at rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Electrical Break down voltage (Initial value) Between input and output: 1,500 V AC, for 1 min.
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between input and output: 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC)
Functional vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Destructive shock resistance Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)

Hour Meters
LCD
Operation temperature –10 to 55°C (without frost or dew)
Operating
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C (without frost or dew)
conditions
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket)
* The factory default preset value is set to 0.1.

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

157
124 LH2H

LH2H
Part names
1. Front reset key 7 6
This key resets the elapsed value. It does
not work when the lock switch is ON. HOUR METER

2. Mode key
Use to set preset values or to switch
between each mode.
RESET
MODE SET
LH2H
3. Setting key
Used to set digits of preset values or set 1 2 3 4 5

each mode.
4. Set key
Use to set preset values or to switch
between modes. : Default setting when shipped.
5. Time unit seal
LH2HP-FEW-DHK-B-DC24V LH2HP-FEW-HMK-B-DC24V
Unit seals are included in the package.
Affix them in accordance with the time (Terminal block side) OFF
Lock
range. switch
6. Lock switch 6
(unit
Disable the operation of the front panel display 1) (LCD side) ON
reset key and the mode key. With the lock
switch on, is displayed for about
two seconds when the reset key or mode Time (Terminal block side) 0 to 999999.9h (Terminal block side) 0 to 9999h59.9m
range
switch is operated. switch
7
7. Time range switch (unit
Switch the time range. display 2) (LCD side) 0 to 3999d23.9h (LCD side) 0 to 999h59m59s

Notes: 1. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

2. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the time range switch when the power is on. The
setting will become valid when the power is turned back on.

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±1.0
• External dimensions
44.8 M3.5
When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure
Hour Meters

that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
LCD

To prevent the installation spring

54.4 from pinching the rubber gasket:
1. Set the rubber gasket on both
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
10.4 44 5 48
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
HOUR METER

22 24
rear of the timer unit.
RESET

MODE SET LH2H

7

• Panel cut out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut out is shown below. (Only installation frame type)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber gasket (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type)

22.2+0.5
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0

60 min.
45+0.5
0

Notes: 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm .

2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
22.2+0.5
0

158

How to set
1. Preset value setting mode
This is the mode for setting preset values.
Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value.
1) Pressing the MODE key takes you to
the preset value setting mode.
Sample display in preset value
setting mode
(when preset value is 100.0h)
* The factory default preset value is set to 1.0.
2) Pressing the setting key moves the
flashing digit left by one. Following the
highest digit it returns to the lowest digit
and each time the digit setting key is
pressed it moves one to the left.
3) Pressing the set key increases the
value by one. (After 9 it returns to 0 and
then changes to 1, 2, 3, etc.)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the displayed preset value and returns
you to the regular operation mode.
5) In the preset value setting mode if you
do not operate the digit setting key or the
set key for ten seconds or more you will
be returned to regular operation. In this
case the preset value will not change.
2. Lock mode
This mode prohibits everything except
the preset value setting mode.
+
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the set key while holding
down the mode key takes you to the lock
mode.
x LH2H 125
LH2H
2) The display reads “Un-Lock” after 4) The backlight changes from flashing
entering the lock mode (initial setting). green to flashing red to lit green and to lit
red with each press of the setting key.
Display after entering lock mode
(Example showing “Un-Lock”.)
5) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the current backlight color and returns
3) Pressing the setting key changes the you to regular operation mode.
display between “ Lock” and “Un- Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
lock”. mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
(Example showing “ Lock”.)
4. Time counting direction setting
mode
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets This is the mode for setting addition or
the content displayed and returns you to subtraction.
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
+
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
the MODE key.
5) When the lock mode display reads 1) Pressing the SET key three times
“ Lock”, you will not be able to move while holding down the MODE key takes
to the backlight setting mode, the time you to the time counting direction setting
counting direction setting mode, or the mode.
operation setting mode. 2) The display after entering the time
3. Backlight setting mode counting direction setting mode reads
This is the mode for setting the backlight “ UP” (initial setting).
during time up.
Display after entering time counting
direction setting mode
+ (Example showing “UP”)
Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green
the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red 3) Pressing the setting key changes the
display to “dn” (subtraction) and pressing
1) Pressing the SET key two times while it again changes it to “UP” (addition). The
holding down the MODE key takes you to display alternates between “dn” and “UP”.
the backlight setting mode.
Hour Meters
2) The display in the backlight setting
LCD
(Example showing “dn”)
mode reads “ LEd”
Lock
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
Display after entering
the backlight setting mode. the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
3) The LED backlight will be red (initial Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
setting). mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
159
126 LH2H

LH2H
5. Operation mode
This sets the operation mode.
2) Lock mode
+ +
Press the SET key while pressing OP-G OP-B
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock Lock
the MODE key. OP-E OP-F
the MODE key.
When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than
1) Pressing the SET key four times while backlight setting mode.
holding down the MODE key takes you to 3) Backlight setting mode
the operation setting mode. +
2) The display reads “OP-G” (Totalizing Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green
the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red
ON delay) after entering the operation
Front panel reset key
setting mode.
4) Time counting direction setting mode
+
Regular operation mode
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
3) Pressing the setting key causes the
display to change as follows:
OP-B (Signal ON delay) 5) Operation setting mode
+
Press the SET key while pressing OP-G OP-B
the MODE key. OP-E OP-F

OP-F (Signal flicker)

Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key.
Lock mode Backlight setting mode
Operation setting mode Time counting direction setting mode

OP-E (Pulse ON delay) Please be aware that after doing a front Preset Output
Elapsed value
panel reset key and returning to regular value change
operation mode, the preset values, Lock mode × × ×
elapsed value and output will be as Backlight
OP-G (Totalizing ON delay) setting × × ×
shown in this table. mode
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
Time
the display content and returns you to counting Addition: “0”
Hour Meters

regular operation mode. direction × Subtraction: ON➝OFF

LCD

Note: You will not be returned to regular operation setting “Preset value”
mode if you do not press the front panel reset mode
key. Operation Addition: “0”
setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
mode “Preset value”
Note: “×” sign: No change

Changing the set time (preset value)

1. It is possible to change the set time
even during time delay with the timer.
However, be aware of the following
points.
1) If the set time is changed to less than
the elapsed time (elapsed value) with the
time delay set to the addition direction,
time delay will continue until the elapsed
time reaches full scale, returns to “0
(zero)”, and then reaches the new set
time.
If the set time is changed to a time above
the elapsed time, the time delay will
continue until the elapsed time reaches
the new set time.
2) If the time delay is set to the
subtraction direction, time delay will
continue until “0 (zero)” regardless of the
new set time.
2. If the set time is changed to “0 (zero)”,
the hour meter will operate differently
depending on the operation mode.
In the G (Totalizing ON delay), B (Signal
ON delay), and E (Pulse ON delay)
modes, the output turns ON when the
start input is ON. However, the output will
be OFF while reset is being input.
In the F (Signal flicker) mode, the flicker
operation will not work even if start input
is turned ON.

160
 x
Precautions in using the LH2H series 127

LH2H
Operation mode
Operation mode Explanation Time chart
• Elapsed value does not clear at power ON. ON

(Power outage countermeasure function) Power supply OFF

T=t1+t2 T>ta
Totalizing ON delay • The output remains ON even after the ON
Output OFF
power is OFF and restarted. T t1 t2 ta
G ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

• Time delay starts at start ON and output Power supply OFF

T T
Signal ON delay resets at start OFF. ON
Output OFF
• Time delay starts at reset OFF and power
B ON while start is ON.
ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

• Time delay starts at start ON. Power supply OFF

T>ta
Signal Flicker • After timer completion, control output ON
Output OFF
reverses, elapsed value clears, and time T T T ta
F delay starts.
ON
Reset OFF

• Ignores start input during time delay. ON

Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

• Time delay starts at start ON. Power supply OFF

Pulse ON delay • After timer completion, control output is ON

Output OFF
ON. T T T
E • Ignores start input during time delay.
ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

Hour Meters
LCD

161
128 Precautions in using the LH2H series

LH2H
Cautions for use
1. Input and output connection Also, use transistors with a residual 2) Output connection
1) Input connection voltage of less than 2 V when the Since the transistor output of hour meter
(1) Contact input transistor is on. is insulated from the internal circuitry by a
Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. * The short-circuit impedance should be less photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN
Since the contact’s bounce time leads than 1 kΩ. output or PNP (equal value) output.
directly to error in the timer operating (When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current As NPN output
time, use contacts with as short a bounce coming from the start input terminal is
Load
time as possible. approximately 5 mA and from the reset
5
input terminal is approximately 1.5 mA.) 1 2
6
3 4
Load’s power
supply

Start 5 Reset Also, the open-circuit impedance should

1 2 3 4
input 6 input
be more than 100 kΩ. As PNP output
5
(2) Non-contact input (Transistor input) Start
input 1 2 3 4
Reset
input 1 2
5
3 4
Load’s power
6 supply
Connect with an open collector. Use 6
Load
transistors whose characteristics satisfy
the criteria given below. (3) Input wiring
VCEO = Min. 20 V When wiring, use shielded wires or
IC = Min. 20 mA metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire
ICBO = Max. 6 µA lengths as short as possible.

2. Self-diagnosis function 4. Terminal connection

If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. 1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and
Output Restoration Preset values after wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly
Display Contents
condition procedure restoration without errors.
Preset value at Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of 0.8 N·cm or less.
Malfunctioning Enter front start-up before the The screws are M3.5.
Err-00
CPU reset key or CPU malfunction An external power supply is required in order to run the main
OFF
restart hour occurred unit.
Malfunctioning meter
Power should be applied between
Hour Meters

Err-01 0
memory* 5
terminals (1) and (2). Terminal (1) acts
LCD

1 2 3 4
* Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM’s life has expired. 6
as the positive connection and terminal
3. Power failure memory
(2) as the negative.
The EEP-ROM is overwriting with the following timing. Operating voltage
Operation mode Overwrite timing 2) After turning the hour meter off, make sure that any resulting
G (Totalizing ON delay) Change of preset value or when power is induced voltage or residual voltage is not applied to power
mode OFF after start and reset input turns ON
supply terminals (1) through (2). (If the power supply wire is
When power is OFF after changing preset wired parallel to the high voltage wire or power wire, an induced
Other modes
value
voltage may be generated at the power supply terminal.)
3) Have the power supply voltage pass through a switch or relay
so that it is applied at one time.

Compliance with the CE marking

• EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
The LH2H Preset Hour Meter conforms
to the EMC Directive as a simple hour
meter.
Applicable standards: EN61000-6-4,
EN61000-6-2

162

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LH2H SERIES
Cautions for use
1. Insulation sheet
Before using a panel mounting type,
please pull and remove the insulation
sheet in the direction of the arrow.
In consideration that the product might be
stored for long periods without being
used, an insulation sheet is inserted
before shipping. Remove the insulation
sheet and press the front reset button.
• LH2H hour meter (one-touch
installation type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
• LH2H hour meter (installation frame
type)
x
Precautions in using the LH2H series
• LH2H preset hour meter
1) When using the waterproof type (IP66:
panel front only), install the hour meter to
the front plate with mounting frame
ATH3803 (sold separately) and rubber
gasket ATH3804 (sold separately). Be
sure to tighten using mounting screws.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
Rubber gasket (ATH3804)
When installing the mounting frame
and rubber gasket please remove the
pre-attached o-ring.
2) Panel installation order
(1) Remove o-ring.
(2) Place rubber gasket.
(3) Insert hour meter into panel.
(4) Insert mounting frame from the
rear.
(5) Secure with mounting screws (two
locations)
3. Do not use in the following
environments
129
LH2H
5. Cautions regarding battery
replacement
1) Remove wiring before replacing the
battery. You may be electrocuted if you
come into contact to a part where high
voltage is applied.
2) Make sure you are not carrying a static
electric charge when replacing the
battery.
3) Battery replacement procedure
For LH2H hour meter (one-touch
installation type)
(1) Remove the up/down hook of the
case using a tool.
(2) Pull the unit away from the case.
(3) Remove the battery from the side of
the unit. Do not touch the display or
other parts.
(4) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(5) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(6) After replacing the battery, return
the unit to the case. Verify that the
hook of the case has properly
engaged.
(7) Before using, press the reset button
on the front.
Tool

Hour Meters
1) In places where the temperature

LCD
Reset button
Insulation sheet changes drastically. 1

2. Waterproof construction 2) In places where humidity is high and

• LH2H hour meter (installation frame there is the possibility of dew.
type) (When dew forms the display may vanish 2

The operation part of the panel
installation type (installation frame type)
is constructed to prevent water from
entering the unit and a rubber gasket is
provided to prevent water from entering
the gap between the unit and the panel
and other display errors may occur.)
4. Conditions of use
1) Do not use on places where there is
flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust,
presence of oil, or where the unit might
be subject to strong vibrations or shocks. 1

cutout. 2) Since the cover is made of

There must be sufficient pressure applied
to the rubber gasket to prevent water
from entering.
Be sure to use the mounting screws
when installing the mounting frame
(ATH3803).
polycarbonate resin, do not use in places
where the unit might come into contact
with or be exposed to environments that
contain organic solvents such as methyl
alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong
alkali substances such as ammonia and 3

Note: The one-touch installation type is caustic soda.

not waterproof. 6

Mounting frame
(ATH3803)

163

129
130 Precautions in using the LH2H series

LH2H
For LH2H hour meter
1
(installation frame type)
(1) Remove the battery cover from the
case.
(2) Remove the battery from the side of
the case. The battery will come
loose if you put the battery side face
down and lightly shake the unit.
(3) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(4) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(5) After replacing the battery, return 2
the battery cover to the case. Verify “+” side
that the hook of the battery cover is
properly engaged.
(6) Before using press the reset button
5
on the front. “−” side

Options
1. Accessories (for LH2H hour meter) 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
Hour Meters

Panel cover (black) Mounting frame

LCD

Pa
CR2n4asonic Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
3V 77
JAPA
N
HOUR METER
hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

RESET Part No.: ATH3802

LH2H
Part No.: ATH3801
You can change the design of the front
panel by replacing it with this black panel
cover. The counter comes with an ash
gray panel cover as standard.
Note: No panel cover option (black) is available for the
LH2H preset hour meter.
Packaged with the LH2H (excluding the
PC board mounting type).
Warning
• Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
positioned correctly. Part No.: ATH3803
Packaged with the mounting bracket type
• Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to LH2H hour meter
come into contact with heat.
• The battery is not rechargeable. Rubber gasket
Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LH2H hour meter

164
 x TH13 / TH23 131

TH13 / TH23
TH13 series (without reset function) HOUR METER
TH23 series (with reset function)

Features Typical applications

›› High-performance compact synchronous motor
The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for
Maintenance management of machine tools, automated
machines, control panels, forming machines, medical
longer period of measurement. equipment, generators, compressors, water treatment

›› Compact and stylish facilities, presses, motors, etc.

›› Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
›› Rotary indicator
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for
monitoring.
›› Compliant with UL, CSA and CE, UL File No.: E42876
CSA File No.: LR39291

Product types
Part number Part number
Type Operating voltage Operating voltage

electromechanical
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz

Hour Meters ,
100V AC TH1345 TH1346 115V AC (115 to 120V AC) TH1375 TH1376
TH13 types
200V AC TH1355 TH1356 220V AC TH1385 TH1386
(without reset button)
110V AC TH1365 TH1366 240V AC TH1395 TH1396
100V AC TH2345 TH2346 115V AC (115 to 120V AC) TH2375 TH2376
TH23 types
200V AC TH2355 TH2356 220V AC TH2385 TH2386
(with reset button)
110V AC TH2365 TH2366 240V AC TH2395 TH2396
Note) The 115 to 120V AC, 220V AC and 240V AC types are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For those products, specify “U” at the end of the part
number when ordering.

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 100V AC, 200V AC, 110V AC, 115 to 120V AC, 220V AC, 240V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz (other model)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH13 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH23 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 M , Between live and dead metal parts (at 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 135 g 130 g

131
132 TH13 / TH23

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 EN55011 Group1 ClassA

Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage
(EMS)EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
Static discharge immunity 8 kV air
EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
RF electromagnetic field immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity 100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions
mm
General tolerance: ±1.0
Mounting
Case bracket (supplied)
• TH13 series • TH23 series

Decorative nut
Reset button
46.8

RESET
6
52 52
No.187 quick
5 4.75 connect terminal
54 (4.75 ¥ 6.0 ¥ 0.5)

Rotary Rotary 72
indicator indicator

(TH13 and TH23 series common)

Wiring diagram Panel mounting

• Panel cutout dimensions
electromechanical
Hour Meters ,

Panel
Mounting
Case bracket (supplied)

+0.5
47 −0.1
M Decorative
nut

Operating power supply

5 67

Replacing the TH13/23 series with the TH14/24 series

The TH13/TH23 series hour meter are interchangeable with the
TH14/24 series hour meter. Use the specified mounting frame because
of a different setup method. It is advisable to introduce the TH14/24
series hour meters for the first time.

DIN48 size and mounting frame setup

Panel
Mounting frame
(sold separately):
TH1400020
 48
 52

 45
 47

Mounting flame

132
 x TH14 / TH24 133

Silver panel Black panel

TH24 series (with reset button)
TH14 / TH24
DIN 48 SIZE
mm
HOUR METER

Silver panel Black panel

TH14 series (without reset button)

Features
›› HTheigh-performance compact syncronous motor
accurately turning motor is employed to provide for
›› Rotary indicator
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for
longer period of measurement. monitoring.
›› Common for 50/60 Hz power frequency ›› Compliant with UL, CSA and CE, UL File No.: E42876
›› Arearrange
lever is used to select 50 Hz or 60 Hz. There is no need to
the control panel and other signal destinations.
CSA File No.: LR39291

›› Dimensions as per DIN 43700 standard Typical applications

›› The units are in the 48x48 DIN standard size. They can be
fitted in panels and give refined metallic appearance. Maintenance management of machine tools, automated
›› Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
machines, control panels, forming machines, medical
equipment, generators, compressors, water treatment
facilities, presses, motors, etc.

electromechanical
Hour Meters ,
Product types
Operating Part number Operating Part number Operating Part number
Type
voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel
TH14 series 100V AC TH141S TH141 24V AC TH144S TH144 115 to 120V AC TH147S TH147
(without reset 200V AC TH142S TH142 48V AC TH145S TH145 220V AC TH148S TH148
button) 12V AC TH143S TH143 110V AC TH146S TH146 240V AC TH149S TH149
TH24 series 100V AC TH241S TH241 24V AC TH244S TH244 115 to 120V AC TH247S TH247
(with reset 200V AC TH242S TH242 48V AC TH245S TH245 220V AC TH248S TH248
button) 12V AC TH243S TH243 110V AC TH246S TH246 240V AC TH249S TH249
Note) Only the black-panel type is UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For this type, specify “U” at the end of the part number when ordering.

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH14 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH24 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 M ; Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 145 g (TH14 series) 150 g (TH24 series) 133
134 TH14 / TH24

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 EN55011 Group1 ClassA

Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage
(EMS)EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-2 4
 kV contact
Static discharge immunity 8 kV air
EN61000-4-3 1 0 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
RF electromagnetic field immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-11 1
 0 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity 100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions (TH14 and TH24 series common) mm

General tolerance: ±1.0
No.187 quick
Mounting connect terminal
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative (4.7 ¥ 6.0 ¥ 0.5)
nut

48 50 60Hz 44.8

50Hz
Rotary
indicator
5.5 75
Frequency setting switch
94

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm

• Panel cutout dimensions

electromechanical

Mounting
Hour Meters ,

Panel
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut

M 45
+0.6
0

50

Operating power supply

5.5 88.5

134
 x TH40 135

TH40
Black panel
DIN 48
DUAL INDICATOR
HOUR METER
Silver panel in mm

Features
›› USpecified-period
pgraded composite function
measurement and total-time measurement
›› DTheimensions as per DIN 43700 standard
units are in the 48x48 DIN standard size. They can
can be monitored on a single hour meter. be fitted in panels and give refined metallic appea-
›› High-performance compact syncronous motor rance.
The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for
longer period of measurement.
›› Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
›› Common for 50/60 Hz power frequency
A lever is used to select 50 Hz or 60 Hz. There is no need to
›› RTheotary indicator
rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for
rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations.
monitoring.
›› Compliant with CE.

electromechanical
Product types

Hour Meters ,
Operating Part number Operating Part number Operating Part number
Type
voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel
100V AC TH401S TH401 24V AC TH404S TH404 115 to 120V AC TH407S TH407
TH40 series 200V AC TH402S TH402 48V AC TH405S TH405 220V AC TH408S TH408
12V AC TH403S TH403 110V AC TH406S TH406 240V AC TH409S TH409

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 9999.9 hours (upper side) ... with reset indicator
Counting range
0 to 99999.9 hours (lower side) ... without reset indicator
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Min. 100 MW; Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
2

Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
2

Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C

Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 160 g

135
136 TH40

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 EN55011 Group1 ClassA

Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage
(EMS)EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-2 4
 kV contact
Static discharge immunity 8 kV air
EN61000-4-3 1 0 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
RF electromagnetic field immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-11 1
 0 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity 100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±1.0

No.187 quick
Accumulated connect terminal
hours indicator Mounting (4.7 ¥ 6.0 ¥ 0.5)
Reset button (with reset indicator) Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
Total nut
accmulated
hours indicator
(without reset
indicator)
48 50 60Hz 44.8

50Hz
Rotary
indicator
5.5 75
Frequency setting switch
94

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm

• Panel cutout dimensions

electromechanical
Hour Meters ,

Panel Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut

M
+0.6
45 0

50

Operating power supply

5.5 88.5

136
 x TH63 / TH64 137

TH63 / TH64
TH13 series (without reset function)

DIN HALF SIZE

TH23 series (with reset function)
HOUR METER

Features
›› Compact to save panel space frequency can be selected for 50 or 60 Hz.
The 24x48 mm hour met ers are just half the DIN 48x48
standard size. They help save the panel space.
›› Rotary indicator

›› Reset
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 72 seconds
button for monitoring.
The hour meters can be reset to zero (TH64 series).
›› Wide-ranging measurement display
›› Compliant with UL, CSA and CE.
The measurement can be displayed from 0.1 hour up to
99999.9 hours (TH63 series). The dial size is the same as Typical applications
that of 48x48 DIN size hour meters (TH14 and TH24 series).
›› ETheasyflattoterminals
Management of small generators and food processing
install machines; hour counting for leased equipment; mainte-
(#187) are used for easier wiring. There is nance management of various equipment, etc.
no need to undo the lock spring.
›› High-performance sync motor with 50/60 Hz selector
The noise-resistant, accurately turning motor is employed
to provide for longer period of measurement. The power

Product types

electromechanical
Hour Meters ,
Type Operating voltage Part number Operating voltage Part number
100V AC TH631 24V AC TH634 115 to 120V AC TH637
TH63 series 220V AC TH638
200V AC TH632 48V AC TH635
(without reset button)
12V AC TH633 110V AC TH636 240V AC TH639
100V AC TH641 24V AC TH644 115 to 120V AC TH647
TH64 series 48V AC TH645 220V AC
200V AC TH642 TH648
(with reset button)
12V AC TH643 110V AC TH646 240V AC TH649

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH63 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH64 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 M , Between live and dead metal parts (At 500 V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight Approx. 80 g

137
138 TH63 / TH64

TH63·TH64
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 EN55011 Group1 ClassA

Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage
(EMS)EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
Static discharge immunity 8 kV air
EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
RF electromagnetic field immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
EMC EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
EFT/B immunity
Surge immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity 100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm
General tolerance: ±0.5

Reset button (only for TH64 type)

Rotary indicator
Frequency selector lever

No.187 quick
connect terminal
HOUR METER
24

48 4.5 53
.177
66

Wiring diagram mm

• Panel cutout dimensions

electromechanical

Panel (thickness:
Hour Meters ,

1 to 9 mm )
45
+0.6
0
For panel thickness of

M 5 to 9 mm )

R0.5 or less
22.2
+0.3
0

Operating power supply Mounting spring

(included)

Mounting
1. Cut a 22.2 +0.3
0 × 45 +0.6
0 mm 3. Swing the mounting spring to the front Unfasten
opening in the panel. of the hour meter to secure the hour Fasten
2. Swing the mounting spring to the rear meter to the panel.
of the hour meter and fit the hour 4. Wire the supplied quick connectors
meter into the panel opening. (There and connect to the hour meter. Be
is no need to detach the mounting sure to use the supplied insulating
spring from the hour meter.) If the sleeves to cover the connectors.
panel is 5 to 9 mm thick, move
the mounting spring to the
other hole toward the rear of the hour
meter.

138
 x TH8 139

TH8

DC HOUR METER
TH8 TH8
DIN HALF SIZE Hour Meter
HOUR METER

Features
1. IP66 waterproof construction
The front panel surface keeps water and
Features dust out. Perfect for use in rough
conditions.
››
IP66 waterproof construction 2. Includes operation light ››
(LED) operation light (LED)
Includes
Theout.
The front panel surface keeps water and dust operation
PerfectLED
for illuminates so you
The operation LED illuminates so you can quickly verify
use in rough conditions. can quickly verify operation status. status.
operation
3. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
››
Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product type
Installation Measurement time Operation light Rated voltage Part No.
12 V DC TH833C
Panel installation 0 to 9999.9 hours LED illuminates while operating.
24 V DC TH834C
Note: Products are UL and c-UL certified as standard. (Suffix “U” is not required ON part numbers when ordering.)

Specifications
Type

electromechanical
TH833C TH834C

Hour Meters ,
Item
Rated voltage 12 V DC 24 V DC
Usage voltage range 10.2 to 15.6 V DC 20.4 to 31.2 V DC
Rating Measurement time 0 to 9999.9 hours
Min. measurement time 0.1 hour (6 min.)
Power consumption Approx. 1.5 W (With rated voltage applied at 25°C )
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ between charged and uncharged parts (measured at 500 V DC)
Electrical
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 2,000 V AC for 1 minute.
characteristics
Temperature rise Max. 55°C (measured at rated voltage and resistance law)
10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.)
Functional vibration resistance
Mechanical Single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min. ON 3 axes)
characteristics Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times ON 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance Min. 980 m/s2 (5 times ON 3 axes)
Operation temperature –20°C to +60°C (Without due and frost)
Usage conditions Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity) (non-condensing)
Power supply ripple Approx. 48% or less (single phase, all-wave rectification)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
EMC
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

139
140 TH8

TH8
Dimensions and part names (unit: mm ) Wiring diagram
Tolerance: ±1.0
88.5
10.5
75 M
68.5 31
Mounting bracket

.5
R5
Red Black
HOUR METER
35.4
0 0 0 0 .0 h Operation voltage
Power supply Installation
LED display screw
When the power is
turned ON the green Unit Spring washer
lamp illuminates 44

Panel installation diagram

Panel cutout dimensions

Lead wire
0.1N·m to 0.2N·m screw torque

φ 62

φ 53 ±0.5

Rubber gasket Installation panel

(Unit: mm )
electromechanical
Hour Meters ,

140
179
 x
Precautions in using the hour meters 141

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE HOUR METERS

1. Frequency setting 5. Reset-type hour meter
Frequency is specified for AC motor-driven hour meters. Before • Precautions for use
installing, be sure to check your local power frequency. If the number indications are off before use, press the reset
2. Connections button and confirm that all zeroes ("0") are displayed.
• TH13,23,14,24,40,50,63,64 • Resetting caution
Exercise due caution as an insufficient amount of pressure on
For measuring energized time of load For measuring operation time of load
the reset button may result in abnormal readings.
Hour meter Hour meter
Switch (Linked 6. Acquisition of CE marking
Single with clutch)
phase Load Load
Please abide by the conditions below when using in applica-
tions that comply with EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1
1) Ambient conditions
Hour meter Hour meter
Switch (Linked
with clutch)
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
Three
phases Load Load • Indoor use
• Acceptable temperature and humidity range: -10 to +55°C,
Note) Make the connection with the accompanying flat connector first and then 35 to 85%RH (with no condensation at 20°C)
with the hour meter's terminal (#187). In such case, be sure to cover the connec- • Under 2000 m elevation
tion with the accompanying insulating sleeve. 2) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following
• TH70, TH8 conditions.
Lead wire DC motor type hour meter • There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas.
• There is no combustible or explosive gas.
DC power source Load • There is no mechanical vibration or impacts.
Note) Solder the lead wires in position. • There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
• Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches
3. Safety precautions and power lines with large electrical currents.
Do not use the hour meters in the following places. 3) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN60947-1 or EN60947-
• Where ambient temperature is below –10° or above +50°C 3 to the voltage input section.
• In wet, dusty or gaseous environments 4) Applied voltage should be protected with an overcurrent pro-
• Where exposed to vibrations and shocks tection device (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse) that
• Outdoors, or where exposed to rain or direct sunlight conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free voltage input type)
4. Compliant with CE.
• LH2H
Ambient conditions:
Overvoltage category III, contamination factor 2, indoor use.
Ambient temperature and humidity –10 and +55°C and 35%
to 85%RH respectively.

electromechanical
• TH13, 23, 14, 24, 40, 50, 63, 64

Hour Meters ,
Ambient conditions:
Overvoltage category II, contamination factor 2, indoor use.
Ambient temperature and humidity –10 and +50°C and below
85%RH respectively.

165

141
 142
x
DIN size counters common options

Terminal sockets (Unit: mm Tolerance: ±1)

Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• DIN rail socket (8-pin)
24
19
50
40 51
6 5 4 3

2– φ 4.5 71
6 5 4 3
LC4H 2-M4

(8-pin type) 70 screw holes

7 8 1 2 (or 4.2 0.1
35.3 dia. holes)
70 40 0.2 The minimum distance
13 between the holes which
areparallel drilled.
Note: Terminal No.
7 8 1 2
on the main body
4 are identifical to
those on the termi-
ATC180031 nal socket.

• DIN rail socket (11-pin)

30.5
29.5
50
40 51
8 7 6 5
4

LC4H 8 7 6 5
2– φ 4.5 71
LC4H-S 4
2-M4
9 3 screw holes
LC4H-W 70
10 11 1 2
(or 4.2 0.1
dia. holes)
(11-pin type) 70 35.7 40 0.2
13 The minimum distance
between the holes which
areparallel drilled.
9 3
Note: Terminal No.
on the main body
10 11 1 2

4 are identifical to
those on the termi-
ATC180041 nal socket.
Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the terminal socket.

Sockets
Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• Rear terminal socket 21
38 3 4 5 6
16

3 4 5 6
—
41
Accessories

2 1 8 7
2 1 8 7
Options &
Counters

AT78041
LC4H
(8-pin type) • 8P cap
φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30 4 5
3

8
—
2

1 8
26
8.6
φ 32.5
AD8-RC (34.6)

5 21
• Rear terminal socket 45
16 4 5 6 7 8

4 5 6 7 8
11 —
43.4 11

3 2 1 10 9
3 2 1 10 9
LC4H
AT78051
LC4H-S
LC4H-W • 11P cap
(11-pin type) 34.6
φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30 6 5
7
4 3 2

9 8

φ 31.4 φ 30
8
—
10

1 11
8.6 26
φ 32.5
AT8-DP11 (34.6)

Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the socket.
 x 143
DIN SIZE COUNTERS
DIN SIZE
COMMON DIN
COUNTERSsize
OPTIONS counters
COMMON common options
OPTIONS
Mounting parts Mounting parts
• Rubber gasket • Rubber gasket • Mounting frame • Mounting frame

• Rubber gasket Applicable for LC4H Applicable

• Mountingforframe
LC4H
50.0
series 50.0
series
1.969
Applicable for LC4H
1.969
series 48 Applicable
48 for LC4H Applica
50.0 1.890 48 Applicable
1.890 for LC4H
50.0 1.0 50.0 1.0 series
series series
1.969 .039 1.969 .039
ATC18002 ATC18002
48 1.89048 48 1.890
50.0 1.0 AT8-DA4 68 2.67768 AT8-DA4 68 2.677
ATC18002 AT8-DA4
4
The rubber
The rubber gasket
gasket is
is enclosed
enclosed in
inThe
the LC4H
the rubber
LC4H gasket is enclosed in the LC4H
series.
series. series.
26
± 1 ±39.37
1 39.37 ± .039 1,000 ± 1 39.37 ± .039
•• M
Mounting rails (Applicable
(Applicable for
for• Mounting rails (Applicable for • Fastening
Fastening plate
plate • Fastening plate
1,000
1,000 ± .039 50 50
ounting rails 5.5
5.5 5.5•
50
1.969 1.969
DIN and
and IEC
IEC standards)
standards) DIN .217
and
.217 IEC standards) .217 12 M4
M4 12 M4
DIN 2.75R
2.75R .108R.108R 2.75R .108R 12
.472 M.157 .472 M.157
5 51515 10 101515 15 1510 1015 15
5 5 5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 10
10
.394
.197
.197.591
.591.394 .591
.394 .591 .591 .394.394
.591 .591.591
.197.197 .197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval
Ovalhole, 40-5.5×15
hole, 40-.217×.591
40-5.5×15 40-.217×.591 Oval hole, 40-5.5×15 40-.217×.591

3535 24 24 27 27 35 24 27
1.378 .945 1.51.5 1.063 10
AT8-DLA1 AT8-DLA1 ATA4806 ATA4806

UP
1.378 .945 1.063 1.378 .945 1.5 1.063
AT8-DLA1 .059 ATA4806 10
.394

UP
.059 ATA4806 .059 ATA4806
Length: 11 m
m Length: 1 m ATA4806
Length:
7.57.5
aluminum
aluminum aluminum .295
.295
7.5
.295
For holding
For holding DIN
DIN rails
rails For hol

•• Protective
Protective cover
cover for
for DIN
DIN 48
48 size
size
• Protective cover for DIN 48 size
Flexible
Hard type type Flexible type type
Flexible
50.6
11 50 11 50
17.2 1.969 50 1.969
.677 1.992
.433 11 .433
.433 1.969

50 50
50.6 1.969 50 1.969
1.992 1.969

AQM4803 AQM4803
AQM4801 AQM4803

Accessories Accessories
• Panel cover (Black) • Panel cover (Black)
LC4H Panel cover (4 digits) LC4H
LC4H
Panel
Panel
cover
cover
(6 digits)
(4 digits)LC4H-S
LC4HPanel
Panelcover
cover(4(6digits)
digits)LC4H-S
LC4H-S
Panel
Panel
cover
cover
(6 digits)
(4 digits) LC4H-SPanel
LC4H-W Panelcover
cover (6 digits) LC4H-W

COUN COUNCOU COUN

COUN COUNCOUNT COUNCOUN
TER TER NTER TER TER TER ER TER TER

RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE R

T T T T T T T T T
UP UP UP UP
SET/L SET/L SET/L SET/L SE SE
LOCK LOCK LOCK OC K LOCK OCK OCK OCK T/LOCK

LC4H LC4H LC4H LC4H

DOWN DOWN
DOWN DOWN
LC4H LC4H LC4H LC4H
-WLC4H

AEL58011 AEL58012
AEL58011 AEL58013
AEL58012 AEL58014
AEL58013 AEL68011
AEL58014 AEL6801

Accessories
Options &

Counters
The black panel cover is also available
The blackso that
panel
you
cover
can is
change
also available
the appearance
so that you
of the
canpanel
change
by changing
the appearance
the panel
of the
cover.
panel by changing the panel cover.
The color of the standard panel cover
The color
is ash
of gray.
the standard panel cover is ash gray.

144 144
 144
x
Options and accessories Counters / Hour
6 Meters
LH2H_Preset.fm Seite 129 Freitag, 11. Juni 2004 9:38 09

Options
1. Accessories (for LC2H total counter) 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
Panel cover (black) Mounting frame
Pa
CR2n4asonic (Suitable for installation frame type LC2H
COUNTER
LC2H
3V
JAPA
N
77
LH2H
total counter and LC2H preset counter)
For LH2H hour meter
(installation frame type)
RESET Part No.: ATH3802 1
(1) Remove the battery cover from the Packaged with the LC2H (excluding the
case. PC board mounting type).
Part No.: AEL3801
(2)can
You Remove
change thethe
battery
design from the front
of the side of
Warning
the case. The battery will
panel by replacing it with this black panel come
cover.loose if you put
The counter the battery
comes with an side
ashface • Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
Part No.: ATH3803
downcover
and lightly shake the unit. positioned correctly.
gray panel as standard. Packaged with the mounting bracket type
(3)No
Note: Before inserting
panel cover wipe
accessory clean
(black) the for
is available • Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
surface
the of the
LC2H preset new battery.
counter. short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to LC2H total counter
come into contact with heat.
(4) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
• The battery is not rechargeable. Rubber gasket
(5) After replacing the battery, return (Suitable for installation bracket type
2
the battery cover to the case. Verify LC2H total counter and LC2H preset
“+” side
that the hook of the battery cover is counter)
properly engaged.
(6) Before using press the reset button
5
on the front. “−” side

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LC2H total counter

Options
1. Accessories (for LH2H hour meter) 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
Panel cover (black) Mounting frame 85
Pa
CR2n4asonic Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
3V 77
HOUR METER JAPA
N
LH2H hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

RESET Part No.: ATH3802

Packaged with the LH2H (excluding the
PC board mounting type).
Part No.: ATH3801
You can change the design of the front Warning
panel by replacing it with this black panel
cover. The counter comes with an ash • Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
Part No.: ATH3803
Counters / HM

positioned correctly.
Accessories

gray panel cover as standard.

Options &

• Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
Note: No panel cover option (black) is available for the
LH2H preset hour meter. short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to
come into contact with heat.
• The battery is not rechargeable.
Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LH2H hour meter
Rubber gasket
Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LH2H hour meter
 x 145
Counter Applications

The highly accurate, reliable counters can be controlled from

the front panel and are suitable for a wide range of applications.
Typical Counter Applications
DOWN and HOLD-A modes IND and HOLD-C modes PHASE and HOLD-A modes
for shipment quantity counting for parking lots for valve control
Rotary
encoder
To valve
FULL
VACANT

IN2
(down count)
Photoelectric IN1
switch Motor (up count)
(stop/start)

Entrance Photoelectric Exit

switch

Shipment quantities are counted to con- Incoming and outgoing cars are counted Rotary encoder signals are counted to
trol the conveyor line flow. to switch the FULL and VACANT signs. control a valve aperture.

UP and SHOT-A modes UP and SHOT-B modes UP and SHOT-C modes

for packing a specified number of copies for packing medicine tablets for counting acceptables
Electric counter
IN1
Motor Marking (up count)
Photoelectric
switch Film Labeling
Cutter machine
Sorting
Printing machine
machine

Acceptables

Mark
sensor
Mark sensor Rejectables

IN2
(down count)

Printed matter is counted to package a Medicine tablets are packed in specified Labeled cans alone are counted up.
specified number of copies. quantities. Rejected cans are not counted.

UP and SHOT-D modes DIR input mode PHASE input mode for sizing
for winding leader sheet for controlling part stocks

Mark Electric counter

sensor
Cutter

Leader sheet IN2 (down count)

Rotary
encoder

IN1
(counting)
Pipe
Rotary IN1 (up count)
IN2
encoder (up/down count selection)
(single-phase)
Applications
Counter

Extra leader sheet that is now wound is Incoming and outgoing parts are counted Teamed up with a rotary encoder, the
counted by a rotary encoder and a color to keep parts feeders well-stocked. counter is used to control the cutting
detecting sensor. length of pipes.
146
x
Time Switches

Types TB5 TB62 TB72

Name of product High performance analog type time Digital time switch Flat time switches
switches
Appearance

Program cycle ›› Daily type ›› Weekly type ›› Minutes

›› weekly type
Features ›› DIN rail mount ››  tandard housing 35 x 90 x
S ›› Setting elements integrated at 15
›› DIN module size 61mm in line with DIN 43880 - 2 minute intervals
TE ›› Quick mountable
›› 15 minutes interval setting (Daily)
›› Two models: 1-circuit and 2-cir- ›› ON settings are colored
›› 2 hours interval setting (Weekly) cuit types
›› Power supply indication LED ›› Weekly programming
lamp
›› Switching function: ON - AUTO
›› 3 state terminal (COM-NO-NC) - OFF
›› Metal setting pin ›› Automatic changeover standard
›› ON-OFF-AUTO switch time/daylight saving time for
›› EN50178, DIN57633 conformed Europe, UK and the USA
›› Vacation mode
›› Running reserve for 6 years (in
case of power
failure)
›› 50 programs
›› Minimum switching interval: 1
minute
›› Manual override key ON/OFF on
the front
›› Manual operation can be locked
out
›› Reset key
›› LED operation display
›› Cover can be swung open
›› Cover can be secured
›› Output: Relay 1c, 250V AC, 16A
›› Rated operating voltage: 230V
AC, 50/60Hz
›› Mounting method: Wall mounting,
DIN rail
Driving method ›› Quartz motor ›› Quartz oscillation ›› Quartz motor
›› AC synchronous motor ›› AC motor type
Rated frequency 50-60Hz 50-60Hz 50-60Hz
Rated voltage 220 to 240VAC 230VAC 100 to 240VAC
Weight 160g 100g/120g 100g/120g
Switches
Time
 x 147
Precautions in Using the a-TB Time Switches

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE A-TB TIME SWITCHES

Connection Methods
When time switches are When the electromagnetic breaker and contactor are used in combination
directly controlled Single-phase 3-phase
Time switch Time switch Time switch
COM COM COM
M M M
NO NO NO
S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC

If the power supplies for the Power Power supply

time switches and the load supply for Load Power supply A B for time switch 13 14 96 95
time switch for time switch 5 6
are separate Power
3 4
Power supply Load
Power 1 2
supply for Load for load
supply
load for load
A B
Electromagnetic
contactor Electromagnetic breaker (green power)

Time switch Time switch Time switch

COM COM COM
M M M
NO NO NO
S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC
If the same power supply is
used for the time switches Cross- Cross- Cross-
Power over over A B over 13 14 96 95
and the load supply Load
5 6
(Connect a crossover between
S2 and COM .) Power 3 4
Load
Power supply 1 2
supply Load
A B
Electromagnetic
contactor Electromagnetic breaker (green power)

Example of connecting the

time switches and remote
control transmitter breaker ON COM S1 S2
OFF
(The output from the time NC NO COM
switches is a stand-alone Time switches
circuit, and is applied to 1C.) Remote control
transmitter breaker
Load

Data
1. Life characteristics 2. Normal motor reyolution character- 3. Temperature characteristics of
Applied for AC motor type. istics quartz oscillation accuracy
Applied for AC motor type. Applied for quartz power-failure compen-
sation type.
100 (ppm)
(Internal motor characteristics) 80°C
Normal revolution
range +20
90
60°C
+12ppm
Starting voltage (%V)

+10
80 40°C +3ppm
Recommendable
applicaiton range 0
20°C –7ppm
70
Characteristics range
–10
0°C
Starting voltage –16ppm
60
–20
–20°C

Initial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 60 100 140 180 220 (%V) 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°C)

years

A-TB TIME SWITCHES COMMON OPTIONS

Mounting parts (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)
• Mounting rails (Applicable for • Fastening plate • Protective cover for
DIN and IEC standards) 1,000 ± 1 39.37 ± .039 50
1.969
DIN 72 size
5.5
M4
Switches

.217
2.75R .108R
12
.472 M.157 For ATB72
Time

5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 10 17.5 75.2
.394 .689 2.961
.197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval hole, 40-5.5x15 40-.217x.591
75.2
2.961
ATA4806 10
UP

35 24 27 ATA4806 .394
AT8-DLA1 1.378 .945 1.5 1.063
.059
Length: 1 m
aluminum 7.5
.295
For holding DIN rails AQM7801

All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

148
x
TB72

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE A-TB TIME SWITCHES

Precautions when setting the program 4) Since the main body cover is made of polycarbonate resin,
1) If two or more programs are set so that they overlap prevent contact with organic solvents such as methyl alchohol,
benzine and thinner, or strong alkali materials such as ammonia
The individual and caustic soda.
[Program 1]
programs are 5) External surge protection may be required if the following val-
[Program 2] valid, and output is ues are exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit will be dam-
continuous, with
no separations.
aged.
[Output]
Surge waveform
2) If the same program is specified for multiple days, specifying [Unipolar full wave voltage of ±(1.2×50) µs]
multiple days when the ON time is specified the same time set-
ting to be entered for multiple days, at one time. 100
90

Surge voltage (%)

ON times: (Mon) (Tues) (Thurs) (Fri) 8:00
[Program] Peak voltage
OFF times: (Mon) (Tues) (Thurs) (Fri) 20:00 50
(Sun) (Mon) (Tues) (Wed) (Thurs) (Fri) (Sat) 30

[Output]
8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 0
0 1.2 50
Time (µs)
3) When setting a program that extends over two or more days
(multi-day program), setting the ON and OFF times separately
for all of the days to which that time applies enables multiple 6) Provide chattering absorbing circuit to control the circuit in
days to be specified at one time. which chattering is a problem.
7) Provide circuit breaker, fuse or other protective devices for
ON time: (Mon) (Tues) 20:00 the side of power supply.
[Program 1]
OFF time: (Tues) (Fri) 8:00 8) The power failure compensation function provides compen-
(Sun) (Mon) (Tues) (Wed) (Thurs) (Fri) (Sat) sation if power is supplied continuously to the time switches.
The internal battery is fully charged, but if the battery capaci-
[Output]
20 8 20 8 tance has dropped because of natural discharging, or if the bat-
tery has discharged completely, there may be times when the
4) In the pulse setting mode, if a pulse width of 61 or more sec- switch does not operate immediately when the power is turned
onds is set for 23 : 59, the output will be cut off at 0 : 00.00", on. If this happens, check to make sure that the clock is operat-
and operation will not be carried over to subsequent days. If a ing normally immediately after the power is turned on, and then
separate program has been specified for 0 : 00, however, out- set the clock to the proper time.
put will be continuous, without interruption.
5) When the "Mode Change" switch is set to the "TIMER1 (2)"
mode, no output operation is carried out based on the program; Precautions concerning wiring
instead, the previous status is maintained. For this reason, the Connections should be made using wiring of φ 1 to φ 1.6, or 1.25
"Mode Change" switch should always be returned to the "TIME" to 2 mm2, with a 600V vinyl insulating sheath.
mode when operation has been completed.
6) Entering any one of the settings listed below will cause a set- 1. If connecting wires just as
ting error, and no writing will be carried out even when the they are
Length of sheath to be removed: 10±2 mm
[WRITE] button is pressed. The location in error will flash. (illustration shows actual size)

If this happens, correct the setting for the location where the Insert the wire until the tip
Tighten screws securely. touches this surface.
problem has occurred, and press the [WRITE] button again.
• A setting has not been entered for the day, time, minute, or
another parameter.
• The day, time, and minute settings entered for the ON and
OFF times are exactly the same.
• The number of days is different for the ON and OFF times. Make sure the bare wire is not
exposed beyond this surface.

Precautions concerning handling 2. Using crimp terminals

methods and usage Use a crimp terminal with an insulating
tube and an open tip (for M3.5 screws).
1) Use the time switch in ambient temperatures of –10°C to 3.9 mm min.

+50°C . 7 mm max.
2) Use the time switch in ambient humidities of 85% R.H. or
less.
3) Prevent using the time switch in such places where inflam-
Switches
Time

mable or corrosive gas is generated, much dust exists, oil is

The crimp terminal should be
splashed and considerable shock and vibration occur. inserted facing the direction
shown in the illustration.

All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

 x 149
TB72
A-TB72·72Q
Dimensions mm

• Flush mounting type • Surface mounting type: M3.5

Quartz power-failure compensation: 75.2
Manual Present Dial with built-in Power supply indicator (Protective cover)
switch time setting elements AC motor type: Hz selection

ON-OFF (42.5)
position

72 75.2 72
90±0.2
(Protective cover) 90
Knob

Arrow

Time setting Setting element

ON state 3-M4 screw hole

OFF state 65±0.2
(or φ 4.2±0.1 hole)
39.2
32
27.2
5.5
44
37.5

67

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

• Flush mounting type • Surface mounting type • Panel cutout dimensions
(1 Form A) (1 Form C) (Note) 82
or more
68 +0.7
0

NC
S1 S2 L2 L1 COM
S1 S2
NO (Note) 82
or more

Rated operating Load

Rated operating Load
voltage Panel thickness: 1.0 to 4.5mm
voltage (Note) Minimum pitch for close mounting

Precautions during usage

1. Output setting
• ON setting: Turn the setting element
inward, and red mark appear around the
dial.
• OFF setting: Turn the setting element
outward, and the above red mark will dis-
appear.
• Turn the setting element sufficiently
until the click action is felt.
2. Clock setting
• Be sure to turn the knob at the clock
center in the arrow direction to set the
clock to the present time. (The dial also
turns together with the clock.) Be sure to
prevent reverse turning.
• do not turn the dial to set the clock.
3. Attachment
• Insert the time switch from the front of
the attachment panel.
(One-touch system: Panel attachment
model)
• Either use 3.8 or M4 wood screws for
attachment, or use DIN rails with a width
of 35 mm (ATA48011). (Direct-attach-
ment model)
4. Contact relay operation if the power
fails
• Contact relays remain closed while the
power is off.
5. Power failure compensation (ATB75
series)
• An internal Ni-NH battery is provided to
compensate for power failures, but the
power supply should be left on as much
as possible. Turning the power supply on
and off shortens the service life of the
battery.
• After continuous charging for 48 hours,
the battery provides 200 hours of power
failure compensation. The internal bat-
tery is fully charged, but if the battery
capacitance has dropped because of
natural discharging, or if the battery has
discharged completely, there may be
times when the switch does not operate
immediately when the power is turned
on. If this happens, set the clock to the
proper time after the power has been
back on for three to four hours.
• Secondary batteries are a valuable
commodity which can be recharged.
They cannot be replaced, but if being
discarded after use, please make sure
they are recycled if possible.
When discarding the battery, turn off the
power supply to the time switches, and
use radio pliers to disassemble the over-
all connections and remove the battery.
6. Precautions concerning wiring
7. Compliance with the CE marking
Abide by the following installation condi-
tions and cautions in order to satisfy
EN61812-1 requirements.
• Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 2
• Wiring
The voltage applied to the timer should
be protected with an overcurrent protec-
tion device (example: T 1A, 250 V AC
time lag fuse) that conforms to the
EN/IEC standards.
• Installation and removal
(1) Panel-mounted models are timers for
installing on the surface of the control
panel. Store the terminal section inside
the control panel.
(2) Direct-mounted models are timers for
installing inside the control panel. Do not
touch the terminal section or other parts
of the timer unit while an electric current
is applied.
(3) Before installation or removal, con-
firm that there is no voltage being
applied to any of the terminals.
• Do not use this timer with a safety cir-
cuit. For example, when using a timer in
a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.
8. Refer to page 91 for information on
Switches
Time

Power off
OFF With panel attachment models, wiring other matters.
Time switch setting time
should be connected by soldering it
directly, or using the #187 flat connecting
probe provided as an accessory.

All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

 x
150 TB5

TB5
High Performance Analog Type
High performanceTime Switches
analog type time TB5
switches
Features Applications
›› DIN rail mount Features ›› Lighting Fixture Applications
›› DIN module size ›› Sign board
›› 15 minutes interval setting (Daily) • DIN rail mount
›› Factory facility • Lighting Fixture

›› 2 hours interval setting (Weekly) ›› Vending machines

• DIN module size • Sign board
• 15 minutes interval setting (Daily) • Factory facility

›› Power supply indication LED lamp •

•
2 hours interval setting (Weekly)
Power supply indication LED lamp ›› Pool facility •
•
Vending machines
Pool facility

›› 3 state terminal (COM-NO-NC) • 3 state terminal (COM-NO-NC)

›› Lagoon pump • Lagoon pump

›› Metal setting pin

• Metal setting pin • Automatic irrigation
• ON-OFF-AUTO switch
›› Automatic irrigation • Automated feeding station

›› ON-OFF-AUTO switch • EN50178, DIN57633 conformed

›› Automated feeding station
›› EN50178, DIN57633 conformed
Product Types
Model No. Product name Rated voltage Power failure backup
TB5560187NJ Analogue type daily TIME SWITCH (with power failure backup) 220-240VAC 300 hours
TB5630187NJ Analogue type weekly TIME SWITCH (with power failure backup) 220-240VAC 300 hours
TB5590185NJ Analogue type daily TIME SWITCH 230VAC –
TB5640185NJ Analogue type weekly TIME SWITCH 230VAC –
TB55603777NJ Cable cover and wall mounting bracket

Dimensions Specifications
Model No. TB5560187NJ TB5630187NJ TB5590185NJ TB5640185NJ
TB5560187 Program Cycle Daily Type Weekly Type Daily Type Weekly Type
Driving Method Quartz motor AC synchronous motor
Rated Voltage 220-240VAC 230VAC
Allowable Operating Voltage -15% bis +10% of rated voltage
Rated Frequency 50-60Hz 50Hz
Power Consumption 2W 2W
Time Indication Daily dial Weekly dial Daily dial Weekly dial

Power Supply Indicator Green LED Red LED

Number of Circuit 1-circuit
Circuit Configuration Seperated Circuit (NO voltage-applied contact output)
Contact Configuration Single Pole, Double-through ( ) :µ-gap)
Manual ON/OFF with ON-AUTO-OFF Switch
Switching Capacity
Resistive Load (cosø=1) 250VAC 16A
Inductive Load (cosø=0,6) 250VAC 3A
Setting System Built-in Pin Setting (inside: ON, Outside: OFF)
Minimum Setting Unit 15 minutes 2 hours 15 minutes 2 hours

Circuit Diagram Number of Operation 96 / Day 84 / Week

300 hours at 20°C
96 / Day 84 / Week
Switches

Running Reserve _
Time

(Ni-Cd battery built-in)

Charging Time about 72 hours –
Time Accuracy ±15 sec. / month (at 25°C) Same as AC frequency
Working Ambient Temperature -20°C bis +55°C
Working Ambient Humidity -85%RH or less
Degree of Protection IP 20 as per EN60529
Protection Class Class II as per EN60335-1 if installed as directed
Pollution Degree 2
Overvoltage Category III
Wiring Terminal Capacity 1 ~ 2,5mm²
Weight 160g 160g
Option Parts TB55603777 / Terminal cover and mounting plate for wall mounting

TB 5
Parts Identification The figure shows TB556 series
➊ Power supply indication lamp.
Quartz motor type: GREEN
Synchronous motor type: RED
➋ Time adjust knob.
➌ Setting pin.
➍ ON-AUTO-OFF switch
➎ Main dial.
24 hour dial (TB556 • TB559)
1 week dial (TB563 • TB564)
x TB5 151
➏ Sub-dial ➎ ➊
60 min dial (TB556 • TB559) ➋
24 hour dial (TB563 • TB564)
➐ Present time index.
❽ DIN rail fixture.
➏ ➌
➐ ➍

Operating instructions
1. Set all setting pins to the outside of the dial.

2. Time adjust knob.

Caution:
During this operation, do not operate the setting pins located near the present
time index. Before operating these pins, turn the Time adjust knob to move
them away of the present time.

Example:
The time chart corresponding to the pin setting is shown below.

3. Adjust the present time.

Turn the Time adjust knob in the arrow direction.

Caution:
unneccessary reverse rotation results in malfunctions.

4. Set the ON-AUTO-OFF switch.

The load can be turned ON and OFF independent of the program by operating Between COM and NO Between COM and NC
the ON-AUTO-OFF switch.
Permanently ON Permanently OFF

Permanently OFF Permanently ON

ON and OFF independent of the program

5. Charging battery (TB556 · TB563).

• Supply AC power to the time switch. The battery will be automatically recharged.
• If the battery is charged for 3 days , 300-hour power failure will be backed-up.
(When it is charged for one hour, approx. 4-hour power failure will be compensated for.)
• Frequent power failure and long-power failure exceeding the compensation time will shorten the battery life.

• Quartz motortype (TB556 • TB563) contains Nickel-Cadmium battery. The battery must be recycled or
disposed of properly.
Switches
Time

Safety Instructions
1. All operations serving transport, installation, commissioning, troubleshooting and
maintenance are to be carried out by skilled technical personnel in accordance with
the relevant safety regulations and standards.
2. Avoid using the time switch except for the environment condition shown in specifica-
tions. Indoor use only.
3. Load capacity differs , depending on the type of load. 8See specifications).
4. Protect the citcuit with a fuse or breaker at the power supply, in accordance with the
relevant regulations.
5. Synchronous motor type (TB559 • TB564) are not provided with running reserve
function. When the time error occurs due to power failure, readjust the present time.
6. Make wiring connections, using isnulated wire (1,0 to 2.5 mm²).
Flexibles codes conductors 1,0 to 2,5mm²).
Fixed wiring conductors 1,5 to 2,5mm².
7. After wiring, check that wiring connections are all correct.
 x
152 TB62

TB6210187
Digital
1 circuit
TB62
TB62
TB6210187
Time Switch
TB6220187
Digital Time Switch
2 circuits
with cover open

Features
Features • Standard housing 35 x 90 x 61mm in line with

›› Standard housing 35 x 90 x 61mm in line with DIN 43880 - 2 TE ››

DIN 43880 - 2 TE
Manual
• Two models: override
1-circuit key ON/OFF
and 2-circuit types on the front
›› Two models: 1-circuit and 2-circuit types ››
• Weekly programming
Manual operation can be locked out
›› Weekly programming ››
• Switching function: ON - AUTO - OFF
• Automatic changeover standard time/daylight saving
Reset key
›› Switching function: ON - AUTO - OFF ››
time for Europe, UK and the USA
LED
• Vacation modeoperation display
›› Automatic changeover standard time/daylight saving time for ››
• Running reserve for 6 years (in case of power
Cover can be swung open
failure)
Europe, UK and the USA TB6210187 ››
• 50 programs
Cover can interval:
be secured
›› Vacation mode
• Minimum switching 1 minute
1 circuit
››
• Manual override key ON/OFF on the front
Output:
operationRelay
can be1c, 250V
out AC, 16A
›› Running reserve for 6 years (in case of power failure) ››
• Manual
• ResetRated
key
locked
operating voltage: 230V AC, 50/60Hz
›› 50 programs
TB6220187

››
2 circuits • LED operation display
• CoverMounting
can be swung method:
open Wall mounting, DIN rail
›› Minimum switching interval: 1 minute
TB6210187
• Cover can be secured
with cover open
• Output: Relay 1c, 250V AC, 16A
• Rated operating voltage: 230V AC, 50/60Hz
• Mounting method: Wall mounting, DIN rail
Product types
Model numbers Description Operating voltage Running reserve
TB6210187 Digital time switch, weekly programming, 1 circuit 220-240VAC 6 years
TB6220187 Digital time switch, weekly programming, 2 circuits 220-240VAC 6 years
TB62203777 Terminal cover and mounting plate for wall mounting

Technical Data
Model number TB6210187 TB6220187
Type 1 BRTU according to EN60730-2-7
Program cycle Weekly
Operating voltage 220-240VAC (-15% to +10% of the operating voltage)
Frequency 50-60Hz
Power consumption 2W
Switching capacity
Resistive load (cosΦ=1) 16A / 250VAC
Inductive load (cosΦ=0,7) 8A / 250VAC
Number of circuits 1 2
Number of circuits 1 relay contact output 2 relay contact outputs
Contact type 1 changeover contact 2 changeover contacts
Driving method Quartz oscillation
Memory capacity 50 programs 50 programs/circuit
Minimum switching interval 1 minute
Manual switching Override function
Changeover, standard time/daylight saving time Yes
Switches

Time accuracy ±15 seconds/month (at 25°C)

Time

Running reserve 6 years for clock memory and program (lithium battery)
Ambient temperature -20°C to +55°C
Humidity Max. 85%
Applicable wire Max. 2.5mm²
Weight 100g 120g
Protection degree II when mounted properly
Protection degree
IP20 according to EN60529
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III

03/2009
 x
TB62 153
TB 62
Dimensions, Part names
61
(Unit: mm) 55
44
40 33
35 5.5
1.8

Front cover
L 6Mounting
5 4 plate
(optional)

Manual operation
2 1POWER
button

65.2
130
90

45
ON/OFF ON/OFF

1 2

45
65
Terminal cover
1 2 3 N
(optional)

Indicators and buttons: 34.5

8 1 1 Power
2
3
4 ,
10 5
9
6
7
8 Output
2 3 : ON
: OFF
7 4
9 : Summer time
: Winter time
10 Manual button locked
6 5

Mounting DIN rail mounting Removal

1 Hook

DIN rail 2
(DIN EN 50022,
35mm)
2 Push on 1
Pull down DIN rail attachment lever to
release. Lift.
Secure front cover Direct mounting
Thread wire, etc. through hole *TB6220377 (* (optional parts) *)
and secure. 1 terminal cover, 1 mounting plate

* *
4
5
4 6
L
5
6
L

CAUTION: Minimize the wire hole to ensure

class II construction.

Connection diagram 1-circuit type 2-circuit type

Load 2
Power
source
L 4 5 6 L
Switches
Time

1 2 3 N 1 2 3 N

Power Power Power Power

source source source source
Load Load 1

03/2009
 x
154 TB62
TB 62

MODE Press “MODE” to set the clock, select the program, make holiday settings and set summer or winter time.
front cover open [Normal] [Clock] [Program] 1 [Program] 2 [Holiday] [Summer / Winter]

[Normal]

front cover close 2-circuit types only

Clock setting
year month day hour minute second reset

year

Program setting
Number of programs Next program
remaining hour ON minute ON day ON hour OFF minute OFF day OFF setting

(m) (m)
(m) : Press to confirm the flashing day and pass to the next.
: Press to ignore the flashing day and pass to the next.
Review, add, clear or change program.

Holiday setting This function allows you to cancel ON programs for the holidays specified.
start year start month start day end year end month end day start year

Setting is completed

Summer / Winter time setting

EURO UK USA configuration manual

Preset time in Preset time in Preset time in Program start date of : Press in normal mode to switch between
following table. following table. following table. summer and winter time. summer and winter time.
See below.
Preset time
Summer time start date Winter time start date
EURO Last Sunday in March at 2AM Last Sunday in October at 3AM
UK Last Sunday in March at 1AM Last Sunday in October at 2AM
(mm) week indication
USA Second Sunday in March at 2AM First Sunday in November at 2AM
first week fourth week
Programming the start date of summer time and winter time
configuration start month start week (mm) start day start hour start minute

second week last week

start month start minute start hour start day start week (mm) start month
third week

Setting is completed.
Switches

Manual operation
Time

4 5 6 L

The manual operation button can be operated when the : Function to lock out manual operation
front cover is closed. 1 2 POWER + : Press these buttons simultaneously to activate or
Press the manual operation button for 1 second to switch deactivate the lock.
between manual and programmed operation. ON/OFF ON/OFF
unlocked locked
1 2
+

+
1 2 3 N

03/2009
 Flush mounting type
Directly read-
able clock.
75.2 • Present time is
trimmable every

x 1 minute.

TB72 155
Setting elements integrated at 15
minute intervals throughout the clock
circumference. ON settings are colored

TB72
90
• Load can be turned on and off every 15 minutes
(maximum 48 ON and OFF actions per day),
allowing minute daily time control.
on the dial.
• Operation setting times are found
at a glance with red indicator.

A-TB72
Complies with CE marking
FLAT TIME SWITCHES A-
Surface mounting type
mm Quick
Space-saving.
Depth in the box is less
Flat Time Switches
mountable.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
than 21.7mm72 .
http://www.nais-e.com/ (including the panel thickness.)

Features Part names

1. DIN72 size smart time switch
Flush mounting type is as thin as 32mm Manural switch Power statu
and depth in the box is less • Auto and manual modes are selectable power-failu
Features
than 21.7mm
72
for control. Frequency s
››
2. Easy to read directly readable
DIN72 size smart time switch
clock. ››
A-TB72 Quartz power-failure compensation type commonly
A-TB72·72Q
FLAT
Flush mounting type is as thin as 32mm and depth
3. Load can be turned on and off TIME
in the box is SWITCHESusable over 100 to 240V AC.
less than 21.7mm
every 15 minutes with the 96 setting Flush mounting type ››
Complies with CE marking
Easy-to-read.

››
elements.
Easy to read directly readable clock. Power supply Load
Directly read-
DIN rail mounting possible
››
able clock.
4. Quartz
Load canpower-failure
be turned oncompensation
and off every 15 minutes withterminals
the 96 75.2 terminals • Present time is
type commonly usable over 100 to trimmable every
setting elements.
72
240V AC. 1 minute.
5. Complies with CE marking
Setting elements integrated at 15
Product types Part names minute intervals throughout the clock
Type Rated operating voltage circumference.
Flush mounting type Surface mounting type ON
A-TB72
A-TB72 Manural switch
A-TB72·72Q
A-TB72·72Q
Power status indicator: quartz
100V
• Auto and AC
manual • Load
A-TB72-D-HR1A-100V
modes are selectable can
power-failure
be turned on and off every 15 minutes
A-TB72-DD-HR1C-100V
compensation type. on
FLAT
FLAT TIME
TIME SWITCHES
SWITCHES
72
for control.
90
(maximum 48 ON and OFF actions per day),
Frequency •O
allowingswitchable: ACcontrol.
motor types.
110V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-110V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-110V
minute daily time a
120V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-120V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-120V
AC motor type
200V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-200V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-200V Co
220V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-220V
Easy-to-read. A-TB72-DD-HR1C-220V
Flush mounting type 240V AC Directly read-
A-TB72-D-HR1A-240V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-240V
Quartz power-failure compensation type Surface mounting typeAC
100 to 240V ableA-TB72-Q-HR1A-ACF
clock. A-TB72-QD-HR1C-ACF
75.2 mm
• Present time isSpace-saving.
Quick
trimmable every mountable.
DepthLtd. in the box is less
Part
Part namesnames All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita
RoHS Directive compatibility information Electric Works,
1 minute.
than 21.7mm .
Manural http://www.nais-e.com/ (including the panel thickness.)
Manuralswitchswitch Power
Powerstatus
statusindicator:
indicator:quartz
quartz
••Auto
Autoand
andmanual
manualmodes
modesareareselectable
selectable Setting elements integrated
power-failure at 15
2
72 power-failurecompensation
compensationtype. type.
minute intervalsAC throughout the clock
for
forcontrol.
control.
Features
Frequency
Frequency switchable:
switchable:
circumference.
AC motor
motor types.
types.
ON settings are colored
1. DIN72 size smart time switch
90
• Load can be turned on and off every 15 minutes on the dial.
Flush mounting
(maximum type 48 ON is and
as thin
OFFas 32mm
actions per day), • Operation setting times are found
Easy-to-read.
Easy-to-read. and depth in the
allowing box is
minute less
daily time control. at a glance with red indicator.
Directly
Directlyread- than 21.7mm
read-
able clock.2. Easy to read directly readable
ableclock. Complies with CE marking
••Present
Presenttime clock.
time isis
trimmable
trimmableevery
every
3. Load can be turned on and off
Surface mounting type 11minute.
minute.
every 15 minutes with the 96 setting
mm Quick
elements.
Space-saving. Power supply Load
Setting
Settingelements
elementsintegrated
integratedat at15
15 4. Quartz mountable. DIN
Depth power-failure
in the box is compensation
less terminals terminals
RoHS
minute
minuteDirective compatibility
intervals
intervals throughout
throughoutinformation
the
theclock
clocktype commonly usable over 100 to
than 21.7mm .
http://www.nais-e.com/
circumference.
circumference. 240V AC. ON
ONsettings
(including the panelare
settings are colored
colored
thickness.)
90
90
••Load
Loadcan
canbebeturned
turnedononand
andoff
offevery
every1515minutes
minutes
5. Complies on
onthe
the
with dial.
dial.
CE marking
(maximum
(maximum48
48ON
ONand
andOFF
OFFactions
actionsper
perday),
day),
Features ••Operation
Operationsetting
settingtimes
timesare
arefound
found
Switches

allowing
allowingminute
minutedaily
dailytime
timecontrol.
Time

control. atataaglance
glancewith
withred
redindicator.
indicator.
1. DIN72 size smart time switch Product types
Flush mounting type is as thin as 32mm Complies
CompliesType with
withCE
CEmarking
marking Rated operating voltage Flush mounting type
and depth in the box is less 100V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-100V
than 21.7mm 110V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-110V
2. Easy to read directly readable
mm
mm Quick
Quick 120V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-120V
clock.
Space-saving.
Space-saving. AC motor type
mountable.
and off mountable.
200V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-200V
3. Load
Depth
Depth can
in be
theturned
inthe box
boxis on
isless
less
ation
mation every 1521.7mm
minutes 220V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-220V
than
than 21.7mm . . with the 96 setting
elements.
(including
(includingthe
thepanel
panelthickness.)
thickness.) 240V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-240V
Power supply Load DIN rail mounting possible
4. Quartz power-failure compensation Quartz power-failure compensation
terminals type
terminals 100 to 240V AC A-TB72-Q-HR1A-ACF
type commonly usable over 100 to
 x
156 TB72
Specifications
Drive system AC motor type Quartz power-failure compensation quartz motor type
Types 100V AC, 110V AC, 120V AC
Voltage 100 to 240V AC
200V AC, 220V AC, 240V AC
Frequency 50/60Hz (Switchable) 50/60Hz (Common)
Power consumption 1.5W or less 1W or less
Circuit Input/output separate circuit
Manual ON/AUTO Manual switch provided
Load
Capacity
15A 250V AC
Rating (Resistive load)
System Built-in setting element swing type
Minimum unit 15-minute intervals
Setting
Ninimum range 15 minutes
No. of setting Max. 48 (ON/OFF)
Power failure compensation — 200 hours or more (at 25°C)
Clock accuracy Synchronous with power supply frequency Monthly error: Within ±15 seconds (at 25°C)
Time accuracy
ON clock accuracy ±5 min. (at 25°C), not including time synchronization errors
Contact arrangement Flush mounting type: 1 Form A, Surface mounting type: 1 Form C
Contact
Contact type Solder/tab common terminal: Flush mounting type, Crimp terminal or bare wires: Surface mounting type
specifications
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical life (contact) 105 times or more
Life
Electrical life (at rated load) 2 × 104 times or more (ON/OFF)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated voltage 80 to 110% of rated voltage
More than 100MΩ between charged and uncharged sections
Insulation resistance (initial)
More than 100MΩ between contacts (at 500V DC megger)
Electrical Between charged and uncharged sections: 1,500V AC/1 min.
Dielectric strength (initial)
characteristics Between contacts : 1,000V AC/1 min.
Surge resistance Surge voltage 7,000V (±1.2×50µs one time)
Noise resistance Noise simulator 2,000V Noise simulator 1,000V
Temperature rise 60°C or less (at 25°C)
Malfunctional vibration 10 to 55Hz (amplitude: 0.3mm) for 10 minutes in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Mechanical Destructive vibration 16.7Hz (amplitude: 4.0mm) for 1 hour in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
characteristics Malfunctional shock 49m/s2 {5G} or more, 4 times in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Destructive shock 490m/s2 {50G} or more, 5 times in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Ambient Ambient operating temperature –10°C to +50°C
conditions Ambient operating humidity 45 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight ( ) denotes Surface mounting type 120g (190g ) 100g (170g )
Note) Protective cover is provided on A-TB72.

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)
Switches
Time

All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.


FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW
International Standards
• IEC standard
International Electrotechnical Commission
By promoting international cooperation toward all
problems and related issues regarding
standardization in the electrical and electronic
technology fields, the IEC, a non-governmental
organization, was started in October, 1908, for the
purpose of realizing mutual understanding on an
international level. To this end, the IEC standard
was enacted for the purpose of promoting
international standardization.
North America
UL (Underwiters Laboratories Inc.)
This is a non-profit testing organization formed in
LISTING MARK
1894 by a coalition of U.S. fire insurance firms,
which tests and approves industrial products
(finished products). When electrical products are
marketed in the U.S., UL approval is mandated in
many states, by state law and city ordinances. In
Fig. 1
order to obtain UL approval, the principal parts
contained in industrial products must also be UL-
RECOGNITION MARK
approved parts.
UL approval is divided into two general types. One
is called “listing” (Fig. 1), and applies to industrial
products (finished products). Under this type of
Fig. 2 approval, products must be approved
unconditionally. The other type is called
“recognition” (Fig. 2), and is a conditional approval
which applies to parts and materials.
Certification CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
This was established in 1919 as a non-profit, non-
governmental organization aimed at promoting
standards. It sets standards for industrial products,
parts, and materials, and has the authority to judge
Fig. 3 electrical products to determine whether they
conform to those standards. The CSA is the ultimate
authority in the eyes of both the government and the
Component Acceptance
people in terms of credibility and respect. Almost all
states and provinces in Canada require CSA
approval by law, in order to sell electrical products.
As a result, electrical products exported from Japan
to Canada are not approved under Canadian laws
Fig. 4 unless they have received CSA approval and
display the CSA mark. Approval is called
“certification”, and products and parts which have
been approved are called “certified equipment”, and
display the mark shown in Fig. 3. The mark shown
in Fig. 4 is called the “Component Acceptance”
mark, and indicates conditional approval which is
applicable to parts. The C-UL mark shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 5
(finished products) and Fig. 6 (parts) indicates that
the product has been tested and approved in UL
laboratories, based on UL and CSA standards,
through mutual approval activities.
Fig. 6
x
International standards 157
Europe
Timers
• EN standard
European Standards/Norme Europeennee
(France)/Europaishe Norm (Germany)
Abbreviation for European Standards. A unified
standard enacted by CEN/CENELEC (European
Standards Committee/European Electrical
Standards Committee). EU and EFTA member
nations employ the content of the EN standards into
their own national standards and are obligated to
Time switches
abolish those national standards that do not agree
with the EN standards.
• ENEC mark
The ENEC mark, approved by certifying authorities
in Europe, is for electronic products. It can be
displayed when a product is compliant with the
European safety standard (EN standard). Device
switches that display the ENEC mark can be freely
distributed in the European Economic Area.
• Germany
Counters
VDE (Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker)
The VDE laboratory was established mainly by the
German Electric Technology Alliance, which was
formed in 1893. It carries out safety experiments
and passes approval for electrical devices and
parts. Although VDE certification is not enforced
under German law, punishment is severe should
electrical shock or fire occur; therefore, it is, in fact,
like an enforcement.
Hour meters
TÜV (Technischer Überwachungs-Verein)
TÜV is a civilian, non-profit, independent
organization that has its roots in the German Boiler
Surveillance Association, which was started in 1875
for the purpose of preventing boiler accidents. A
major characteristic of TÜV is that it exists as a
combination of 14 independent organizations (TÜV
Rheinland, TÜV Bayern, etc.) throughout Germany.
TÜV carries out inspection on a wide variety of
industrial devices and equipment, and has been
entrusted to handle electrical products, as well, by
the government. TÜV inspection and certification is
based mainly on the VDE standard. Options
TÜV certification can be obtained from any of the 14
TÜVs throughout Germany and has the same
effectiveness as obtaining VDE certification.
Shipping Standards
• Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
Standards from the Lloyd’s Register shipping
association based in England. These standards are
Information
safety standards for environmental testing of the
temperature and vibration tolerances of electrical
components used for UMS (unmanned machine
rooms in marine vessels) applications. These
standards have become international standards for
control equipment in all marine vessel applications.
No particular action is taken to display the
conformation to these standards on the products.
International
Standards
181
 becomes authorized publicly.

Pilot Duty A300

158
x AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
International standards voltage
[V]
current
[A]
power
[A]
power
[A]
During During
input breaker
120 60 6 7,200 720
10
240 30 3 7,200 720

5. Pilot Duty Pilot Duty B300

One of the specifications in the “UL508 AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
Industrial Control Equipment” regulations at voltage current power power During During
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), has to [V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
do with the grade of contact control capacity 120 30 3 3,600 360
5
by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers 240 15 1.5 3,600 360
Association) standards. By obtaining both UL
and CSA approval for this grade, the product
becomes authorized publicly. Pilot Duty C300
AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
voltage current power power During During
Pilot Duty A300 [V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA] 120 15 1.5 1,800 180
voltage current power power 2.5
During During 240 7.5 0.7 1,800 180
[V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
120 60 6 7,200 720
10
240 30 3 7,200 720

Pilot Duty B300

STANDARDS CHART
AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]

STANDARDS CHART
voltage current power power During During
[V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
120 30 3 3,600 360
5
240 15 1.5 3,600 360

Timers
Timers

Pilot Duty C300 UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified) Lloyd’s Register Standards

Products File No. File No. File No.
AC name
applied Electrification Input Rating
Breaker [VA] Remarks
(Standard (Standard Rating (Standard Rating
voltage current
No.) power power During
No.) During No.)
[V]
PM5S-A/S/M [A]
E43149 [A]
5A250VAC [A] input
E43149 breaker
5A250VAC
— —
PM4S 120 PILOT
15 DUTY C300
1.5 (C-UL)
1,800 PILOT
180 DUTY C300
PM4H-A240
2.5
E122222 5A250VAC
7.5 0.7 1LR39291
,800 5A250VAC
180 98/10004 5A 250V AC
PM4H-S PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300 (resistive)
PM4H-M
PM4H-SD/SDM
Time switches

PM4H-W
E122222 3A250VAC LR39291 3A250VAC 98/10004 3A 250V AC
PM4H-F
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300 (resistive)
E122222 5A250VAC E122222 5A250VAC
LT4H PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
LT4H-L — —
LT4H-W 100mA30VDC 100mA30VDC

E43149 5A250VAC E43149 5A250VAC

QM4H — —
PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
E59504 7A1/6HP125VAC LR39291 7A1/6HP125VAC 88/10123 125V3.5A (COSφ 0.4) Products complying with
7A1/6HP250VAC 7A1/6HP250VAC 250V2A (COSφ 0.4) UL and CSA standards
PMH
3A30VDC 3A30VDC 250V7A(COSφ 0.4) have model numbers
Counters

PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300 ending with “9”.

E122222 7A125VAC LR39291 7A125VAC 98/10004 7A 250V AC
6A250VAC 6A250VAC (resistive)
S1DXM- 2C
A/M
1/6HP125, 250VAC 184
1/6HP125, 250VAC
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
(Relay
output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC 98/10004 5A 250V AC
4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC (resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
E122222 7A125VAC LR39291 7A125VAC 98/10004 7A 250V AC
6A250VAC 6A250VAC (resistive)
2C
S1DX 1/6HP125, 250VAC 1/6HP125, 250VAC
(Relay PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
Hour meters

output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC 98/10004 5A 250V AC

4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC (resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300

Counters
UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified)
International
Standards

Products File No. File No. Remarks

name (Standard Rating (Standard Rating
No.) No.)
LC4H E122222 5A250V AC E122222 5A250V AC
Options

LC4H-L PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300

LC4H-S 100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC
184 E122222 3A250V AC E122222 3A250V AC
LC4H-W PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC
E122222 24 to 240 V AC/DC E122222 24 to 240 V AC/DC
 S1DXM- 2C
1/6HP125, 250VAC 1/6HP125, 250VAC
A/M PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
(Relay
output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC 98/10004 5A 250V AC
4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC (resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300

2C
E122222 7A125VAC
6A250VAC
LR39291 7A125VAC
6A250VAC
x 98/10004 7A 250V AC
International
(resistive)
standards 159
S1DX 1/6HP125, 250VAC 1/6HP125, 250VAC
(Relay PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
Hour meters

output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC 98/10004 5A 250V AC

4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC (resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300

Counters
UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified)
Products File No. File No. Remarks
name (Standard Rating (Standard Rating
No.) No.)
LC4H E122222 5A250V AC E122222 5A250V AC
Options

LC4H-L PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300

LC4H-S 100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC
E122222 3A250V AC E122222 3A250V AC
LC4H-W PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC

LC2H
E122222 24 to 240 V AC/DC
4.5-30 V DC
E122222
(C-UL)
24 to 240 V AC/DC
4.5-30 V DC
STANDARDS CHART
3 V DC 3 V DC

Hour Meters
Information

Timers
UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified)
Products File No. File No. Remarks
name (Standard Rating (Standard Rating
No.) No.)
TH13 and TH23 E42876 115 to 120, 220, LR39291 115 to 120, 220, • For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify “U” at the
series 240V AC 240V AC end of the model No.
• Only black panel-mounting type: UL-recognized and CSA-
E42876 12, 24, 48, 100, LR39291 12, 24, 48, 100,
certified
TH14 and TH24 110, 115 to 120, 200, 110, 115 to 120, 200,
• For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify “U” at the
series 220, 240V AC 220, 240V AC
end of the model No.

Time switches
• Panel-mounting silver type: Not UL-recognized nor CSA-certified
E42876 12, 24, 48, 100, LR39291 12, 24, 48, 100, • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
TH63 and TH64
110, 115 to 120, 200, 110, 115 to 120, 200,
series
220, 240V AC 220, 240V AC
E122222 24 to 240 V AC/DC E122222 24 to 240 V AC/DC • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
LH2H 4.5 to 30 V DC (C-UL) 4.5 to 30 V DC
3 V DC 3 V DC
182
E42876 12 V DC E42876 12 V DC • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
TH8 series
24 V DC (C-UL) 24 V DC

Accessories

Counters
UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified)
Products File No. File No. Remarks
name (Standard Rating (Standard Rating
No.) No.)
E59504 10A250VAC LR39291 10A250VAC
AT8-RFDUL (AT78039) AT8-RFDUL (AT78039)
7A250VAC 7A250VAC
AT8-DF8L (ATA48211) AT8-DF8L (ATA48211)
8P cap was an approved 8P cap was an approved
Common mounting as an option. as an option.
parts for timers AD8-RC (AD8013) AD8-RC (AD8013)
Hour meters

E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031) E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031)

AT8-DF11K (ATC180041) (C-UL) AT8-DF11K (ATC180041)
AT8-R8K (AT78041) AT8-R8K (AT78041)
AT8- R11K (AT78051) AT8- R11K (AT78051)
E59504 10A250V AC LR26550 10A250V AC
AT8-RFD (AT78039) AT8-RFD (AT78039)
7A250V AC 7A250V AC
AT8-DF8L (ATA48211) AT8-DF8L (ATA48211)
8P cap was an approved 8P cap was an approved
Common mounting as an option. as an option.
parts for counter AD8-RC (AD8013) AD8-RC (AD8013)
E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031) E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031)
AT8-DF11K (ATC180041) (C-UL) AT8-DF11K (ATC180041)
Options

AT8-R8K (AT78041) AT8-R8K (AT78041)

AT8- R11K (AT78051) AT8- R11K (AT78051)
International
Standards
Information
 x
160 PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO EN/IEC STANDARDS
International standards
PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO EN/IEC STANDARDS
Timer, Time switch, Counter and Hour meter

Timers
Product
Product name EMC directives Low-voltage directives
classification
LT4H
LT4H-L
LT4H-W
PM4H
EN61812-1
Timers S1DX EN61000-6-4/EN61000-6-2
S1DXM-AM

Time switches
PM5S-A/S/M
PM4S
QM4H EN61010-1
A-TB72
Time Switch EN61000-6-4/EN61000-6-2 EN61812-1
A-TB72Q
LC4H
LC4H-L
EN61812-1
LC4H-S
Counters EN61000-6-4/EN61000-6-2
LC4H-W
LC2H EN61010-1

Counters
LC2H preset —
TH13
TH23
TH14
TH24
TH40 EN61010-1
Hour Meters TH50 EN61000-6-4/EN61000-6-2
TH63
TH64

Hour meters
LH2H
LH2H preset
—
TH8
Note: For detailed information about the compliance conditions, see CE marking under PRECAUTIONS IN USING (Common).

Options
Information
International
Standards

185

CE MARKINGS OVERVIEW
CE MARKINGS OVERVIEW
CE markings and EC directives
Timers
The world’s largest single market, the European Community (EC) was
born on 1 January 1993 (changing its name to EU in November 1993. It
is now always expressed as EU, apart from EC directives.) EU member
country products have always had their quality and safety guaranteed
according to the individual standards of each member country. However,
the standards of each country being different prevented the free flow of
goods within the EU. For this reason, in order to eliminate non-tariff
barriers due to these standards, and to maximize the merits of EU
unification, the EC directives were issued and applied concomitant to the
Time switches
birth of the EU.
The EN standards were established as universal EU standards in order
to facilitate EU directives. These standards were merged with the
international IEC standards and henceforth reflect the standards in all
countries. Also, the CE markings show that products conform to EC
directives, and guarantee the free flow of products within the EC.
Panasonic Electric Works is committed to providing products that are
acceptable to the European market.
From validation of CE Mark compliance to sales within
the EU
Validation of compliance
Counters
Design and manufacture of machinery,
and electrical devices and equipment
Use of EN/IEC
to EU directives, etc.
conforming electronic
components
(relays, switches, etc.)
Design of
machinery, and
electrical devices and
equipment based
on EN/IEC
conformity of modules
Hour meters
Appropriate EC directives for control equipment products
The main EC directives that are to do with machinery and electrical
equipment are the machinery directive, the EMC directive, the low voltage
directive, and the R & TTE directive (R & TTE: Radio equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment). Initial day of enforcement
depends upon directive: Machinery Directive January 1st, 1995; EMC
Directive January 1st, 1996; Low Voltage Directive, January 1st, 1997;
and R&TTE Directive, April 8th, 2000.
• Machinery directive
Machinery that is supplied to the market is to have no adverse effects on
Options
the health or safety of people if the machine is properly installed,
maintained, and used only as intended. These considerations determine
the necessary safety requirements. With some exceptions, the directive
covers mainly machine tools and injection mold equipment, automated
machinery, construction equipment, and other industrial machinery, but it
also covers some household machinery products that have hazardous
moving parts.
• ECM directive
Before electric and electronic equipment can be sold, it must conform to
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) requirements. Effectively, such
Information
equipment must neither be a source of EMI (electromagnetic
interference), nor malfunction owing to extraneous EMS (electromagnetic
susceptibility). As well as products such as television and radio, mobile
phones and personal computers, regulated products that emit
electromagnetic waves include NC machinery and machine tools which
use solenoids and motors, and items such as robot controllers. So, not
only must equipment not emit electromagnetic waves that have a
powerful external effect, it is also required to be immune to influence from
extraneous electromagnetic waves.
• Low voltage directive
To be eligible for sale in various countries, electrical products that use
relatively low voltage (AC 50 to 1,000 V; DC 75 to 1,500 V) must conform
to the basic requirements that are stipulated for the country. This directive
is in legal force in each country with the effect that only products
conforming to the stipulations of the directive can be sold. It is applicable
184
x 161
CE markings overview
to nearly every type of electrical product and device including domestic
appliances and office equipment.
• R & TTE directive
This directive applies to all terminal equipment that is directly or indirectly
connected to public lines and all communications equipment that sends
or receives radio transmissions. Fax machines, modems, and other
wireless devices are also included within its broad scope.
To stipulate more detailed technical specifications, EN regulations and
common technical standards known as CTR are also applied. In this way,
the directive regulates the particular needs of the R&TTE field that cannot
be covered by the Low Voltage Directive or the EMC Directive.
What are EN standards?
An abbreviation of Norme Europeenne (in French), and called European
Standards in English. Approval is by vote among the CEN/CENELEC
member countries, and is a unified standards
limited to EU member countries, but the contents conform to the
international ISO/IEC standards.
If the relevant EN standard does not exist, it is necessary to obtain
approval based on the relevant IEC standard or, if the relevant IEC
standard does not exist, the relevant standard from each country, such as
VDE, BS, SEMKO, and so forth.
To EU market
Types of standard and accreditation institutions
Display of CE Marks
on machines, and
electrical devices The 25 members of the EU and four countries in the EFTA are obliged to
and equipment adopt EN regulations as applicable national standards. Consequently, a
DOW (latest date of withdrawal of conflicting national standards) is
decided and, during the stipulated period, a signatory nation must
withdraw any national standards that are in conflict with EN regulations.
Declaration of
IEC
(International standard)
EN
(European standard)
(Standard form
each country)
VDE BS KEMA SEMKO
SEV DEMKO
Conformity to standards
If there is no applicable EN standard (or HD document), products must
conform either to standards based on IEC or, if there is no IEC standard,
to standards applicable in particular countries such as VDE, BS, and
SEMKO.
Relationship with ISO9000
Each EC directive stipulates, as one of the conditions for display of the
CE mark, that the each factory producing the marked products has a
proper policy regarding quality assurance. The ISO9000 series (ISO9001
and ISO9002) has become a widespread national standard for factory
quality assurance systems.
ISO9001
Quality assurance system for design, development, monitoring,
manufacturing, inspection, installation, and service
ISO9002
Quality assurance system for manufacturing, inspection, and service
The automation control products of Panasonic Electric Works are
manufactured in facilities that are verified to have excellent quality
assurance systems based on compliance with ISO9000 Series standards
International
Standards
issued by an internationally recognized accreditation and certification
body.
162 Panasonic Products

Panasonic Electric Works offers a wide product range from one source, from individual components to complete systems.
Technology support for advice, design-in, installation and commissioning by our qualified application engineers round off
the Panasonic service profile.

Human machine interfaces

Our compact size, bright and easy-to-read human machine interfaces can be used to visua-
lize inspection results. Touch panels can even replace the standard keypad if you so desire.

UV curing systems
Aicure UJ30 is a LED curing system that quickly hardens UV-sensitive resins such as
adhesives, ink and coatings. Its cutting edge LED technology is especially suited for precise,
high-intensity curing.

ACD components
Components such as Eco-POWER METERS, timers/counters, temperature controllers, limit
switches and fans round off our wide factory automation product range.

Sensors
As a pioneering manufacturer of sensors, Panasonic provides high performance sensors for
a wide range of applications, facilitating factory automation in various types of production
lines, such as those used for the manufacturing of semiconductors.

Laser Markers
Panasonic Laser Markers are ideal for non-contact, permanent labeling of most materials,
e.g. metal, plastics, glass, paper, wood and leather. Several CO2 laser marking systems and
a unique FAYb fiber laser marker can be easily integrated into existing production systems for
a great variety of marking tasks.
x Memo 163
 Global Network
Global Network

North America Europe Asia Pacific China Japan

Panasonic Electric Works

Please contact our Global Sales Companies in:
Europe

▸ Headquarters Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Robert-Koch-Straße 100, 85521 Ottobrunn, Tel. +49 89 45354-1000, Fax +49 89 45354-2111, www.panasonic-electric-works.com
▸ Austria Panasonic Electric Works Austria GmbH Josef Madersperger Str. 2, 2362 Biedermannsdorf, Tel. +43 (0) 2236-26846, Fax +43 (0) 2236-46133
www.panasonic-electric-works.at
Panasonic Industrial Devices Materials Ennshafenstraße 30, 4470 Enns, Tel. +43 (0) 7223 883, Fax +43 (0) 7223 88333, www.panasonic-electronic-materials.com
Europe GmbH
▸ Benelux Panasonic Electric Works De Rijn 4, (Postbus 211), 5684 PJ Best, (5680 AE Best), Netherlands, Tel. +31 (0) 499 372727, Fax +31 (0) 499 372185,
Sales Western Europe B.V. www.panasonic-electric-works.nl
▸ Czech Republic Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG, Administrative centre PLATINIUM, Veveří 3163/111, 616 00 Brno, Tel. +420 541 217 001, Fax +420 541 217 101,
organizační složka www.panasonic-electric-works.cz
▸ France Panasonic Electric Works Succursale française, 10, rue des petits ruisseaux, 91370 Verrières Le Buisson, Tél. +33 (0) 1 6013 5757, Fax +33 (0) 1 6013 5758,
Sales Western Europe B.V. www.panasonic-electric-works.fr
▸ Germany Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Robert-Koch-Straße 100, 85521 Ottobrunn, Tel. +49 89 45354-1000, Fax +49 89 45354-2111, www.panasonic-electric-works.de
▸ Hungary Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Magyarországi Közvetlen Kereskedelmi Képviselet, 1117 Budapest, Neumann János u. 1., Tel. +43 2236 26846-25,
Mobile: +36 20 264 9896, Fax +43 2236 46133, www.panasonic-electric-works.hu
▸ Ireland Panasonic Electric Works UK Ltd. Irish Branch Office, Dublin, Tel. +353 (0) 14600969, Fax +353 (0) 14601131, www.panasonic-electric-works.co.uk
▸ Italy Panasonic Electric Works Italia srl Via del Commercio 3-5 (Z.I. Ferlina), 37012 Bussolengo (VR), Tel. +39 0456752711, Fax +39 0456700444,
www.panasonic-electric-works.it
▸ Nordic Countries Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Filial Nordic, Knarrarnäsgatan 15, 164 40 Kista, Sweden, Tel. +46 859476680, Fax +46 859476690, www.panasonic-electric-works.se
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB Jungmansgatan 12, 21119 Malmö, Tel. +46 40 697 7000, Fax +46 40 697 7099, www.panasonic-fire-security.com
▸ Poland Panasonic Electric Works Polska sp. z o.o ul. Wołoska 9A, 02-583 Warszawa, Tel. +48 22 338-11-33, Fax +48 22 338-12-00, www.panasonic-electric-works.pl
▸ Spain Panasonic Electric Works España S.A. Barajas Park, San Severo 20, 28042 Madrid, Tel. +34 913293875, Fax +34 913292976, www.panasonic-electric-works.es
▸ Switzerland Panasonic Electric Works Schweiz AG Grundstrasse 8, 6343 Rotkreuz, Tel. +41 (0) 41 7997050, Fax +41 (0) 41 7997055, www.panasonic-electric-works.ch
▸ United Kingdom Panasonic Electric Works UK Ltd. Sunrise Parkway, Linford Wood, Milton Keynes, MK14 6 LF, Tel. +44 (0) 1908 231555, Fax +44 (0) 1908 231599,
www.panasonic-electric-works.co.uk

North & South America

▸ USA Panasonic Industrial Devices Sales Company Two Riverfront Plaza, 7th Floor, Newark, NJ 07102-5490, Tel. 1-8003-442-112, www.pewa.panasonic.com
of America
Asia Pacific / China / Japan

▸ China Panasonic Electric Works Sales (China) Co. Ltd. Tower C 3rd Floor, Office Park, NO.5 Jinghua South Street, Chaoyang District, Beijing 100020, Tel. +86-10-5925-5988,
Fax +86-10-5925-5980
▸ Hong Kong Panasonic Industrial Devices Sales (HK) Co., Suite 301, 3/F, Chinachem Golden Plaza, 77 Mody Road, TST East, Kowloon, Hong Kong, Tel. +852-2529-3956, Fax +852-2528-6991
Ltd.
▸ Japan Panasonic Corporation 1006, Oaza Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8501, Japan, Tel. +81-6-6908-1121, www.panasonic.net
▸ Singapore Panasonic Industrial Devices No.3 Bedok South Road, Singapore 469269, Tel. +65-6299-9181, Fax +65-6390-3953
Automation Controls Sales Asia Pacific

Copyright © 2016 • Printed in Germany

6208 euen 11/16